JP2019013261A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it possible to prevent reflected glare of light on a glass pane.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a glass pane 671a disposed on the front side of game machine bodies 301, 302 so that a game area 323 is visible, and light emitting means 811 disposed on the front side from the glass pane 671a. The game machine further includes reflected glare prevention means 804 for preventing reflected glare of light on the glass pane 671a from the light emitting means 811. The reflected glare prevention means 804 has a reflected glare prevention wall 804a disposed between the glass pane 671a and the light emitting means 811. Further, the upper side of the reflected glare prevention wall 804a is inclined toward the light emitting means 811 side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 146

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrange ball machine, and a slot machine.

In the pachinko machine, a large image display means such as a liquid crystal display means is arranged at a substantially central part of the game area of the game board mounted on the game machine body, and various effect images are displayed by the image display means during the game. While displaying a notification image or the like, there is one in which an operation effect means having a light emitting means is disposed inside at a central front end portion or the like of a protruding unit such as a dish unit protruding forward from the lower front side of the gaming machine body (patent) Reference 1).
In this pachinko machine, when the player operates the operation effect means within a predetermined effective operation period according to the notification image on the image display means, the light emission means in the operation effect means emits light, and the operation is performed. Various related operation effect images are displayed on the image display means to perform operation effects.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-159834

This type of pachinko machine has an advantage that the player's interest can be aroused during the game by light emission of the light emitting means in the operation effect means and various operation effect images displayed on the image display means.
However, in recent pachinko machines, since the image display means tends to be large, the light from the operation effect means in the light emission effect state is reflected on a transparent plate (glass plate) such as a glass unit in front of the game area. There is a problem that the light enters the player's field of view through the transparent plate, or the reflected image makes it difficult to see the display image of the image display means and the open / close state of the winning means in the game area.
In view of such a conventional problem, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent light from being reflected on a glass plate.

The present invention provides a gaming machine including a glass plate disposed on the front side of a gaming machine body so that a game area can be visually recognized, and a light emitting unit disposed on the front side of the glass plate. Reflecting prevention means for preventing reflection on the glass plate is provided.
The reflection preventing means may have a reflection prevention wall disposed between the glass plate and the light emitting means. A light guide part for guiding light from the light emitting means may be provided, and a part of the reflection preventing wall may be provided above the light guide part.

  According to the present invention, there is an advantage that reflection of light on a glass plate can be prevented.

1 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a plane sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front part of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board rear part of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the rear part of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image display area of the same pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image display area of the same pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the hit probability and fluctuation time of the normal symbol for every gaming state of the pachinko machine, and the opening / closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of the jackpot determination random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, jackpot state, and special game state in the case of jackpot determination and out-of-game determination for the first and second special symbols of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the design symbol of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding base image of the same pachinko machine, a holding display image, and the changing holding image. It is a figure which shows an example of the left strike guidance image and the right strike guidance image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error alerting | reporting image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume adjustable notification image and light quantity adjustable notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume setting image and light quantity setting image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the customer waiting | waiting effect process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the menu management process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process at the time of the presentation button press of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process at the time of pressing down the upper key (down key) of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu displayable alert image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu image and menu operation notification image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the low-order menu image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when the selection item in which the lower menu of the same pachinko machine does not exist is selected. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of the movable body at the time of each mode of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the power saving mode alerting | reporting image of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) in the customer waiting state of the pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) at the time of the menu display of the pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) in the normal fluctuation | variation of the same pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) in the reach fluctuation | variation of the same pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) in the step-up notice effect of the same pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) of the button conversation notice effect of the same pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the example of an image display at the time of operation button operation in the button conversation announcement effect of the pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) of the 1st step in the mini character notice effect of the pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the correspondence (b) of the image display example (a) of the 2nd step in the mini character notice effect of the pachinko machine, and each image and the area | region on a display screen. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a plane sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is the top view (a) and front view (b) of the inclination movable production | presentation means of the pachinko machine. It is the top view (a) and front view (b) of the raising / lowering movable production | presentation means of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement pattern of the movable body of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko machine. It is a conceptual block diagram of the image deformation process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the image rotation process of the same pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the image rotation process of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of a movable body and display image at the time of execution of the inclination notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation | transformation information of each image at the time of execution of the inclination notice effect of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of a display image when there is a door opening error or volume change operation during execution of the tilt notice effect with the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation | transformation information of each image at the time of execution of the inclination descent notice effect of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation | transformation information of each image at the time of execution of the inclination descent notice effect of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of a movable body and a display image in the case of performing tilting notice effect at the time of a symbol change start with the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation | transformation information of each image in the case of performing a tilt notice effect at the time of a symbol change start with the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement log | history of a movable body and each image at the time of performing tilt notice effect at the time of a symbol change start with the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the change of a movable body and display image at the time of performing the inclination descent | fall notification effect at the time of a symbol change start with the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the display priority and deformation | transformation information of each image in the case of performing the inclination descent | fall notice effect at the time of a symbol change start with the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement log | history of a movable body and each image in the case of performing the inclination descent | fall notice effect at the time of a symbol change start with the same pachinko machine. The movable body and the display image (a), the display priority and deformation information (b) of each image displayed on the image display means, and the sub-image display means when the tilt effect is performed in the pachinko machine while waiting for the customer It is a figure which shows the display priority and deformation | transformation information (c) of each image displayed. The movable body and the display image (a) when the menu display operation is performed during execution of the tilt effect on the pachinko machine, the display priority and deformation information (b) of each image displayed on the image display means, and the sub image display It is a figure which shows the display priority and deformation | transformation information (c) of each image displayed on a means. It is a whole front view of the pachinko machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a plane sectional view of the portion containing the front frame and game board. It is a plane sectional view of the portion containing the front frame, game board, and joint part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part side including the front frame and game board. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the lower part side including the front frame and game board. It is a front view of the lower mounting part side of the front frame. It is a front view of the game board. It is a rear view of the same game board. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is plane sectional drawing of the part containing the front frame, game board, and movable production | presentation means. It is a front view of the part containing the attachment frame and movable production | presentation means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the said movable production | presentation means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center display frame. It is a front view of the stage part of the game board. It is a plane sectional view of the center display frame. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the same center display frame. It is a disassembled perspective view of the attachment frame and a harness cradle. It is a rear view of the attachment frame and a harness cradle. It is a plane sectional view of the portion containing the game board and the main control board case. It is a plane sectional view of the portion containing the game board and harness cradle. It is sectional drawing of the image display means. It is a rear view of the image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the game board. It is explanatory drawing of the display area of the image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the image display means. It is a rear view of the game board which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same mounting frame and side board mounting base. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the part containing the game board, an image display means, and an effect control board case. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the part containing the game board, an image display means, and a side board mounting base. It is a cross-sectional view of the portion including the game board and the upper guide rail. It is a cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board and image display means. It is a cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board, image display means and effect control board case. It is a cross-sectional view of the image display means. It is a perspective view of the image display means. It is a cross-sectional view of the harness cradle part. It is a rear view of the harness cradle part. It is sectional drawing of the attachment state of the fastener for the harness. It is a cross-sectional view of the principal part of the display means mounting part. It is a cross-sectional view of the pushing means. It is a rear view of the same attachment frame and image display means. It is explanatory drawing of the mounting process of the image display means. It is a front view of the pachinko machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the front door. It is a rear view of the front door. It is an expanded sectional view of the important section of the outer frame. It is another expanded sectional view of the same outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front door. It is a plane sectional view of the front door lower part. It is a perspective view of the back side of the locking part of the front door. It is a rear view of the locking part of the front door. It is sectional drawing of the locking part of the front door. It is a plane sectional view of the upper projection part of the same side unit. It is a front sectional view of the same side unit. It is a front sectional view of the same side unit. It is a plane sectional view of the same side unit. It is sectional drawing of the same speaker. It is a front view of the second side unit. It is a side view of the 2nd side part unit. It is a rear view of the second side unit. It is front sectional drawing of the light emission decoration part. It is front sectional drawing of the light emission decoration part. It is a plane sectional view of the light emission decoration part. It is front sectional drawing of the ventilation part of the 2nd side part unit. It is side surface sectional drawing of the ventilation part of the 2nd side part unit. It is a plane sectional view of the ventilation part of the 2nd side part unit. It is sectional drawing of the positioning means of the said 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the latching means of the 2nd side part unit. It is sectional drawing of the latching means of the 2nd side part unit. It is sectional drawing of the latching means of the 2nd side part unit. It is sectional drawing of the fixing means of the said 2nd side unit. It is sectional drawing of the fixing means of the said 2nd side unit. It is a rear view of the upper part of the front door. It is an expanded sectional view of the front frame and the front door. It is a partially broken top view of the front extension unit. It is explanatory drawing of the standing state of the pachinko machine. It is a partially broken side view by the side of the same operation effect means. It is side surface sectional drawing by the side of the same operation effect means. It is front sectional drawing by the side of the same operation effect means. It is a plane sectional view by the side of the same operation production means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front extension unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same operation effect means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same operation effect means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same operation effect means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same operation effect means. It is front sectional drawing of the drive part. It is side surface sectional drawing of the drive part. It is a disassembled perspective view of the same operation effect means. It is an expanded sectional view of the buffer means. It is explanatory drawing of the same reflection state. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine concerning the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially broken side view of the pachinko machine concerning the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the pachinko machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the second side unit. It is a rear view of the second side unit. It is a plane sectional view of the front frame and the 2nd side part unit. It is a plane sectional view of the right side projection part of the 2nd side part unit. It is a partially broken left side view of the right side protrusion of the second side unit. It is front sectional drawing of the vibration-type production | presentation means. It is a plane sectional view of the vibration type production means. It is front sectional drawing by the side of the buffering means of the same vibration type production | presentation means. It is a right view of the vibration type production means. It is a right view of the same second side unit. It is side surface sectional drawing of the said 2nd side unit. It is side surface sectional drawing of the upper side protrusion part of the 2nd side part unit. It is front sectional drawing of the upper side protrusion part of the 2nd side part unit. (A) is a plane explanatory view, and (b) is a side view. It is explanatory drawing of the same light guide part. It is explanatory drawing of the reflective state of the same light guide part. It is a plane sectional view of the 2nd side part unit concerning a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a plane sectional view of the 2nd side part unit concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd side part unit which concerns on the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is the same block diagram. It is explanatory drawing of the same model information. It is explanatory drawing of the same layer.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 to 38 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is employed in a pachinko machine. 1 and 2, the gaming machine main body 1 includes an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotably attached to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge 4 that is arranged on one end side in the left-right direction, for example, the left end side. The outer frame 2 can be locked in a closed state by a locking means 5 provided on the opposite side, for example, the right end side.

  The front frame 3 includes a main body frame 6 and a glass door 7 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotably attached to the main body frame 6 via a second hinge 8 in the vertical direction arranged at one end side in the left-right direction, for example, the left end side. Can be locked in the closed state. In addition, the 1st hinge 4 and the 2nd hinge 8 are arrange | positioned so that it may become the same axial center.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c and 2d. A front cover member 9 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front lower portion of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the front lower portions of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. . The front cover member 9 projects forward of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b, and the main body frame 6 is disposed on the upper side thereof. Further, on the outer frame 2, an outer frame upper hinge fitting 11 constituting the first hinge 4 is arranged on the upper left side, and similarly, an outer frame lower hinge fitting 12 is arranged on the upper side of the front cover member 9 in the lower left portion.

  The main body frame 6 is made of synthetic resin and has a rectangular frame portion 13 that can substantially contact the front edge side of the outer frame 2 on the upper side of the front cover member 9 and a game board provided on the upper side in the frame portion 13. The mounting portion 14 and a lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side in the frame portion 13 are integrally provided. A game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting part 14 from the front side, and the lower mounting part 15 is provided with a launching means 17, a lower speaker 18 and the like on the front side thereof. The main body frame 6 includes a main body frame hinge metal fitting 19 constituting the first hinge 4 and a main body frame upper hinge metal fitting 20 constituting the second hinge 8 at the upper left portion, and the first and second hinges 4, 8. Body frame lower hinge fittings 21 are respectively arranged in the lower left part.

  The glass door 7 includes a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 6. The door base 22 is formed with a window hole 24a of a glass window 24 corresponding to the front side of the game area 23 formed in the game board 16, and a plurality (four in this case) around the window hole 24a. Producing means such as the upper speaker 25 and the air blowing effect device 26 are arranged, and an upper decorative cover 27 that covers the upper speaker 25 and the like from the front side is attached.

  Further, on the lower front side of the door base 22, there is an upper plate 30 that stores game balls paid out from the payout means 28 disposed on the rear side of the main body frame 6 and supplies them to the launching means 17, and the upper plate 30. A lower tray 31 for storing surplus balls when full, a firing handle 32 for operating the firing means 17 and the like are disposed, and a lower decorative cover 33 that substantially covers the upper plate 30 and the lower plate 31 from the front side. Is installed. The lower decorative cover 33 is formed in a forwardly bulging shape, and operation means such as an effect button 34 and a cross operation means 35 that can be pressed by the player are provided on the upper side. The cross operation means 35 includes four operation units including a rear upper key 35a, a front lower key 35b, a left left key 35c, and a right right key 35d.

  A glass unit 36 is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 22 so as to substantially close the window hole 24a from the rear side, and is disposed along the edge on the first and second hinges 4 and 8 side. The vertical hinge end side reinforcing sheet metal 37, the vertical opening / closing end side reinforcing sheet metal 38 arranged along the edge of the opening / closing end side, and the left / right lower side reinforcement arranged below the window hole 24a. The sheet metal 39 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like. Further, on the door base 22, the glass door upper hinge fitting 40 constituting the second hinge 8 is arranged at the upper left portion, and the glass door lower hinge fitting 41 is arranged at the lower left portion, respectively.

  Further, on the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 39, a ball feeding unit 42, a lower dish guide unit 43, and the like are mounted. The ball feeding unit 42 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 30 one by one to the launching means 17 and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 17. The lower tray guide unit 43 guides the surplus balls when the upper tray 30 is full and the foul balls returned by the launching means 17 without reaching the game area 23 to the lower tray 31. The first and second hinges 4 and 8 are disposed adjacent to the ball feeding unit 42.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6 and the like, the game board 16 includes a base plate 45 formed of a non-translucent material such as a veneer plate, and a game ball launched from the launching means 17 on the front side of the base plate 45. A guide rail 46 that guides the game is annularly mounted, and game parts such as a central display frame unit 47, a start winning unit 48, a big winning unit 49, and a normal winning unit 50 are provided in the game area 23 inside the guide rail 46. In addition, a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged.

  In addition to various display means such as a normal symbol display means 51, a normal reserved number display means 52, a first special symbol display means 53, a second special symbol display means 54, etc. A symbol starting means 55, a first special symbol starting means 56, a second special symbol starting means 57, a big winning means 58, a plurality of normal winning means 59, and the like are provided. Further, as shown in FIGS. 5, 7, 8, etc., an image display means 60 made up of liquid crystal display means is mounted on the rear side of the base plate 45 via a back mounting base 61.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the base plate 45 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a plurality of base plates 45 for mounting the central display frame unit 47, the start winning unit 48, the big winning unit 49, the normal winning unit 50, etc. For example, three mounting holes 62 to 64, an out port 65, and the like are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 62 is for mounting the central display frame unit 47 and is provided corresponding to a range excluding a part of the game area 23 such as the lower side. The mounting holes 63 and 64 are used for mounting the start winning unit 48 and the normal winning unit 50, respectively, and are provided independently from the other mounting holes at the center lower part and the lower left part of the game area 23, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, 7, 8, and the like, the back mounting base 61 is formed substantially in parallel with the base plate 45 and has a back wall portion in which a rectangular opening 66 a is formed at a substantially center thereof. 66, a peripheral wall portion 67 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the back wall portion 66 to the back surface of the base plate 45, and protruding from the front edge portion of the peripheral wall portion 67 along the back surface of the base plate 45; A fixing portion 68 fixed to the base plate 45 by a fixing screw or the like is integrally provided, and is detachable in a state where the vertically long image display means 60 is accommodated in the accommodation case 69 on the back side of the back wall portion 66. It is fixed to.

  The housing case 69 is formed in a flat box shape with the front side open. The image display means 60 is fitted into the housing case 69 from the front side with the display screen 60a facing the front side, and is fixed by screwing or the like. The housing case 69 is integrally provided with a lower fixing portion 69a that protrudes downward from the front side of the lower end portion and an upper fixing portion 69b that protrudes upward from the front side of the upper end portion, and the lower fixing portion 69a is provided on the back wall portion 66. With the upper fixing portion 69b screwed to the back wall portion 66 in a state of being fitted in a recess (not shown) on the side, the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the image display means 60 abuts on the back side of the back wall portion 66 or It is detachably fixed to the back side of the back mounting base 61 in a close state.

  In the present embodiment, the entire display screen 60a of the image display means 60 is a full screen area A in which an image can be displayed (see FIG. 9A), and the back wall portion 66 of the back mounting base 61 is provided. A part (hereinafter referred to as the window frame portion 74) is in contact with or close to the front side of the entire screen area A corresponding to the area having a substantially constant width on the outer peripheral side. Hereinafter, a portion corresponding to the rear side of the window frame portion (game member) 74 in the entire screen region A is referred to as a first fixed concealment region B1 (see FIG. 9B). In the present embodiment, the window frame portion 74 is transparent, and among the images displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the first fixed concealment area B1 also from the front side through the window frame section 74. Visible.

  Here, the “hidden area” means that a certain member is present on the front side of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60, so that when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine, that is, on the rear side of the member. An area that overlaps. Therefore, if the front member is opaque, the image displayed in the concealment region cannot be viewed in front view. The first fixed concealment region B1 is a “concealment region”, but since the front window frame portion 74 is transparent, the display image can be viewed in front view as long as no other member is present on the front side. Even in the “hidden region”, if there is a space between the front member and the front member, the display image may be visually recognized by shifting (looking into) the viewpoint so as to avoid the front member.

  In addition, one or a plurality of, for example, four movable effect units 75 to 78 are arranged on the front side of the back mounting base 61. As shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 8, etc., the first movable effect means 75 includes a first movable body 75 a and first drive means 75 b that drives the first movable body 75 a in the vertical direction. Yes. The first movable body 75a is arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front side of the image display means 60. For example, an arbitrary decoration (in this case, a three-dimensional decoration using an airplane as a motif) is provided on the front side of the first movable body 75a. The image display means 60 is supported by a pair of first drive means 75b, 75b arranged on the front side corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 60 so as to be movable in the vertical direction via the first drive coupling bodies 79, 79, respectively. Has been.

  The first driving means 75b is supported by the back mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 80, and is arranged from the upper end side to the lower end side along the side edge of the image display means 60, and the first driving connection. An elongate cylindrical elevating guide 81 for guiding the body 79 in the vertical direction, a driving pulley 82a disposed in the vicinity of one end side of the elevating guide 81, for example, the lower end side, and the other end side of the elevating guide 81 For example, a driven pulley 82b disposed in the vicinity thereof corresponding to the upper end side, a drive source 83 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 82a, and the drive pulley 82a and the driven pulley 82b are wound around and An endless gear belt 84 to which the first drive connecting body 79 is fixed is provided at a predetermined position on the circumference, and the end of the first movable body 75a is pivoted in the front-rear direction on the first drive connecting body 79. It is coupled rotatably by.

  The first movable body 75a is positioned by the pair of left and right first driving means 75b and 75b in an upper position on the upper front side of the image display means 60 (FIGS. 28 (a), (c), It is movable between (d)) and a lower position on the lower front side (FIG. 28 (b)). Further, the front end side of the first movable body 75a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 45 through the mounting hole 62 (FIG. 4). Of course, the first movable body 75a may move and stop in an oblique state.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 8 and the like, the second movable effect means 76 includes a second movable body 76a and a second driving means 76b for driving the second movable body 76a in the vertical direction. Yes. The second movable body 76a is arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front side of the image display means 60, and has an arbitrary decoration on the front side (not shown), and both left and right sides are on the left and right sides of the image display means 60. The pair of second drive means 76b and 76b are supported in a state of being movable in the vertical direction via the second drive coupling bodies 85 and 85, respectively.

  The second driving means 76b is arranged on the rear side of the first driving means 75b and on the front side of the back mounting base 61, arranged on the lower side along the side edge of the image display means 60, and the second driving connection. An elongate cylindrical elevating guide 86 for guiding the body 85 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 87a disposed in the vicinity of one end side, for example, the upper end side of the elevating guide 86, and the other end side of the elevating guide 86 For example, a driven pulley 87b disposed in the vicinity thereof corresponding to the lower end side, a drive source 88 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 87a, and the drive pulley 87a and the driven pulley 87b are wound around and An endless gear belt 89 to which the second drive connecting body 85 is fixed is provided at a predetermined position on the circumference, and the end of the second movable body 76a is rotated around the second drive connecting body 85 by a pivot in the front-rear direction. Capable of being connected.

  The second movable body 76a is positioned at the lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 60 (FIGS. 28A and 28B) while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by the pair of left and right second driving means 76b and 76b. And an upper position (FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d)) on the front side in the vertical direction. Of course, the second movable body 76a may move and stop in an oblique state.

  Note that the movement path of the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a partially overlap each other when viewed from the front, but the movement path of the first movable body 75a is relative to the movement path of the second movable body 76a. Therefore, the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a can move without interfering with each other.

  The third movable effect means 77 and the fourth movable effect means 78 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 60 as shown in FIGS. . The third and fourth movable effect means 77 and 78 are the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a and the third and fourth drive means 77b for driving the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a in the left-right direction. , 78b. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are arranged vertically in front of the left and right edges of the image display means 60, respectively, and are arbitrarily decorated on the front side (not shown). .

  The third and fourth drive means 77b and 78b are constituted by electromagnetic slide tables in which the slide part 92 can slide in the left-right direction with respect to the base part 91. The base portion 91 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 67 of the back mounting base 61, and the third and fourth movable bodies 77 a and 78 a are fixed to the front side of the slide portion 92. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are moved to the external positions (FIGS. 28 (a) to (c)) on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 60 by the third and fourth drive means 77b and 78b, respectively. The position can be moved between the inner position in the left-right direction (FIG. 28D).

  Note that the third movable body 77a and the fourth movable body 78a do not interfere with each other because their movement paths are separated from each other on the left and right. In addition, the movement paths of the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are on the rear side of the movement path of the first movable body 75a and on the front side of the movement path of the second movable body 76a. The movable bodies 77a and 78a and the first and second movable bodies 75a and 76a can move without interfering with each other.

  Moreover, the part corresponding to the back side of the 1st-4th movable bodies 75a-78a among the full screen area | regions A is called movable concealment area C (FIG.10 (c)). Of course, each of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a can move between a plurality of stop positions. Therefore, if the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a move, the movable concealment region C changes accordingly. To do. Note that the movable concealment region C may not exist. Of the image displayed in the entire screen area A, the portion displayed in the movable concealment area C cannot be visually recognized from the front because it is blocked by at least the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a. Since all of the movable bodies 75a to 78a are spaced forward from the image display means 60, at least a part of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

  As described above, the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a are disposed between the image display means 60 and the base plate 45, and only a part of the front end side of the first movable body 75a is attached to the base via the mounting hole 62. Projecting to the front side of the plate 45.

  Further, at least a part of the full screen area A of the image display means 60 protrudes outside the mounting hole 62 of the base plate 45 in a front view. Hereinafter, in the entire screen area A, a part corresponding to the rear side of the base plate (game member) 45 (here, a part corresponding to the rear side of the mounting hole other than the mounting hole 62) is defined as the second fixed concealment area. This is referred to as B2 (FIG. 9C).

  Of the image displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the second fixed concealment area B2 is not visible from the front because it is blocked by at least the base plate 45. Since it is arranged behind 45, by shifting the viewpoint, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The guide rail 46 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 45 so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the game area 23, and as shown in FIGS. 3, 5, 8, etc., three first to third rail members 101 to 103 are provided. It is formed by. The first rail member 101 is made of synthetic resin, and is detachably mounted on the front side along the left edge and the upper edge of the base plate 45. The arc-shaped side surface is a first rail 46 a that constitutes a part of the guide rail 46.

  The second rail member 102 is made of metal and is arranged in a substantially arc shape when viewed from the front so as to be parallel to the inside of the first rail 46a from the upper left portion to the lower left portion of the game board 16, and has a substantially constant width on the front side of the base plate 45. And forms a second rail 46 b that constitutes a part of the guide rail 46. A portion sandwiched between the first rail 46 a and the second rail 46 b serves as a launch guide passage 104 that guides the game ball fired by the launch means 17 to the game area 23.

  The third rail member 103 is made of synthetic resin, and is connected to the right edge of the base plate 45 and the lower edge so as to connect the upper right end of the first rail member 101 and the lower left end of the second rail member 102. It is detachably mounted on the front surface side along the edge, and the side surface on the game area 23 side is a third rail 46 c constituting a part of the guide rail 46. The first rail member 101 and the third rail member 103 may be divided into a plurality along the rail longitudinal direction.

  The central display frame unit 47 constitutes the display frame of the image display means 60 and is detachably mounted from the front side of the base plate 45 along the inner periphery of the mounting hole 62. As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6 and the like, the central display frame unit 47 is disposed outside the mounting hole 62 along the front surface of the base plate 45 and has a front mounting plate 105 through which a game ball can pass. The decorative frame 106 arranged in a front gate shape extending from the left and right sides to the upper side on the front side of the image display means 60 and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting plate 105, and the left and right sides of the decorative frame 106 And a stage 107 disposed between the lower ends. The game balls that have been launched by the launching means 17 and entered the upper side of the game area 23 are distributed to the left and right at the top of the decorative frame 106, and the left-side downflow path 108a on the left side and the right-side downflow path 108b on the right side of the central display frame unit 47. Or any one of them.

  The central display frame unit 47 is provided with a warp inlet 109 through which a game ball can flow into at least one side of the left flow path 108a side and the right flow path 108b side, for example, the left flow path 108a side. The game ball that has flowed into the warp inlet 109 rolls freely in the left-right direction on the stage 107, and then either the central drop part 110 provided corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 23 or any other part. It falls from the front to the front.

  In addition, on the upper side of the stage 107, an entry preventing means 111 is provided for preventing entry of the game ball to the rear side by rebounding or the like. The entry preventing means 111 is provided so as to project forward from the first entry prevention plate 111a standing parallel to the base plate 45 along the rear side of the stage 107, and from the upper edge of the first entry prevention plate 111a. The second entry preventing plate 111b is integrally provided. The entry preventing means 111 is transparent as a whole, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the entry preventing means 111 from the front side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the central display frame unit 47 includes a second unit 47a having a stage 107, a warp inlet 109, an entry preventing means 111 and the like, and a first unit 47b other than that. These two units 47a and 47b are mounted and fixed to the base plate 45 in a pre-connected state. Of course, the first unit 47b and the second unit 47a may be configured to be individually mountable on the base plate 45.

  Further, at least a part of the central display frame unit 47 is located on the front side of the full screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, a portion of the entire screen area A corresponding to the rear side of the first unit (game member) 47b is referred to as a third fixed concealment area B3 (FIG. 9D), and the second unit (game member) 47a A portion corresponding to the rear side is referred to as a fourth fixed concealment region B4 (FIG. 10A). Further, in the fourth fixed concealment region B4, a portion corresponding to the rear side of the transparent portion (here, the intrusion preventing means 111) in the second unit 47a, that is, the rear portion corresponding to the rear side of the second unit 47a, but through the transparent portion. The region visible from the front side is referred to as a transparent concealment region (first transparent display region) B4a.

  Of the images displayed in the full screen area A, at least the central display frame from the front is displayed for the parts (excluding the transparent hidden area B4a) displayed in the third fixed hidden area B3 and the fourth fixed hidden area B4. Although the central display frame unit 47 is blocked by the unit 47 and cannot be visually recognized, since the central display frame unit 47 is separated from the image display means 60 in the front side, at least a part thereof can be viewed from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

  The start winning unit 48 is disposed below the central display frame unit 47 and is detachably attached to the attachment hole 63 from the front side. The big winning unit 49 is detachably mounted at a predetermined position on the lower right side of the central display frame unit 47 from the rear side. The normal winning unit 50 is disposed on the left side of the starting winning unit 48 below the central display frame unit 47 and is detachably mounted on the mounting hole 64 from the front side.

  Further, at least a part of the big winning unit 49 is located in front of the full screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, a portion corresponding to the rear side of the big winning unit (game member) 49 in the entire screen area A is referred to as a fifth fixed concealment area B5 (FIG. 10B). Of the image displayed in the full screen area A, the portion displayed in the fifth fixed concealment area B5 is at least obstructed by the big prize unit 49 from the front and cannot be visually recognized. Since the display unit 60 is separated from the front side, at least a part thereof can be visually recognized from the front side by shifting the viewpoint.

  Of the entire screen area A on the front side of the image display means 60, the window frame portion 74, the base plate 45, the central display frame unit 47, the big prize unit 49, and the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a in front view. A region that is not obstructed by any one, that is, a region that does not belong to any of the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C is defined as a non-concealment region D (FIG. 10D). In addition, there is an overlapping portion between the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5, and there is also an overlapping portion between the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C. To do. That is, there are areas belonging to two or more of the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealment area C.

  Here, the first to fifth fixed concealment areas B1 to B5 are examples of the first display area corresponding to the rear side of the game member in front view, and the movable concealment area C corresponds to the rear side of the movable body. It is an example of a second display area, and the non-hiding area D is an example of a third display area that is neither the first display area nor the second display area.

  The normal symbol starting means 55 is used for starting the normal symbol variation display by the normal symbol display means 51, and is constituted by a passing gate or the like through which a game ball can pass, and a passage detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball ( (Not shown). The normal symbol starting means 55 is provided on the front side of the front mounting plate 105 in the right part of the central display frame unit 47, and allows a game ball flowing down the right flow path 108b to pass therethrough.

  The normal symbol display means 51 is for variably displaying a normal symbol, and includes a plurality of light emitters (for example, LEDs) corresponding to a plurality of normal symbols (for example, two types of “O” and “X”), Arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. The normal symbol display means 51 blinks so that a plurality of light emitters emit light in a predetermined order based on the detection of the game ball by the normal symbol starter 55, and is acquired when the normal symbol starter 55 detects the game ball. When the winning determination random number value included in the obtained ordinary random number information matches a predetermined winning determination value, the “○” side light emitter corresponding to the winning mode (predetermined mode) is turned on, and otherwise The “×” side light emitter corresponding to the disengagement mode is turned on and stopped. When the stop symbol after the fluctuation of the normal symbol display means 51 is in a hit state, a normal profit state occurs.

  Further, when the normal symbol starting means 55 detects a game ball during the normal holding period including during the symbol change of the normal symbol display means 51 and during the normal profit state, the normal random number information acquired thereby is determined in advance. The stored upper limit number, for example, 4 is stored as a limit, and each time the normal holding period ends, one is digested to change the normal symbol. The number of stored ordinary random number information (ordinary holding number) is notified to the player by the normal holding number display means 52 and the like. The normal reserved number display means 52 is arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47.

  The first special symbol starting means 56 is for starting symbol variation by the first special symbol display means 53, and is constituted by a non-opening / closing type winning means having no opening / closing means, and a game ball for detecting a winning game ball Detection means (not shown) is provided. This first special symbol starting means 56 is provided in the start winning unit 48, and is arranged in an upward opening shape corresponding to the central dropping portion 110 of the stage 107, and is connected to the warp inlet on the left flow path 108a side. Since there is a route for winning from 109 through stage 107, the game ball flowing down the left flow path 108a can win with a higher probability than the game ball flowing down the right flow path 108b. .

  The second special symbol starting means 57 is for starting the symbol variation by the second special symbol display means 54, and an open state in which the game ball can be won by the operation of the opening / closing unit 112 and a prize cannot be won (or from the open state). Is also comprised of an open / close-type winning means that can be changed to a closed state that is difficult to win, and is provided with a game ball detecting means (not shown) for detecting a winning game ball, and the normal symbol display means 51 is stopped after fluctuation. When the symbol becomes a hit mode (predetermined mode) and a normal profit state occurs, the opening / closing part 112 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  The second special symbol starting means 57 is disposed on the front mounting plate 105 in the right part of the central display frame unit 47 and on the downstream side of the normal symbol starting means 55, and has flowed down the left flow path 108a. The game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 108b can win a prize with a higher probability. In addition, the opening / closing part 112 can swing around a rotation axis in the left-right direction provided on the lower side, and in the closed state, the opening / closing part 112 is substantially flush with the front mounting plate 105 so that the game ball can pass through the front side. In this case, the game ball is awarded backward in a downwardly inclined shape on the front side of the front mounting plate 105.

  The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 53 is composed of one or a plurality of display means such as a seven-segment type capable of variably displaying one first special symbol, for example. A jackpot determination included in the first special random number information obtained when the first special symbol starter 56 detects the game ball by displaying the first special symbol in a predetermined time period on condition that the starter 56 detects the game ball. When the random number value matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, it stops in the first jackpot mode, and in other cases it stops in the first miss mode. When the stop symbol after the change of the first special symbol display means 53 becomes the first big hit mode, the first special profit state occurs.

  The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 54 is composed of one or a plurality of display means such as a seven-segment type capable of variably displaying one second special symbol, for example. A jackpot determination included in the second special random number information acquired when the second special symbol starter 57 detects the game ball by displaying the second special symbol in a predetermined time period on condition that the starter 57 detects the game ball. When the random number value matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the second jackpot mode is used, and in other cases, the second jackpot mode is stopped. When the stop symbol after the change of the second special symbol display means 54 becomes the second big hit mode, the second special profit state occurs.

  The first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 are arranged on the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. The first and second special symbols are not numeric symbols, but are composed of a plurality of types of symbols and combinations of lines and points that do not have a special meaning. The first and second big hit modes and the other are the first and second off modes.

  Also, the first and second special symbols are started during the special suspension period including the first special symbol display means 53 during the symbol variation, the second special symbol display means 54 during the symbol variation and the first and second special profit states. When the means 56, 57 detects a game ball, the first and second special random number information acquired thereby is stored with a predetermined upper limit number of reservations, for example, 4 each as a limit. When the special reserved period is over and the reserved memory on the second special symbol side is 1 or more (when the symbol variation start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied), the reserved memory of the second special symbol is consumed. When the second special symbol is changed and only the reserved memory on the first special symbol side is 1 or more (when the symbol variation start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied), the first special symbol is reserved. The memory is digested and the first special symbol is changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changing, and both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side have reserved storage. The second special symbol is preferentially changed. Note that the number of stored first and second special random number information (first and second special reserved numbers) is notified to the player by the image display means 60 and the like.

  The big winning means 58 is an open / close type winning means provided with an open / close plate 113 that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. 47 is located downstream of the second special symbol starting means 57 at the lower right side of 47, and the game ball flowing down the right flow path 108b has a higher probability of winning than the game ball flowing down the left flow path 108a. It is possible. The big winning means 58 is the first and second special symbols that are generated when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 are stopped in the first and second big hit modes after the fluctuation. During the profit state, the opening / closing plate 113 opens to the front side according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball dropped on the opening / closing plate 113 wins the game.

  In addition, the effect display 114 (FIG. 16, etc.) is variably displayed on the image display means 60 in parallel with the change display of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54. , First and second hold display images X1 to X4 and Y1 to Y4 (FIG. 15 etc.) indicating the number of first and second special hold, a sound volume relating to a sound volume / light quantity adjustment function to be described later, a light quantity adjustable notification image (notification image) ) 116a, 116b (FIG. 18, etc.) and volume / light quantity setting images 117a, 117b (FIG. 19, etc.), a menu displayable notification image (notification image) 118a (FIG. 24, etc.), a menu image 118b, Various images such as a menu operation notification image 118c (FIG. 25, etc.), a left strike guidance image 162a, a right strike guidance image 162b (FIG. 16, etc.), and an error notification image 163 (FIG. 17, etc.) are displayed. It has become to so that.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14, the effect symbol 114 is composed of a combination of a symbol image 114a composed of numbers 1 to 9, for example, and a character or other decorative image 114b. Each of the three rows can be varied, and the variation by vertical scrolling is started according to a predetermined variation pattern almost simultaneously with the start of variation of the first and second special symbols, and almost simultaneously with the variation stop of the first and second special symbols. The final stop is made in a predetermined order such as left, right, and middle.

  In the case of the production symbols 114, the case where all the same symbols are arranged is the jackpot production mode, the other is the production mode of losing production, and the first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes. The effect symbol 114 is a jackpot effect mode, and when the first and second special symbols are the first and second off modes, the effect symbol 114 is a loss effect mode.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the production pattern 114 includes a plurality of types of reach jackpot variation patterns (for example, a normal reach jackpot variation pattern, a super reach jackpot variation pattern, etc.) that become a jackpot rendering mode after reaching a reach state, and an off-stage rendering mode via a reach state. There are provided a plurality of types of reach deviating variation patterns (for example, a normal reach deviating variation pattern, a super reach deviating variation pattern, etc.) and one or a plurality of types of normal variation patterns that provide a deviating effect without passing through the reach state. .

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In FIG. 11, 121 is a main control board, 122 is an effect control board, and these control boards 121 and 122 are the back frame of the back cover etc. which covers the image display means 60 etc. with which the game board 16 was mounted | worn, etc. The game machine main body 1 including the game board 16 is housed in a substrate case that is detachably mounted at an appropriate position on the back side.

  The main control board 121 controls the game operation in an integrated manner, and includes a normal random number generation processing means 131, a normal starting port check processing means 132, a normal random number storage means 133, a normal symbol, which are constituted by a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and the like. Processing means 134, normal symbol display control means 135, normal profit state generation means 136, special random number creation processing means 137, special start port check processing means 138, special random number storage means 139, special symbol processing means 140, special symbol display control means 141, special profit state generation means 142, special game state generation means 143, control command transmission means 144, and the like.

  The normal random number generation processing means 131 is configured to repeatedly generate a hit determination random number or the like used for determining whether or not the changed normal symbol is set to be a hit mode at predetermined time intervals. The normal start opening check processing unit 132 performs processing based on the detection of the game ball by the normal symbol start unit 55. Based on the detection of the game ball by the normal symbol start unit 55, the normal random number generation processing unit 131 It is configured to acquire the ordinary random number information such as the created hit determination random number value and store the ordinary random number information in the first-in first-out ordinary random number storage unit 133 with a predetermined upper limit reserved number (for example, four) as a limit. Has been.

  The normal symbol processing means 134 performs processing related to the normal symbol fluctuation display. The normal symbol display means 51 is in a state in which the normal symbol display means 51 can be changed and one or more hit determination random number values are stored in the normal random number storage means 133. On the condition that the number of normal holdings is 1 or more, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the head of the normal random number information queue stored in the normal random number storage means 133, A hit determination function that makes a hit / miss determination according to whether or not it matches a predetermined hit determination value, and a normal stop that selects the type of stop symbol after fluctuation of the normal symbol based on the hit / miss determination result A symbol selection function, a variation time selection function for selecting a variation time of a normal symbol, and the like are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the winning probability (for example, 1 / 1.3) in a special gaming state (during a short-time state and a probability variation state) described later is a hit in other normal gaming states. It is set to be higher than the probability (for example, 1/10), and the variation time (for example, 2.7 seconds) in the special gaming state is set to be shorter than the variation time (for example, 27 seconds) in the normal gaming state. ing.

  The normal symbol display control means 135 controls the display of the normal symbol display means 51 based on the normal symbol processing by the normal symbol processing means 134. The normal symbol display means 51 is in a state in which the normal symbol display means 51 can be variably displayed and is a normal random number storage means. The normal symbol display means 51 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the condition that one or more pieces of normal random number information is stored in 133 (the number of normal holdings is 1 or more), and is selected by the normal symbol processing means 134 Based on the elapse of the change time, the normal symbol change is stopped at the stop symbol selected by the normal symbol processing means 134.

  The normal profit state generating means 136, when the stop symbol after the change of the normal symbol display means 51 is in a winning mode based on the result of the hit determination by the normal symbol processing means 134 is a win, the second special symbol The opening / closing part 112 of the starting means 57 generates a normal profit state that changes to an open state according to any of a plurality of types of opening / closing patterns. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, a normal opening / closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × opened once) and an extended opening / closing pattern (for example, an opening / closing pattern set so that the opening time is longer than the normal opening / closing pattern) Two types of opening / closing patterns (2 seconds × 3 times opening) are set, and the normal opening / closing pattern is selected during the normal gaming state, and the extended opening / closing pattern is selected during the special gaming state.

  The special random number creation processing means 137 is a jackpot determination random number used for determination of jackpot / off, a symbol determination random number used for selection of a stop symbol after variation of the special symbol, a variation pattern random number used for selection of a variation pattern, and other predetermined patterns It is configured to perform special random number generation processing that repeatedly generates random numbers.

  The special start opening check processing means (start detection processing means) 138 performs processing based on winning of game balls to the first and second special symbol start means (start means) 56, 57. First and second special random number information such as jackpot determination random number value and jackpot symbol random number value created by special random number creation processing means 137 based on the winning of a game ball in any of special symbol starting means 56 and 57 , And the first and second special random number information is stored in the special random number storage means 139 with a predetermined upper limit reserved number (for example, four) as a limit.

  The special start port check processing unit 138 includes a prefetch determination unit 138a. The prefetch determination means 138a uses the first and second special random number information obtained when the game ball wins the first and second special symbol start means 56 and 57 at the time of obtaining the first and second special random number information. A look-ahead determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination random number value included in the random number information matches the first and second jackpot determination values. This prefetch determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 122 and the like by a hold increase command transmitted based on the winning of a game ball to one of the first and second special symbol starting means 56 and 57.

  The special symbol processing means 140 performs processing related to the variable display of the first and second special symbols. When the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 are in a state in which the variable display is possible, the second If the number of special hold is 1 or more, take the first jackpot determination random number value from the queue of the second special random number information, if only the first special hold number is 1 or more, from the queue of the first special random number information, A jackpot determination function for determining whether or not the jackpot determination random number value matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, and depending on the result of the jackpot determination, the first and second special random number information Special stop symbol selection function for selecting a stop symbol after fluctuation of the first and second special symbols based on the included jackpot symbol random number value, etc., and the variation pattern of the first and second special symbols according to the result of jackpot determination Multiple And a change pattern selection function for selecting from among classes.

  The special symbol display control means 141 performs display control of the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54, and based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 140, the first special symbol display means 53 or the second special symbol display means 53 or 54. The second special symbol display means 54 starts the variation of the first and second special symbols, and based on the fact that the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed, The change of special symbols is stopped.

  The special profit state generating means (profit state generating means) 142 is for generating the first and second special profit states that are advantageous to the player. The result of the jackpot determination by the special symbol processing means 140 is a jackpot. 1st and 2nd special profit state which opens the big winning means 58 according to a predetermined opening pattern when the stop symbol after the 1st and 2nd special symbol changes becomes the 1st and 2nd big hit mode (specific mode) It is configured to generate (profit state).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, two types of α and β are provided as the opening patterns of the big winning means 58, and the special profit state generating means 142 is configured to open the patterns α, It is configured to select any one of β. The opening pattern α is set so that the operation of releasing the special winning means 58 for 0.2 seconds is performed for two rounds. Since this release pattern α has a short opening time of 0.2 seconds and the number of rounds is as small as 2 rounds, the possibility that a game ball will win during the opening is very small.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern β is an operation for closing the special winning means 58 on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) elapses after opening or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls have been won. Is set to perform a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds). In the case of this open pattern β, if there are 15 winning balls for one winning prize to the big winning means 58, 9 × 15 × 15 = 2025 in most cases when the player just keeps firing normally. You can expect to play, and the direct profits that the player can obtain compared to the open pattern α is much larger. Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability that the open pattern β is selected is the first special when the second special symbol is in the second big hit mode (second special profit state). It is set to a higher value than when the symbol is in the second big hit mode (first special profit state).

  The special game state generating means 143 is for generating a special game state advantageous to the player after the first and second special profit states are completed. As shown in FIG. 13, the first and second special random number information In accordance with the jackpot symbol random number value when the jackpot determination random number value included in is matched with the jackpot determination value, one of the special game states of the short-time state and the probability variation state is generated.

  During the short-time state, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbols is switched to a shortened fluctuation time shorter than the normal fluctuation time, and the probability that the normal symbol is in a hit mode is higher than the normal probability (for example, 1/10). (For example, 1 / 1.3), the opening / closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 57 is normally opened / closed from the normal changing time (for example, 27 seconds) to the shortened changing time (for example, 2.7 seconds). It is possible to switch from a pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × open once) to an extended opening / closing pattern (for example, 2 seconds × 3 times open). The short-time state starts after the end of the first and second special profit states, and the next special profit state occurs or when the first and second special symbols have changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). End with.

  During the probabilistic state, the probability that the first and second special symbols will be the first and second big hits is switched to a higher probability (eg 1/35) than the normal probability (eg 1/350). Yes. In addition, during the probability change state, in principle, switching similar to the time reduction state is also performed, but if the special profit state of the release pattern α occurs during the normal gaming state, The same switching as in the time reduction state is not performed (so-called latent probability changing state). The probability variation state starts after the end of the first and second special profit states and ends when the next special profit state occurs. However, other end conditions such as the number of fluctuations of the first and second special symbols may be set. It may be added.

  The control command transmitting means 144 is for transmitting a predetermined control command to a sub-control board such as the effect control board 122 and giving a control command. Based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 140, At the start of the variation of the second special symbol, first and second retention decrease commands for designating a decrease in the number of first and second special reserves, first and second variation pattern designating commands for designating the variation pattern of the production symbol 114, First and second stop symbol form designation commands for designating the stop symbol aspects of the first and second special symbols are transmitted to the effect control board 122 in this order, and the first and second special symbols are changed at the end of the first and second special symbols. , A function of transmitting the first and second variation stop designation commands to instruct the variation stop of the second effect symbol to the effect control board 122 side, and the first and second special hold numbers when the first and second special reserved numbers increase. Hold number The function of transmitting the first and second reserved increase commands for designating increase to the effect control board 122 side, the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols is completed when the first and second special reserved numbers are both 0, etc. The function to send a customer waiting demo command when the first and second special symbols are in the variable standby state, the special gaming state generation command when the special gaming state is generated and ended by the special gaming state generation means 143, the special game Function to send status end command etc. to production control board 122 side, door open error, magnetism detection error, radio wave detection error, payout error, winning switch error, illegal winning error, etc. The corresponding error command is transmitted, and when the error is canceled, the error cancel command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the effect control board 122. It has a function, and the like.

  The effect control board 122 controls effects by various effect means, such as effect control means 150, special reserved number display control means 151, symbol variation effect control means 152, firing guidance notification control means 153, error notification control means 154, A volume adjusting unit 155, a light amount adjusting unit 156, a customer waiting control unit 157, a power saving mode setting unit 158, and the like are provided.

  The effect control means 150 controls each effect means, such as an image display control means 150a for controlling image display by the image display means 60, a sound control means 150b for controlling sound output from the speakers 18 and 25, an LED, and the like. There are provided a light emission control means 150c for controlling the light emission of the illumination means 159, a movable body control means 150d for controlling the movable effect means 75 to 78 having the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a, and the like.

  The special reserved number display control means 151 performs display control of the first and second special reserved numbers on the image display means 60. As shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the first reserved display images X1 to X4 corresponding to the first special reserved number (maximum 4), the second reserved display images Y1 to Y4 corresponding to the second special reserved number (maximum 4), and changing The on-change moving image Z corresponding to the first and second special symbols is displayed on the image display unit 60 via the image display control unit 150a so as to be superimposed on the front side of the predetermined holding base image 161. Yes.

  In this embodiment, in order to preferentially digest the reserved memory of the second special symbol over the reserved memory of the first special symbol, the second reserved display images Y1 to Y4 are respectively provided in front of the first reserved display images X1 to X4. A part of it is displayed. When the first and second hold increase commands are received from the main control board 121, one of the first and second hold display images X1 to Y1 is additionally displayed at the end of the queue.

  When the first and second hold decrease commands are received from the main control board 121, the first and second hold display images X1 to Y1 are shifted one by one toward the front side of the queue. The pushed first and second hold display images X1, Y1 are moved to a predetermined position to be changed to a changing hold image Z. In addition, since the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol has priority over a 1st special symbol, while the 2nd hold display image Y1- is displayed, there is no increase about 1st hold display image X1-. Will not decrease.

  The symbol change effect control means 152 controls the change display of the effect symbol 114 and the accompanying notice effect, and includes an effect symbol control means 152a and a notice effect control means 152b. The effect symbol control means 152a controls the display of the effect symbol 114 and the accompanying sound output, illumination light emission, etc. via the effect control means 150, and designates the first and second variation patterns from the main control board 121. When the command is received, when the first and second variation stop designation commands are received, the variation of the production symbol 114 and the accompanying voice output and the light emission are started based on the designated variation pattern. 1. Stops the variation of the production symbol 114 in the stop symbol mode selected based on the second stop symbol mode designation command and the first and second variation pattern designation command, and also outputs the sound output and the illumination light associated therewith. It is supposed to stop.

  The notice effect control means 152b determines whether or not the first and second special profit states occur when the stop symbols after the first and second special symbols change become the first and second big hits, etc. The notice effect regarding the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the effect symbol 114 is controlled. Examples of the notice effect include “prefetch notice effect” performed based on the prefetch determination result by the prefetch determination unit 138a, “normal notice effect” performed based on the jackpot determination result at the start of symbol variation by the special symbol processing unit 140, and the like. .

  Further, in the “prefetching notice effect”, an effect of the same mode is executed in a plurality of symbol variations up to symbol variations corresponding to the special random number information subjected to the prefetch determination based on the prefetch determination result. In addition to “pre-reading continuous effect”, there are “pre-reading hold change effect” for displaying the first and second hold display images X1 to Y1 in a predetermined display mode as shown in FIG.

  The “normal notice effect” includes “conversation notice effect”, “step-up notice effect”, “button notice effect”, “mini-character notice effect”, and the like. In the “conversation notice effect”, the dialogue of the character is displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special symbols are changing, and the content of the dialogue is that the first and second special symbols are the first and second big hits. The reliability (hereinafter referred to as jackpot reliability) that is an aspect is suggested. In the “step-up notice effect”, a predetermined effect step including display of an effect image on the image display means 60 is performed in a plurality of steps (for example, five steps) according to the jackpot reliability during the change of the first and second special symbols. ) Is executed up to a predetermined stage. In this step-up notice effect, the jackpot reliability is set higher as the stage of the effect step progresses.

  In the “button notice effect”, when it is determined that the operation of the effect button 34 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (operation is established) during the operation effective period during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, the jackpot reliability is increased. In response to this, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is executed. In the “mini-character notice effect”, one or a plurality of mini-character images are displayed on the image display means 60, and an operation for suggesting the jackpot reliability is performed.

  For the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect control unit 152b receives the first and second hold increase commands and performs a lottery to start execution when a predetermined condition such as not being in the pre-reading continuous effect is satisfied. When at least one of the pre-reading notice effects (pre-reading continuous effect, pre-reading hold change effect, etc.) is won, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is started. When starting, that is, when the first and second hold decrease commands, the first and second fluctuation pattern designation commands, and the first and second stop symbol form designation commands are received within a certain period of time, a lottery is performed, and multiple types of normal When winning at least one of the notice effects (conversation notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), the normal notice effect is executed while the first and second special symbols are changing. It has been.

  The firing guidance notification control means 153 controls the firing guidance notification that the game area 23 should be fired aiming at the left or right side of the game area 23, and “← Left” that it should be fired aiming at the left flow path 108a side. Left-handed guiding image 162a (FIG. 16 (a)) and right-handed guiding image 162b (FIG. 16 (b)) such as “to the right →” indicating that it should be aimed at the right flow down path 108b side. Any one of them is displayed on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a at a predetermined timing during the game.

  In this embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the probability that the normal symbol display means 51 will be in a hit state is low, and even if the normal profit state occurs due to the hit state, the opening time of the second special symbol starter 57 is slight. (FIG. 12), the possibility of winning the second special symbol starting means 57 is extremely low. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, rather than making a right strike aiming at the normal symbol starting means 55 and the second special symbol starting means 57 on the right flow path 108b side, left strike and the first special from the left flow path 108a side. Since it is more advantageous for the player to aim for winning the symbol starting means 56, it is desirable to display the left-handed guidance image 162a at a predetermined timing such as when the special gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, since the big winning means 58 is opened during the first and second special profit states, the player should make a right turn aiming at the big winning means 58 on the right flow path 108b side. Further, during the special gaming state, the probability that the normal symbol display means 51 will be in a hit state increases, and the opening time of the second special symbol starter 57 when the normal profit state occurs in the hit state becomes longer. For this reason (FIG. 12), it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike aiming at the normal symbol starting means 55 and the second special symbol starting means 57 on the right flow down path 108b side. Therefore, it is desirable to display the right-handed guidance image 162b at a predetermined timing during the first and second special profit states and the special game state.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in the first and second special profit states of the release pattern α, the opening time of the special winning means 58 is very short, and the special game state that occurs after the completion is the latent probability change. Since the second special symbol starting means 57 is not opened and extended (FIG. 13), it is desirable not to display the right-handed guiding image 162b. Alternatively, only one of the left-handed guidance image 162a and the right-handed guidance image 162b may be displayed.

  The error notification control unit 154 controls error notification, and the error notification is sent to the image display unit 60 through the image display control unit 150a from the time when the error command is received from the main control board 121 until the error release command is received. Error notification such as displaying an image 163 is executed. In the case of a door open error, an error notification image 163 such as “door open” is displayed on the image display means 60 from when the door open command is received from the main control board 121 until the door open release command is received. (FIG. 17).

  The volume adjustment unit 155 performs control related to volume setting, and a volume-adjustable notification image (notification indicating that an operation for volume adjustment is possible during a volume-adjustable period in which the player can adjust the volume. (Image) 116a (FIG. 18 (a)) is displayed on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing, and the volume setting image showing the volume setting status when there is a player operation related to volume adjustment during the volume adjustment possible period. 117a (FIG. 19A) is displayed on the image display means 60. In the present embodiment, the left key 35c and the right key 35d of the cross operation means 35 are assigned for volume adjustment operation. If the left key 35c is pressed during the volume adjustment possible period, the volume is lowered and the right key 35d is pressed. The volume will increase.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the volume adjustable notification image 116a is composed of an illustration showing the left key 35c and the right key 35d used for volume adjustment, and the characters “deep volume adjustment”. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the volume setting image 117a is composed of a plurality of (five) scale images corresponding to a predetermined level (for example, five levels) of volume and characters of “volume”. The number of scale images corresponding to the current volume setting is displayed in a different mode (for example, display color) from the other scale images.

  When the player operates either the left key 35c or the right key 35d during the volume adjustable period, if the volume adjustable notification image 116a (FIG. 18A) is displayed, the volume adjustable notification is displayed. The image 116a is deleted from the image display means 60. Further, the volume is changed according to the player's operation, and the volume setting image 117a (FIG. 19A) corresponding to the changed volume is displayed on the image display means 60 for a certain period.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment period is set not only in the customer waiting state described later but also in other game states, but a predetermined period such as after power-on may be excluded from the volume adjustment period. Further, the volume adjustable notification image 116a may always be displayed during the volume adjustable period, or the volume adjustable notification image 116a may be displayed only during a specific period such as in a customer waiting state. When either the left key 35c or the right key 35d is operated in a state where the volume setting image 117a is not displayed, the volume setting image 117a is displayed in the first operation, but the volume is not changed. The volume may be changed by the second and subsequent operations after the volume setting image 117a is displayed.

  The light amount adjusting unit 156 performs control related to the light amount adjustment of the electric decoration unit 159, and the light amount adjustment that the operation for adjusting the light amount is possible during the light amount adjustable period in which the light amount adjustment by the player operation is possible. When the possible notification image (notification image) 116b (FIG. 18B) is displayed on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing and a player operation relating to the light amount adjustment is performed during the light amount adjustment possible period, the light amount setting status A light amount setting image 117b (FIG. 19B) indicating the above is displayed on the image display means 60. In the present embodiment, the upper key 35a and the lower key 35b of the cross operation means 35 are assigned for the light amount adjustment operation. If the upper key 35a is pressed during the light amount adjustable period, the light amount increases, and the lower key 35b is pressed. The amount of light decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the light quantity adjustable notification image 116b is composed of an illustration showing the upper key 35a and the lower key 35b used for light quantity adjustment, and letters “adjust light quantity”. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the light amount setting image 117b is composed of a plurality of (five) scale images corresponding to light amounts at predetermined stages (for example, five stages) and characters of “light quantity”. The number of scale images corresponding to the current light amount setting is displayed in a mode (for example, display color) different from other scale images.

  If the player operates either the upper key 35a or the lower key 35b during the light amount adjustable period, if the light amount adjustable notification image 116b (FIG. 18B) is displayed, the light amount adjustable notification is displayed. The image 116b is erased from the image display means 60. In addition, the light amount is changed according to the player's operation, and a light amount setting image 117b (FIG. 19B) corresponding to the changed light amount is displayed on the image display means 60 for a certain period.

  In the present embodiment, the light quantity adjustable period and the volume adjustable period are set to the same period, but both periods may be different. Further, the light quantity adjustable notification image 116b may be always displayed during the light amount adjustable period, or the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed only during a specific period such as in a customer waiting state. If either the upper key 35a or the lower key 35b is operated when the light amount setting image 117b is not displayed, the light amount setting image 117b is displayed in the first operation, but the light amount is not changed. The light amount may be changed by the second and subsequent operations after the light amount setting image 117b is displayed.

  The customer waiting control unit 157 receives the customer waiting demo command from the main control board 121 and continues until the first and second special symbol display units 53 and 54 start changing the first and second special symbols. It controls the production in the waiting state (waiting period), and can execute the customer waiting production process (FIG. 20) and the menu management process (FIG. 21) in the timer interruption.

  In the present embodiment, the period from when the customer waiting demo command is received from the main control board 121 to when the first and second special symbols start to change (during customer waiting) is a setting change by menu selection operation, etc. It is set in a menu operable period in which (setting relating to a game) is possible, and when the player presses the effect button 34 while waiting for the customer, the menu image 118b (FIG. 25, etc.) is displayed, and the state is further displayed. By pressing the upper key 35a, the lower key 35b, and the effect button 34 of the cross operation means 35, any selection item displayed on the menu image 118b can be selected and executed.

  In the present embodiment, since the cross operation means 35 is also used for volume and light amount adjustment operations, the period during which the menu image 118b is displayed (the period during which the cross operation means 35 can be used for menu selection operations). It is desirable to exclude the cross operation means 35 from being used for volume and light quantity adjustment operations by excluding it from the volume adjustable period and light quantity adjustable period.

  Next, the customer waiting effect process shown in FIG. 20 will be described. In the customer waiting effect process, first, a customer waiting state flag is determined (S1). This customer waiting state flag indicates whether or not a customer waiting state is in effect, and is set to 1 if the customer is waiting, and 0 if not waiting. If the customer waiting state flag is not 1 (S1: No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo command has been received from the main control board 121 (S2), and if a customer waiting demo command has not been received (S2). : No), the customer waiting effect process ends here.

  The customer waiting demo command is used when the first and second special hold numbers are both 0 and the variable waiting state of the first and second special symbols is entered. It is transmitted from the main control board 121 to the effect control board 122 at the time of clearing.

  When the customer waiting demo command is received when not in the customer waiting state (S1: No → S2: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 1 (in the customer waiting state) (S3) and the image is displayed. The display of the menu displayable notification image 118a on the means 60 is started (S4). Here, the menu displayable notification image (notification image) 118a is for notifying that an operation for displaying the menu image 118b is possible. As shown in FIG. 24, an effect button used for menu display is provided. It is composed of an illustration showing how the button 34 is pressed and the characters “menu display”.

  Then, a customer waiting normal effect is started (S5), an initial value is set in the demo timer (S6), and the customer waiting effect process is terminated. In the customer-waiting normal effect, the image of the effect symbol 114 in a state stopped by the previous symbol variation is continuously displayed on the image display means 60, and the illumination means 159 emits light with a predetermined light emission pattern, and from the speakers 18, 25. A predetermined BGM is output. The demo timer is for measuring the duration of the customer-waiting normal performance, and a value corresponding to 180 s is set as an initial value.

  The menu operable period starts when a customer waiting demonstration command is received. The menu displayable notification image 118a is displayed on the image display means 60 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after receiving the customer waiting command. ) It may be after. In addition to a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) after the start of the customer waiting state, the menu displayable notification image 118a is displayed for a predetermined period during the customer waiting state (for example, during the display of a company logo during a customer waiting demonstration stage described later). You may make it not.

  Also, if the customer waiting state flag is 1 (in customer waiting state) in S1 (S1: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the first and second special symbols has arrived, that is, first and second. It is determined whether a variation pattern designation command or the like has been received (S7). If the first and second special symbols have not yet started to change (S7: No), whether or not the customer-waiting normal performance is being performed, that is, during the customer-waiting normal performance and during the customer-waiting demonstration performance described later. (S8: Yes), the demo timer is decremented by 1 (S9), and the demo timer value after the subtraction is 0. (S10: Yes), the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is started (S11). On the other hand, when the value of the demo timer after subtraction is not 0 (S10: No), the customer waiting normal effect is continued as it is (S10a).

  In the customer waiting demonstration effect, the model image image, the company logo image, the stop image of the effect symbol 114, etc. are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined pattern on the image display means 60, and the illumination means 159 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the speaker 18 , 25 output a predetermined BGM. Note that the audio output may be stopped in the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  After the start of the customer-waiting demonstration effect (S8: No), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is repeatedly executed (S12) until the fluctuation start timing of the first and second special symbols arrives (S7: Yes). The customer waiting demonstration effect and the customer waiting normal effect may be executed repeatedly alternately.

  If it is determined in S7 that the first and second special symbol change start timing has arrived (S7: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 0 (S13) and the customer waiting in execution The normal effect or the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended (S14), the display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is ended (S15), the menu no-operation timer is cleared to 0 (S16), and the customer waiting effect process is ended. The menu no-operation timer will be described later.

  Next, the menu management process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. In this menu management process, first, a subtraction process of the menu non-operation timer, that is, a process of subtracting 1 on the condition that the value is larger than 0 (S21, S22). Here, the menu no-operation timer is for counting the no-operation period during menu display, and an initial value is set in S48 (FIG. 22) and S66 (FIG. 23) described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any one of the effect button 34 and the up and down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 is pressed, and when the effect button 34 is pressed (S23: Yes), when the effect button is pressed. The process (S24) is performed when the upper key 35a of the cross operation means 35 is pressed (S25: Yes), when the upper key is pressed (S26), and when the lower key 35b is pressed (S27: Yes). Executes the process when the down key is pressed (S28). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that simultaneous pressing of the keys of the effect button 34 and the cross operation means 35 is not allowed.

  The process when the effect button is pressed when the effect button 34 is pressed (S24) is performed according to the procedure shown in FIG. That is, it is first determined whether or not the customer waiting state flag is 1, that is, whether or not the menu operation is possible (S41), and if the customer waiting state flag is not 1 (S41: No). Here, the process when the effect button is pressed ends.

  If the customer waiting state flag is 1 (S41: Yes), it is determined whether or not the menu image flag is 1 (S42). Here, the menu image flag indicates whether or not the menu image is being displayed, and is set to 1 while the menu image is being displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the menu image 118b includes a plurality (four in this case) of selection item images 164a to 164a corresponding to a plurality of selection items including “return” for returning to the previous display state. The cursor which shows a temporary selection state is located in either of these several selection item images 164a-164d.

  The menu image 118b in FIG. 25 is configured by four types of selection item images 164a to 164d of “history”, “mode change”, “guidance”, and “return”, and in the initial state, the cursor (shown by hatching in the drawing). ) Is positioned in the selection item image 164d of “return”.

  When the menu image flag is not 1 in S42 (S42: No), the display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is terminated (S43), and the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c are displayed on the image display means 60. Is started (S44, S45) and a menu display sound is output from the speakers 18, 25 (S46). Here, the menu operation notification image 118c is used to notify the operation method related to the menu image 118b. As shown in FIG. 25, the menu operation notification image 118c is an illustration showing the up and down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 used for moving the cursor. It is composed of the characters “Select”, an illustration of the effect button 34 used for determining the selection item (selection confirmation operation), and the characters “Determine”.

  Then, 1 (menu image is being displayed) is set in the menu image flag (S47), an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 s) is set in the menu non-operation timer (S48), and the processing when the effect button is pressed is ended. To do. As described above, when the presentation button 34 is pressed while waiting for a customer and the menu image 118b is not displayed, the menu image 118b is displayed on the image display means 60.

  If the menu image flag is 1 (menu image is being displayed) in S42 (S42: Yes), a decision sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 (S49) and the selection item image at the cursor position (temporary selection state). The specific process corresponding to is executed (S50 to S54). In other words, if there is a lower menu in the selection item image at the cursor position (S50: Yes), the lower menu is displayed (S51), and if the selection item image at the cursor position is “return” (S52: Yes). Returning to the previous state (S53), if there is no lower menu in the cursor position selection item image (S50: No) and it is not “return” (S52: No), the cursor position selection item Processing corresponding to the image is executed (S54). Then, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 s) is set in the menu no-operation timer (S48), and the process when the effect button is pressed is terminated. Thus, the act of pressing the effect button 34 in a state where the selection item image is displayed is an example of the selection confirmation operation for selecting the selection item image at the cursor position (temporary selection state).

  In the example of the menu image 118b shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image in which the lower menu exists is “mode change”. This “mode change” is for changing the mode setting. When this “mode change” is selected, a lower menu image 119 as shown in FIG. 26 is displayed. The lower menu image 119 includes a plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e (lower selection items) including a “menu screen” for returning to the first menu screen, and the initial position of the cursor is other than the “menu screen”. It is set to any one of the selection item images 164a to 164d.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a in the waiting state is different for each of a plurality of types, for example, four types of first to fourth modes. Can be performed by the menu operation of this “mode change”. In addition, since arrangement | positioning of the movable bodies 75a-78a differs for every mode, the movable concealment area | region C and the non-hidden area | region D also differ for every mode.

  In the first mode, as shown in FIG. 28A, the first movable body 75a is in the first upper position, the second movable body 76a is in the second lower position, and the third movable body 77a is in the third external position. The fourth movable body 78a is stopped at the fourth external position. Further, in the second mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), only the stop position of the first movable body 75a is changed from the first upper position to the first lower position with respect to the first mode. On the other hand, the lower side of the non-hiding region D is narrowed and the upper side is widened.

  Further, in the third mode, as shown in FIG. 28C, the second movable body 76a is changed from the second lower position to the second upper position with respect to the first mode, and is more concealed than the first mode. The lower side of the region D is narrow. In the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are moved from the third and fourth external positions to the third and fourth internal positions, respectively, with respect to the third mode. The width of the non-hiding region D is narrower than that in the third mode. In the initial state, it is assumed that the first mode is set.

  When the lower menu image 119 corresponding to this “mode change” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 26, the initial position of the cursor is set to a selection item image corresponding to the mode at that time (in the initial state, corresponding to the first mode). It is desirable to set the selection item image 164a) to be selected, but regardless of the mode at that time, the selection item image 164e corresponding to the “menu screen” for returning to the first menu screen is set to the initial position of the cursor. May be.

  Note that a lower menu may be provided in any of the selection item images of the lower menu image 119. That is, the number of menu hierarchies is arbitrary. In addition, the initial position of the cursor when moving to a specific menu image may be different between when moving from a higher-order menu image and when moving from a lower-order menu image. The initial position of the cursor when returning from the menu image is desirably set to a selection item image for moving to a higher level, such as “menu screen”, “return”, and the like.

  In the example of the menu image shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image having no lower menu is “history”, and when the selection of this “history” is determined, the jackpot history as shown in FIG. Information is displayed. Even when the selection of a selection item image that does not have such a lower menu is determined, as shown in FIG. 27, the image display means 60 has a “menu screen” or the like for returning to a higher menu such as a menu screen. And a menu operation notification image 118c for informing the selection item determination operation are displayed.

  Also, the process when the upper key is pressed when the upper key 35a of the cross operation means 35 is pressed (S26 in FIG. 21), and the process when the lower key is pressed when the lower key 35b is pressed (S28 in FIG. 21). The procedure shown in FIG. 23 is performed. FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of processing when the up key is pressed, and only the difference between the processing when the down key is pressed and the processing when the down key is pressed is shown in parentheses. Here, the process when the upper key is pressed will be described, and the process when the lower key is pressed will be referred to.

  In the process when the up key (down key) shown in FIG. 23 is pressed, it is first determined whether or not the menu image flag is 1, that is, whether or not the menu image is being displayed (S61). If it is not 1, that is, if a menu image or the like is not being displayed (S61: No), the process when the up key (down key) is pressed is terminated here.

  If the menu image flag is 1, that is, if a menu image or the like is being displayed (S61: Yes), it is determined whether or not the cursor position is the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed). (S62), if it is not the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62: No), the cursor is moved up by one (down in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S64) If the position is the highest position (the lowest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62: Yes), the cursor is moved to the lowest position (the highest position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S63). ). Then, a cursor moving sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 (S65), and an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 s) is set in the menu non-operation timer (S66), and processing when the up key (down key) is pressed is performed. finish.

  As described above, the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 enable the menu selection operation in a state where the menu image 118b is displayed, the up key 35a makes the cursor upward, and the down key 35b makes the cursor downward. The cursor is moved in a cyclic manner through a plurality of selection item images by the continuous operation.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. Following the processing of S23 to S28 as described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the menu no-operation timer is 0 (S29). If the value of the menu no-operation timer is not 0, that is, the effect button 34 If the predetermined time (for example, 10 s) has not elapsed since the last time either one of the up and down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 was last operated, the menu management process is terminated here.

  If the value of the menu no-operation timer is 0 in S29, that is, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 s) has elapsed since any of the effect button 34 and the up / down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 is last operated. (S29: Yes), the display of the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is terminated (S31, S32) on condition that the menu image flag is 1 (menu image or the like is being displayed) (S30: Yes). ), The display of the menu displayable notification image 118a is started (S33), and the menu image flag is set to 0 (S34), and the menu management process is ended. As described above, when the non-operation period during menu display reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 s), the display of the menu image 118b and the like is ended, and the operation is waited.

  The power saving mode setting means 158 is for setting the power saving mode. When the power saving mode that lowers the power consumption than the normal mode is selected, the power saving mode setting means 158 sets the power saving mode while waiting for the customer and is in the power saving mode. A power-saving mode notification image 120 (FIG. 29, etc.) indicating that this is displayed on the image display means 60. During the power saving mode, the power supply to the electrical decoration means 159 is stopped. Note that a switching operation means for selecting either the normal mode or the power saving mode may be provided on the back side of the front frame 3 or the like so that a person in charge of the game hall can operate.

  In addition, when the volume is set within a predetermined range (for example, the first stage among the first to fifth stages), the power saving mode is set, and in other cases, the normal mode is set. The normal mode and the power saving mode may be automatically switched according to the setting status of the setting item (for example, volume).

  Next, the relationship between various images displayed on the image display unit 60 and the areas A, B1 to B5, C, and D on the display screen 60a of the image display unit 60 will be described for each of various scenes.

  FIG. 30A shows a display image of the image display means 60 in one scene in the customer waiting state. In the example of FIG. 30 (a), it is assumed that the first mode (FIG. 28 (a)) and the power saving mode are set, and that the customer waiting normal effect is being performed. FIG. 30B shows the correspondence between each image in FIG. 30A and the area on the display screen 60a. In FIG. 30B, the lower the image, the higher the display priority (the same applies to FIGS. 31B to 38B).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), a background image 160 (shown in gray in FIG. 30 (a)) is displayed on the display screen 60a for the entire screen area A, and the immediately preceding pattern is displayed. An image of the effect symbol 114 in a state stopped by fluctuation is displayed across the non-hiding area D and the movable hiding area C. Of the effect symbols 114, the entire symbol image 114a is displayed in the non-hiding area D, and a part of the decoration image 114b is displayed behind the movable hiding area C and the first movable body 75a. Thereby, the limited non-hidden area | region D can be utilized effectively, notifying the result of the last symbol fluctuation clearly.

  Of the three effect symbols 114 of the left, right, and center, the left and right effect symbols 114 are displayed across the non-hiding area D and at least one of the first to third fixed hiding areas B1 to B3. Also good. Thereby, the space | interval of three production | presentation symbols 114 can be ensured widely, and it is possible to alert | report more clearly the result of a symbol fluctuation | variation using the limited non-hiding region D effectively. In this case, the portion displayed in the first to third fixed concealment areas B1 to B3 is preferably the decorative image 114b, but a part of the design image 114a is displayed in the first to third fixed concealment areas B1 to B3. May be.

  The layout such as the size of the decoration image 114b may be varied depending on the type (number) of the design image 114a. In this case, the decoration image 114b is displayed across the non-hiding area D and a predetermined hiding area (any of the hiding areas described above) even if the decoration image 114b differs depending on the type of the design image 114a. May be. Further, some decorative images 114b may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and a predetermined hidden area, and other decorative images 114b may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D. Further, the layout of the decoration image 114b may be varied according to the variation lines of the three effect symbols 114 of the left, right, and center.

  The decoration image 114b is displayed across the non-hiding area D and the predetermined hiding area. However, it is desirable that the decoration image 114b be configured in this manner, for example, when the design is stopped. In the symbol variation state, it is not necessary to display over the non-obscuration region D and the predetermined concealment region, and various display configurations may be made according to the symbol variation state.

  A predetermined animation may be added to the design image 114a and the decoration image 114b. For example, the symbol image 114a and the decorative image 114b are animated when the symbol starts to change, temporarily stops, reaches or symbols stop, or when the symbol stops in a disengaged manner, or the symbol stops in a winning manner. Also good. Further, there may be a plurality of animation operations, and they may be made different depending on the type of the design image 114a and the decoration image 114b or the above-described situation. Even when such an animation is executed, the decoration image 114b may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and a predetermined hidden area.

  Alternatively, the animation may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and a predetermined hidden area, and may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D when not executed. Further, as an opposite configuration, the animation may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D during execution, and may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and a predetermined hidden area during non-execution. By doing so, the visibility of the decorative image 114b can be improved at least when the animation is executed.

  The decoration image 114b and the design image 114a of the effect design 114 are changed according to the game state (normal / short time / latency / probability change), the game mode (background A / background B), the special game mode (prefetch mode), and the like. May be. In this case, depending on the game state, the game mode, and the special game mode, the case where the decoration image 114b is displayed across the non-hiding area D and the predetermined hiding area is different from the case where it is displayed only in the non-hiding area D. You may comprise as follows.

  The error notification image 163, the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are all displayed in the non-hiding area D. Since these images have higher display priority than the effect symbol 114, they are displayed on the front side when they overlap a part of the effect symbol 114. In this case, the symbol image 114a is avoided and overlaps the decoration image 114b. It is desirable to display as follows.

  Note that the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player operates the left and right keys 35c and 35d while the volume adjustable notification image 116a is displayed, and the player selects the up and down keys 35a and 35a while the light amount adjustable notification image 116b is displayed. As for the light amount setting image 117b displayed when 35b is operated, the entire image is displayed in the non-hidden region D as shown in FIG. 30B (not shown in FIG. 30A).

  In addition, the reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a at least a part of the non-hiding area D, the first to fifth fixed hiding areas B1 to B5, and the movable hiding area C (here, the first to fifth fixed areas). It is displayed across the concealment areas B1 to B5). Since both the first and second special reserved numbers are 0 in the customer waiting state, the reserved pedestal image 161 is less important. Therefore, at least a part of the reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed in an area other than the non-hidden area D so as not to be hidden. The area D can be used more effectively. The entire reserved pedestal image 161 may be displayed in an area other than the non-hidden area D, or the reserved pedestal image 161 may not be displayed.

  Further, the power saving mode notification image 120 is at least part of the non-hiding area D and the first to fifth fixed hiding areas B1 to B5 on the lower side of the display screen 60a and on the upper side of the reserved pedestal image 161 (here, the first non-hiding area D1). To the fourth fixed concealment areas B1 to B4). Since the power saving mode notification is less important than the error notification or the like, the non-hiding area D is used more effectively by displaying at least a part of the power saving mode notification image 120 in an area other than the non-hiding area D. it can.

  In addition, regarding the error notification image 163, when a plurality of errors are notified, all of the error notification images 163 corresponding to the plurality of errors may be displayed in the non-hidden region D. Further, when notifying a plurality of errors, up to a predetermined number (about 1 to 4), the error notification images 163 are displayed in the non-hidden region D, and when notifying an error exceeding a predetermined number, the predetermined number is set. The excess is displayed across the non-hidden region D and at least one of the first to fifth fixed concealed regions B1 to B5, or displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealed regions B1 to B5. May be.

  In addition, a display area may be set according to the content of the error, and an error notification image 163 regarding a lower plate full error that may occur in a normal game is displayed in the non-hidden area D, and in a normal game such as opening a door. You may make it display the error alert image 163 regarding the error which cannot generate | occur | produce at least one part in 1st-5th fixed concealment area | region B1-B5. In the case of a lower plate full error, it is desirable that the error notification image 163 be displayed in the non-hidden region D that is most easily visible to the player because the player needs to open the lower plate when the error is released.

  Also, regarding errors that may occur when a go-to action such as a magnetic detection error is made, it is necessary to warn the player that the go-to action may have been performed and to notify the hall employee. For this reason, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-hidden area D that is most easily visible to the player or hall employee.

  FIG. 31A shows a state in which the menu image 118b is displayed on the display screen 60a. The menu image 118b is displayed when the player operates the effect button 34 during the menu operable period (waiting for customers). FIG. 31B shows the correspondence between each image in FIG. 31A and the area on the display screen 60a.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, a background image 160 (shown in gray in FIG. 31A) is displayed on the entire screen area A on the display screen 60a and a menu image 118b. The four selection item images 164a to 164d and the menu operation notification image 118c are displayed. When this menu image 118b is displayed, the cursor (indicated by hatching in FIG. 31A) is positioned on the selection item image 164d corresponding to “return”.

  At least the selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) 164d corresponding to the initial cursor position is displayed in the non-hidden region D, while the other selection item images 164a to 164c are: At least one of them (here, the selection item image 164a corresponding to “history”) protrudes outside the non-hidden region D and into the non-hidden region D and the movable concealed region C (for example, the rear side of the first movable body 75a). The other (here, selection item images 164b and 164c) are displayed in the non-hidden area D. Further, the menu operation notification image 118c is entirely displayed in the non-hidden area D.

  In this way, by displaying the entire selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) corresponding to the initial cursor position in the non-hidden area D, the player can surely recognize the initial cursor position, It is possible to smoothly shift to subsequent cursor movement operations and selection confirmation operations. Further, at least one of the selection item images other than the initial cursor position is displayed across the non-hiding area D and the outer area (for example, the movable hiding area C), thereby making the non-hiding area D more effective. Available to: Of course, all of the four selection item images 164a to 164d constituting the menu image 118b may be displayed in the non-hidden region D.

  The menu operation notification image 118c is displayed only in the non-hiding area D, and the selection item images 164a to 164d corresponding to the initial cursor position and the other selection item images 164a to 164d are the non-hiding area D and the hiding area. You may make it display so that it may straddle. Even if configured in this way, each selection item is not in a state where it cannot be visually recognized, and at least the menu operation notification image 118c is visible, so that a predetermined menu operation is effective for the player. It is possible to notify that there is a certainty.

  The menu image 118b may have a first menu hierarchy and a second menu hierarchy in which the display screen 60a transitions when a selection item displayed in the first menu hierarchy is operated by the player. For example, if the menu hierarchy shown in FIG. 31 is the first menu hierarchy and mode change is selected among the selection items, a second menu hierarchy that allows selection of which mode to set is displayed. You may do it. The menu hierarchy is not limited to the first hierarchy and the second hierarchy, and a plurality of hierarchies may be provided. In the second menu layer or the like corresponding to each selection item selected by the player, it is desirable that the display mode is the same as that of the first menu layer. Further, the display mode may be different between the first menu layer and the second menu layer. However, it is desirable to change which display mode among the above display modes.

  Even when a predetermined error occurs during the display of the menu image 118b, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-hiding area D. Further, it is desirable that the error notification image 163 is displayed so as to be superimposed on each selection item of the menu image 118b.

  Even when the menu image 118b is being displayed, the volume may be adjusted or the light amount may be adjusted by operating a predetermined operation unit or selecting and operating a predetermined selection item. . In this case, it is desirable that the volume setting image 117a or the light amount setting image 117b be displayed only in the non-hiding area D.

  When the movable bodies 75a and 76a move from the origin position toward the predetermined effect position, the movable bodies 75a and 76a may stop operating at the predetermined effect position due to problems or the like. Thus, even when the menu image 118b is displayed with the movable bodies 75a and 76a still in the effect position, the display mode of each selection item of the menu image 118b, the menu operation notification image 118c, etc. The error notification image 163, the sound volume setting image 117a, and the light amount setting image 117b are displayed at positions that do not overlap the movable bodies 75a and 76a, only in the non-hidden area D or across the non-hidden area D and the hidden area. It is desirable to configure as follows.

  When the movable body is initialized at power-on, RAM clear, or other predetermined timing, at least the selection item image (initial temporary selection item image) corresponding to the initial cursor position is the same as that at the time of initialization in front view. It is desirable to display at a position that does not overlap the movement path of the movable body. Thereby, even when a menu display operation is performed during the initialization of the movable body, the player can surely recognize the initial cursor position.

  Of the selection item image corresponding to the initial cursor position, portions other than the portion indicating the selection item name (for example, the character portion of “return”) overlap with the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization in front view. It may be displayed. The menu operation notification image 118c is also desirably displayed at a position that does not overlap the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization when viewed from the front.

  32 (a) and 33 (a) are examples of the variation of the production symbol 114 due to the reach variation pattern. FIG. 32 (a) is during normal variation before reach establishment, and FIG. 33 (a) is reach establishment. Each of the following changes in reach is shown. As is clear from FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (a), the arrangement (stop position) of the movable body is different between the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32 (a) and the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. 33 (a). Thereby, the width of the non-hidden region D is different.

  That is, during the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32A, as in the fourth mode shown in FIG. 28D, the first movable body 75a is in the upper position, the second movable body 76a is in the upper position, , The fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a are stopped at the internal positions, respectively, but the second movable body 76a is positioned at the lower lower position as shown in FIG. In addition, the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a move to the outer positions on the outside, respectively, so that the non-hiding area D is expanded on the lower side and the left and right sides, respectively. Note that the timing for changing the stop position of the movable body in the symbol variation by the reach variation pattern may be at the start of the reach effect, at the time of executing the pre-reading effect, at the time of execution of the movable object effect, at the end of the reach effect, or the like.

  Further, in response to the change (enlargement) of the non-hidden region D, the display mode of the image displayed on the display screen 60a also changes. That is, during the normal variation shown in FIG. 32, the reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a at least a part of the non-hidden region D and the first to fifth fixed concealed regions B1 to B5 (here, the first to the first hidden regions). The fourth fixed concealment regions B1 to B4) are displayed across the display, and the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z are displayed in front of the hold base image 161 and in the non-hidden region D. Has been. Note that all or part of the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z may be arranged in at least one of the movable concealment region C and the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5. In that case, it is desirable that the entire game can be visually recognized if the player looks into it.

  On the other hand, during the reach variation shown in FIG. 33, the suspended pedestal image 161 and the suspended display images X1 to Y1 are deleted while leaving the varying pending image Z, and the varying pending image Z is enlarged in the non-hidden region D. It moves to the side (here lower side), and is displayed straddling the non-hidden area D and its outer area (for example, the fourth fixed hidden area B4). Note that a part of the on-change pending image Z during the reach change is hidden behind the central display frame unit 47 in a front view, but if the player looks into it from the upper side, the entire image can be seen. ing.

  Thereby, coupled with the fact that the non-hidden area D is enlarged, a wider display area can be used for the reach effect. The reach effect image 171 in this case is desirably displayed for the entire screen area A as shown in FIG.

  The reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the changing reserved image Z are moved downward in accordance with the movement of the second movable body 76a, and the reserved pedestal image 161 and the reserved display images X1 to X1,. Y1 may be displayed so as to disappear outside the display screen 60a, or may be displayed in an enlarged area without being erased. Alternatively, the reserved pedestal image 161 may be deleted, and the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z may be left in the enlarged area.

  In addition, with respect to the production symbol 114, during the normal variation shown in FIG. 32, a part of the decoration image 114b is displayed in a region outside the non-hidden region D (for example, the movable concealed region C), and the others are displayed in the non-hidden region D. 33, the decorative image 114b is deleted and only the symbol image 114a is displayed in the non-hidden region D during the reach variation shown in FIG.

  Further, the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is entirely non-hidden region D during both the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32 and the reach fluctuation shown in FIG. However, the display position may be moved to the enlargement side (for example, the lower side) of the non-hidden region D during reach fluctuation than during normal fluctuation. In this case, the movement of the display position of the volume setting image 117a is preferably performed after the movement of the second movable body 76a and the like is completed.

  This is to prevent the player from being informed of the shift to reach variation afterward due to the movement of the display position of the volume setting image 117a. The handling of the light amount setting image 117b (not shown in FIGS. 32A and 33A) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjustment operation is the same as that of the volume setting image 117a.

  Note that the volume setting image 117a, the light amount setting image 117b, and the like are displayed in the non-hidden area D during normal fluctuation (before the non-hiding area D is changed) and during reach fluctuation (after the non-hiding area D is changed). The image may be displayed in an area belonging to the non-hidden area D before and after the enlargement so that the display position is not moved when the reach changes. Moreover, when the position and / or width of the non-hidden region D can be changed by switching the stop position of the movable body during the symbol variation as in the examples of FIGS. It may be possible for the player to arbitrarily select such as. Further, during reach change, a medium effect symbol or the like during scroll change may be displayed larger than other left effect symbols, right effect symbols or the like. Thereby, the time which one production | presentation symbol passes on the display screen 60a by scrolling can be shortened.

  When the movable bodies 75a and 76a are moved from the origin position to the predetermined effect position during the reach fluctuation, the volume setting image 117a and / or the light amount setting are performed even when the movable bodies 75a and 76a are located at the predetermined effect position. It is desirable to display the image 117b in the non-hidden area D. Of course, the player can adjust the volume and / or the amount of light even in such a situation, but the setting result is actually reflected after the predetermined effect accompanying the operation of the movable bodies 75a and 76a is completed. It is desirable to do so. Further, even an effect that does not involve the operation of the movable bodies 75a and 76a may be configured as described above.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform without reducing the interest of the effect by the sound and the lamp at the time of executing the predetermined effect. In addition, since the setting operation by the player is accepted effectively instead of being invalid, there is no inconvenience or uncomfortable feeling that the setting operation suddenly becomes impossible for the player.

  FIG. 34A shows display areas of step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 displayed at each stage in the step-up notice effect that is an example of the normal notice effect. In this step-up notice effect, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number of stages from the first stage to the fifth stage, and the step-up notice image SU1 is used to indicate the step-up notice. The display area gradually changes (enlarges here) to the image SU5.

  In the example of FIGS. 34A and 34B, the entire step-up notice image SU1 and the step-up notice image SU2 are displayed in the non-hiding area D, but part of the step-up notice image SU3 is not displayed. The concealment area D protrudes and is displayed in the movable concealment area C. In the step-up preview image SU4, not only the movable concealment area C but also the second to fifth fixed concealment areas B2 to B5 are expanded, and finally the step-up preview image is displayed. In SU5 (not shown in FIG. 34 (a)), it is displayed in the full screen area A (FIG. 34 (b)). Even if a part of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 is displayed outside the non-hidden area D, a portion (character portion or the like indicating a character dialogue) suggesting the jackpot reliability or the like of each of the images is displayed. It is desirable to display the whole in the non-hidden area D.

  Further, when the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are displayed at predetermined display positions, an introduction effect may be performed. Here, the introduction effect is to move the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 toward a predetermined display position or to display the introduction effect image immediately before displaying the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 at the predetermined display position. This is for informing the player of the occurrence of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5. This introduction effect may be displayed so as to straddle all or at least one of the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the non-concealment region D.

  Further, the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is displayed entirely in the non-hidden area D, but the portion suggesting the jackpot reliability or the like (characters indicating the character dialogue) It is desirable to display while avoiding the part. The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjustment operation (not shown in FIG. 34A). Note that the volume setting image 117a, the light amount setting image 117b, and the like may be displayed in an overlapping manner with a portion other than the portion suggesting the jackpot reliability or the like in the step-up notice image, an introduction effect, or the like.

  In this way, even when the step-up preview image is displayed using the majority of the non-hidden region D, the volume setting image 117a or the like can be displayed without impairing the visibility of the step-up preview image. The light quantity setting image 117b can be displayed in the non-hiding area D.

  When displaying the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5, the display basically starts from the step-up preview image SU1, and the step-up preview images SU2, SU3,. When displaying the next stage SU image, the previous SU image display may be deleted. Further, the next SU image may be displayed while being displayed without deleting the display of the previous SU image. In this case, it is desirable to display the next SU image so as to overlap a part of the previous SU image. Furthermore, a larger SU image may be displayed as the steps are repeated.

  Further, the next SU image is displayed so as to overlap the previous SU image. For example, the step-up preview image SU1 is displayed, and the step-up preview image SU2 is overlapped with at least a part of the step-up preview image SU1. When the step-up preview image SU3 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the step-up preview image SU2, the step-up preview image SU1 is deleted when the step-up preview image SU3 is displayed. Good. In addition, the step-up notice image SU1 may not be visually recognized by displaying the step-up notice image SU3 so as to overlap the step-up notice image SU1.

  It may be possible to execute a gase effect (failure effect) for step-up notice. Although it is possible to display each SU image of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 in the gaze effect, the display mode is slightly different from that in the successful effect. For example, in the gase effect of the step-up notice image SU1, after the introduction effect of the step-up notice image SU1 is once executed, the non-executed step-up notice image SU1 (for example, a balloon alone is not displayed) is displayed. When the step-up preview image SU1 is executed, the step-up preview image SU1 in the execution state (characters and balloons are displayed) is displayed. Without being executed, the non-executed step-up preview image SU1 is deleted (with fade-out), and the step-up effect is ended.

  In this way, when the gaze effect is executed, the introductory effect or the non-executed SU image may be displayed in a predetermined display area for each step of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5. Further, the step-up notice image SU5 may be configured such that no gasse effect is present.

  The display areas of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various display modes may be used. For example, the display mode of the step-up preview image SU5 may be applied to the step-up preview image SU1 or the step-up preview image SU2, and the display mode of the step-up preview image SU1 or the step-up preview image SU2 may be applied to the step-up preview image SU3. -You may make it apply to -SU5. As described above, the display mode described above may be appropriately set for each SU image.

  FIG. 35A and FIG. 36A show display images of the image display means 60 in the button conversation notice effect that is an example of the normal notice effect. The button conversation notice effect is a combination of the button notice effect and the conversation notice effect. When the player operates the effect button 34 during the operation valid period, the operation shows the scene in which the character emits a dialogue. An effect image 165 is displayed, and the content of the dialogue suggests the jackpot reliability. During the operation valid period, an operation guidance image 166 indicating that the effect button (operation means) 34 should be operated is displayed.

  FIG. 35A shows a state where the operation guide image 166 is displayed during the operation effective period. The operation guidance image 166 is composed of an illustration showing a state in which the effect button 34 is pressed and the characters “PUSH!”, And the whole is displayed in the non-hiding area D. In addition, a radial or other effect image 167 is displayed around the operation guidance image 166 across the non-hidden region D and its outer region (here, the movable concealed region C and the third fixed concealed region B3). Has been.

  A gauge image indicating the progress of the operation valid period may be displayed. In this case, it is desirable to display the gauge image in the non-hiding area D. The operation guidance image 166 may be displayed so that a part thereof (for example, a portion showing the effect button 34) extends over at least one of the concealing regions B1 to B5 and C. It is desirable to display in the hidden area D. When a plurality of operation means are provided and a notice effect (button notice effect) corresponding to each of the plurality of operation means can be executed, each of the notice effects is preferably configured as described above. Further, when there is a difference in jackpot reliability or the like among a plurality of notice effects corresponding to a plurality of operation means, the above configuration may be configured only for a notice effect with high reliability.

  FIG. 36A shows a state where the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 35A and the operation-time effect image 165 is displayed. This operation effect image 165 is composed of a first display unit 165a made up of characters representing dialogue that suggests jackpot reliability, and a second display unit 165b made up of other characters, balloons, etc. The entire display unit 165a is displayed in the non-hidden region D, and the second display unit 165b is the non-hidden region D and its outer region (here, the transparent concealed region B4a in the fourth fixed concealed region B4, Of course, it may be displayed across the other concealment areas B1 to B3, B5, and C). Since the transparent concealment region B4a is a region corresponding to the rear side of the transparent entry preventing unit 111, the second display portion 165b on the rear side of the entry preventing unit 111 can be visually recognized even from the front.

  Also, in both FIG. 35A and FIG. 36A, the changing effect design 114 is displayed in the non-hidden area D in a state where only the design image 114a is present, The entire volume setting image 117a displayed when the adjustment operation is performed is also displayed in the non-hiding area D. The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjustment operation (not shown in FIGS. 35A and 36A).

  As types of the operation guide image 166, various different operation guide images 166 such as “continuous hit”, “long press”, “do not press”, and “release” may be displayed. Moreover, as a kind of operation button, when a plurality of operation means are provided, the first button image and the second button image may be displayed. When the mode of one operation means can be changed, the button image of the first mode, the button image of the second mode, and the like may be displayed. Further, the display mode of the button image may be displayed in various display modes such as blue, green, red, and rainbow color according to the reliability of the lottery result of the variable display.

  It is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and / or the light amount adjustment image 117b so that it does not overlap with the gauge image as well as the effect button image and the operation guidance image 166. In addition, when the operation effective period varies depending on the display mode of the effect button 34 and the display mode of the operation guide image 166, it is possible to increase or decrease the display area of the gauge image. It is desirable to display at a position that does not overlap the gauge image.

  In the execution of an effect accompanied by button operation such as a button conversation notice effect, it is natural that the player can adjust the volume and / or the light amount even in such a situation, but the setting result is actually reflected on the button. It is desirable that the operation effect is finished. However, the actual setting result may be reflected until at least the operation effective period in which the button image or gauge image is displayed, or after the operation by the player, the operation effect image is displayed. It may be displayed before the display is finished.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform without reducing the interest of the effect by the sound and the lamp at the time of executing the predetermined effect. In addition, since the setting operation by the player is accepted effectively instead of being invalid, there is no inconvenience or uncomfortable feeling that the setting operation suddenly becomes impossible for the player.

  FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a) show a display image of the image display means 60 in the mini character notice effect that is an example of the normal notice effect. In this mini character notice effect, as shown in FIG. 37A, first, a plurality of mini character images, for example, a first mini character image (first effect body image) 168 and a second mini character image (second effect body image) 169 are formed. To appear. At this time, both the first mini character image 168 and the second mini character image 169 are displayed across the non-hidden region D and its outer region (here, the movable concealed region C).

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the ratio of the first mini character image 168 displayed in the non-hidden area D is reduced, and the second mini character image 169 is conversely displayed in the non-hidden area D. The display positions of the mini character images 168 and 169 are changed so as to increase, and the reliability display image 170 is displayed in the non-hidden region D corresponding to the second mini character image 169. The reliability display image 170 displays the dialogue of the second mini character image 169, and includes a first display portion 170a made up of characters representing dialogue that suggests jackpot reliability, and a second display portion made up of other balloons and the like. 170b. The entire first display unit 170a may be displayed in the non-hidden region D, and at least a part of the second display unit 170b may be displayed outside the non-hidden region D (for example, the movable concealed region C). Good.

  Further, the changing effect design 114 is displayed only in the design image 114a in the non-hidden area D, and the volume setting image 117a displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is The whole is displayed in the non-hidden area D. The same applies to the light amount setting image 117b (not shown) displayed when the player performs the light amount adjustment operation (not shown in FIGS. 37A and 38A). Note that the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are set to a higher priority than the reliability display image 170. Therefore, when overlapping with the reliability display image 170, the volume setting image 117a and the like are displayed on the front side. However, the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are desirably displayed so as not to overlap at least the first display unit 170a in the reliability display image 170.

  In addition, the reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a across the non-hiding area D and the outer area (here, the first to fourth fixed hiding areas B1 to B4), The hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z are displayed in front of the hold base image 161 and in the non-hidden region D. Here, the reserved pedestal image 161 is set to a higher priority than the mini character images 168 and 169, and the second mini character image 169 overlaps the reserved pedestal image 161 and is hidden behind it. (FIG. 37 (a)). When the second mini character image 169 moves so that the ratio displayed in the non-hidden area D increases (FIG. 37 (a) → FIG. 38 (a)), the second mini character image 169 is a portion of the portion that is not hidden by the reserved pedestal image 161. The ratio is also increasing. The mini character images 168 and 169 may be set to a higher priority than the reserved pedestal image 161.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment has the image display means 60 capable of displaying an image on the display screen 60a, the game members 45, 47, 49, and 74 disposed on the front side of the display screen 60a, and the display. A movable body 75a to 78a that is configured to be operable on the front side of the screen 60a and can be stopped at a predetermined stop position, and operating means 34 and 35 that can be operated by the player, the display screen 60a is a game in front view. Fixed concealment regions (first display regions) B1 to B5 corresponding to the rear sides of the members 45, 47, 49, and 74, and movable concealment regions (second display regions) corresponding to the rear sides of the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a. ) C and a non-hidden area (third display area) D that is not a fixed concealed area B1 to B5 and is not a movable concealed area C. Based on the operation of the operation means 34, 35 by the player, settings relating to the game Is possible The notification images 116a, 116b, 118a for notifying that the operation means 34, 35 can be operated can be displayed, and the notification images 116a, 116b, 118a are displayed in the fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C. It is configured to display in the non-hidden area D without displaying.

  A menu image 118b having a plurality of selection items can be displayed, and the notification image includes a menu displayable notification image 118a indicating that an operation for displaying the menu image 118b is possible.

  Further, the volume setting image 117a indicating the setting state of the volume can be displayed in the non-hiding area D without being displayed in the fixed hiding areas B1 to B5 and the movable hiding area C. Further, the light amount setting image 117b indicating the setting state of the light amount can be displayed in the non-hidden region D without being displayed in the fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C. Further, the error notification image 163 for notifying an error can be displayed in the non-hidden region D without being displayed in the fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C. In addition, it is possible to switch to a power saving mode in which the power consumption is lower than normal, and the power saving mode notification image 120 indicating that the power saving mode is being used spans the non-hiding area D and the fixed hiding areas B1 to B5. It can be displayed.

  In addition, each time the starting means 56, 57 detect a game ball, a random number value is acquired and the random number value is stored in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a symbol variation start is started. When the condition is satisfied, the symbol display means 53 and 54 for displaying the symbols in a variable manner based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139, and the stop symbol after the change by the symbol display means 53 and 54 are in a specific mode. Profit state generating means 142 for generating a profit state in the case of being stored, and storing the hold display images X1 to Y1 on the hold base image 161 and displaying them on the image display means 60, thereby storing them in the random number storage means 139. In addition, it is possible to notify the reserved number, which is the number of random values that have not yet been subjected to symbol variation by the symbol display means 53, 54, and the reserved pedestal image 161 and the non-hidden region D are fixedly concealed. It can be displayed straddling the area B1~B5.

  In addition, the effect design 114 composed of the design image 114a and the decoration image 114b can be variably displayed by the image display means 60, and during the standby period in which the effect design 114 is not variably displayed, the immediately preceding symbol change It is possible to display the effect symbol 114 when stopped at the time, and among the effect symbols 114 during the standby period, the symbol image 114a spans the non-hiding area D, and the decoration image 114b spans the non-hiding area D and the movable hiding area C. Each can be displayed. Further, in this case, the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be changed in a plurality of ways, and in any case where there are a plurality of stop positions, the symbol image 114a is in the non-hiding area D and the decorative image 114b is in the non-hiding area. You may display across D and the movable concealment area | region C, respectively.

  In general, there are a plurality of types of production symbols 114 (for example, nine types corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9). However, since the design of the decorative image 114b is different for each type, the size and shape are also different. It may be different for each type. Even in such a case, it is desirable to employ the above-described configuration for all types of effect symbols 114.

  Moreover, when configuring the jackpot mode (specific mode), the configuration as described above may be employed only for either the odd symbol, which is often advantageous to the player, or the other even symbol. For the effect design 114 constituting the even symbol, the design image 114a is displayed in the non-hidden region D, and the decoration image 114b is displayed across the non-hidden region D and the movable concealment region C, thereby producing an odd symbol. The entire pattern 114 may be configured to be displayed in the non-hidden area D.

  Further, the stop positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be changed in a plurality of ways, and the notification images 116a, 116b, and 118a may be displayed in the non-hidden region D in any case where there are a plurality of stop positions.

  In addition, an operation-time effect image (notice effect image) 165 relating to the reliability of occurrence of the profit state can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the operation-time effect image (notice effect image) 165 is a first display unit that suggests reliability. 165a and the other second display portion 165b, the first display portion 165a is in the non-hiding area D, the second display portion 165b is at least one of the fixed hiding areas B1 to B5 and the movable hiding area C Each of the images can be displayed across the non-hidden region D.

  The gaming members 45, 47, 49, and 74 include a transparent portion 111, and the fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 include a transparent concealment region (first transparent display region) B4a corresponding to the rear side of the transparent portion 111, and the second The display unit 165b can be displayed across the transparent hidden area B4a and the non-hidden area D. In this case, an entry preventing means 111 for preventing the entry of the game ball to the rear side may be provided on the lower front side of the image display means 60, and at least a part of the entry preventing means 111 may be a transparent portion.

  Further, the volume setting image 117a indicating the setting state of the volume can be displayed on the image display means 60 with higher priority than the operation effect image (notification effect image) 165, and the volume setting image 117a is at least the first display unit. It can be displayed in the non-hidden area D so as not to overlap with 165a. As for the transparent concealment area, as an area corresponding to the non-concealment area D, at least a part of the image displayed in the non-concealment area D in the above description may be displayed in the transparent concealment area.

  Further, as a notice effect relating to the reliability of occurrence of the profit state, a plurality of step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the display areas of the step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 change according to the stages. The step-up notice images SU1 to SU5 are arranged in the non-hidden area D until the first predetermined stage, and the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C after the first predetermined stage. Each of the images can be displayed across at least one and the non-hidden region D.

  In addition, among the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5, the portion suggesting the reliability can be displayed in the non-hidden region D in all of a plurality of stages. In addition, the volume setting image 117a indicating the setting state of the volume can be displayed on the image display means 60 with a higher priority than the notice effect images SU1 to SU5, and the volume setting image 117a is at least overlapped with a portion indicating the reliability. It can be displayed in the non-hidden area D so that it does not become.

  A menu image 118b having a plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and when any one of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is selected by a selection operation, the selection item image The selection item image is selected when the selection confirmation operation is performed in a state where any one of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is in the temporary selection state. The initial temporary selection item image that is initially set to the temporary selection state among the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e can be displayed in the non-hidden region D.

  Further, among the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e, at least a part of the selection item images other than the initial temporary selection item image can be displayed across the non-hiding area D and the movable hiding area C. Further, the selection item image corresponding to the process of returning to the upper screen may be used as the initial temporary selection item image. Of course, the selection item image may be displayed across the non-hiding area D and at least one of the first to fourth fixed hiding areas B1 to B4.

  Further, when the operation means 34 is operated during the operation effective period, the operation effect image 165 can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and an operation guide image 166 indicating that the operation means 34 should be operated during the operation effective period. The effect image 167 corresponding to the operation guide image 166 is configured to be displayed on the display screen 60a. The entire operation guide image 166 is movable in the non-hidden area D and the effect image 167 is movable with the fixed hidden areas B1 to B5. Display is possible across at least one of the hidden area C and the non-hidden area D.

  In addition, the operation effect image 165 includes a first display unit 165a that suggests the reliability of occurrence of the profit state and the other second display unit 165b, and the entire first display unit 165a is in the non-hiding area D. The second display portion 165b can be displayed across at least one of the fixed hidden areas B1 to B5 and the movable hidden area C and the non-hidden area D.

  In addition, the movable concealment region C can be reduced and the non-concealment region D can be expanded by moving the movable bodies 75a to 78a at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display. The predetermined timing can be set at or near the time when the reach state is established in the symbol variation display. Further, the display position of the predetermined image displayed on the display screen 60a can be changed corresponding to the enlargement of the non-hidden region D. In this case, the display position of the predetermined image can be changed after the movement of the movable bodies 75a to 78a is completed and the non-hidden region D is enlarged.

  Further, the display position of the predetermined image can be moved in the enlargement direction of the non-hidden region D. The entire predetermined image can be displayed in the non-hidden area D before and after the non-hidden area D is enlarged. The predetermined image includes at least one of a volume setting image 117a indicating the setting state of the volume and a light amount setting image 117b indicating the setting state of the light amount.

  In addition, when changing the display position of the predetermined image, it is possible to erase a part of the predetermined image. In addition, the predetermined image includes hold display images X1 to Y1 and a changing hold image Z. It is also possible to change the display position of the changing hold image Z and delete the hold display images X1 to Y1. It is also possible to change the display position of the changing hold image Z and delete the hold base image 161.

  Further, in the notice effect regarding the reliability of the profit state occurrence, the second effect image 169 is displayed in the non-hiding area D so that the ratio of the first effect image 168 displayed in the non-hiding area D is reduced. The display positions of the first effect body image 168 and the second effect body image 169 are changed so that the ratio of the generated effect images increases, and the reliability display image 170 regarding the reliability of the profit state occurrence is changed to the second effect body image 169. Correspondingly, it can be displayed in the non-hidden area D.

  39 to 60 illustrate the second embodiment. The pachinko machine of the present embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine of the first embodiment only in the configuration of the movable effect means. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for configurations common to both embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted unless particularly necessary.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 to 42, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment has a plurality of, for example, two movable effect means, such as a tilt movable effect means 201 and an elevating / moving effect effect means 202, arranged on the front side of the back mounting base 61. . As shown in FIG. 41 and the like, the tilt movable effect unit 201 includes a tilt movable unit 203 and a tilt drive unit 204 that drives the tilt movable unit 203. The tilt movable means 203 includes a plurality of, for example, left, right, and lower three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, and two interlocking portions 203d and 203e that interlock the three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c. The display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are supported from the rear side by mounting bases 205a to 205c fixed to the back mounting base 61, respectively.

  The left display frame movable body 203a is arranged on the front side corresponding to the left side portion of the image display means 60, and has a vertically long vertical frame portion and an upper left frame projecting from the upper end side of the vertical frame portion in a substantially right angle. The part is formed in a substantially L shape in front view. The left display frame movable body 203a is provided with a slide shaft 206 in the front-rear direction on the upper end side thereof, and the slide shaft 206 is slidable with respect to a vertical guide hole 207 provided in the mounting base 205a. As a result, the left display frame movable body 203a can slide in the vertical direction and rotate around the slide shaft 206.

  The right display frame movable body 203b is disposed on the front side corresponding to the right side portion of the image display means 60, and has a vertically long vertical frame portion and an upper right frame projecting from the upper end side of the vertical frame portion at a substantially right angle. The part is formed in a substantially L shape in front view. The right display frame movable body 203b is pivotally supported on the mounting base 205b by a longitudinal axis 208 provided on the lower end side thereof, and a rearward projecting slide portion 209 provided on the upper end side is provided on the mounting base 205b. By being slidably inserted into the arcuate guide hole 210 provided, the guide hole 210 can swing around the pivot 208 within a predetermined angle range.

  The lower display frame movable body 203c is disposed in a horizontally long shape on the front side corresponding to the lower side of the image display means 60, and is pivotally supported on the mounting base 205c via the pivot 211 in the front-rear direction on the right end side. . Note that a slide portion 212 is provided on the left end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c so as to protrude rearward, and the slide portion 212 is slidably inserted into an arcuate guide hole 213 formed in the mounting base 205c. Thus, the lower display frame movable body 203c can swing around the pivot 211 between a substantially horizontal normal posture and a left-down inclined posture.

  The left interlocking portion 203d interlocks the left display frame movable body 203a and the lower display frame movable body 203c, and is formed in a substantially triangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the upper corner is the pivot 214 in the front-rear direction. The lower display frame movable body 203a is connected to the lower end side of the lower display frame movable body 203a through the lower display frame movable body 203c. The front and rear slide shaft 215 is inserted into the substantially horizontal guide hole 216 provided on the left end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c. The remaining left corner is pivotally supported on the mounting base 205a via a pivot 217 in the front-rear direction.

  Accordingly, when the lower display frame movable body 203c shifts from the normal posture to the inclined posture, the left interlocking portion 203d rotates clockwise around the pivot 217, and the pivot 214 moves downward on the right side. 203a swings counterclockwise while moving downward, and shifts from a normal posture in which the vertical frame portion is substantially vertical to an inclined posture in which the vertical frame portion is inclined downward to the right (FIG. 43 (a). ) → (b)).

  The right interlocking portion 203e interlocks the right display frame movable body 203b and the lower display frame movable body 203c, and is formed in an elongated shape. One end side of the right interlocking frame movable body 203b via the pivot 218 in the front-rear direction is provided. The lower corner portion is connected to the right end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c via a pivot 219 in the front-rear direction. The pivot 218 is disposed on the right display frame movable body 203b at a position spaced to the right with respect to the pivot 208, and the pivot 219 is disposed on the lower display frame movable body 203c at a position spaced to the right with respect to the pivot 211. Is arranged.

  As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c shifts from the normal posture to the inclined posture, the pivot 218 is pushed up via the right interlocking portion 203e. Therefore, the right display frame movable body 203b swings counterclockwise around the pivot 208. As a result, the vertical frame portion shifts from a normal posture in which the vertical frame portion is substantially vertical to an inclined posture in which the vertical frame portion is inclined to the right (FIG. 43 (a) → (b)).

  As described above, when the lower display frame movable body 203c swings between the normal posture and the tilted posture, the left display frame movable body 203a and the right display frame movable body 203b are also linked between the normal posture and the tilted posture. Change. That is, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c have a normal posture (FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (c)) that substantially surrounds a part of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 in a front view, and the left from the normal posture. It is possible to deform between an inclined posture (FIGS. 43B and 43D) inclined at a predetermined angle. Note that the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are biased toward the inclined posture by their own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the tilt driving means 204 is provided on the same mounting base 205c as the lower display frame movable body 203c, and displays a driving source 221 such as a stepping motor and the driving force of the driving source 221 on the lower side. And a drive transmission member 222 that transmits to the movable frame body 203c. The drive transmission member 222 is constituted by a spur gear mounted on the mounting base 205c so as to be rotatable around a longitudinal axis 222a, and the drive gear 221a mounted on the drive shaft of the drive source 221 meshes. Yes. The drive transmission member 222 is provided with a protruding first engaging portion 223 on the side surface corresponding to a part of the circumferential direction thereof, and the lower display frame movable body 203c has the first engaging portion 223. The 2nd engaging part 224 corresponding to is provided.

  The first engagement portion 223 is a second engagement on the lower display frame movable body 203c side at the first angular position when the drive transmission member 222 is rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) by driving of the drive source 221. After contacting the portion 224 from below, the second engagement portion 224 is pushed upward as the rotation progresses, and the lower display frame is movable when the drive transmission member 222 reaches the second angular position. The body 203c is arranged in a normal posture. Therefore, from this state, when the drive transmission member 222 is rotated in the reverse direction (for example, counterclockwise) by driving the drive source 221, the support position of the second engagement portion 224 by the first engagement portion 223 is gradually lowered. When the drive transmission member 222 reaches the first angular position, the lower display frame movable body 203c is inclined. Thus, by operating the drive source 221 in both directions within a predetermined step range, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are placed in the normal posture (FIGS. 43A and 43C) and the tilted posture (FIG. 43B). , (D)).

  As shown in FIG. 42 and the like, the up-and-down movable effect means 202 includes a sub-screen movable body 231 and an up-and-down drive means 232 that drives the sub-screen movable body 231 in the vertical direction. Is arranged. The sub-screen movable body 231 is arranged in a horizontally long shape on the front side of the image display means 60, and a sub-image display means 233 made of a liquid crystal display means smaller than the image display means 60 together with an arbitrary decoration is arranged on the front side. The left and right ends are supported by a pair of elevating drive means 232 and 232 disposed on the left and right sides of the image display means 60 so as to be movable in the vertical direction via drive coupling bodies 234 and 234, respectively. Yes.

  The elevating drive means 232 is supported by the back mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 235, arranged along the side edge of the image display means 60 from the upper end side to the lower end side, and the drive coupling body 234 is arranged. An elongate cylindrical elevating guide 236 that guides in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 237a disposed in the vicinity corresponding to one end side and lower end side of the elevating guide 236, and the other end side and upper end side of the elevating guide 236 Correspondingly, a driven pulley 237b disposed in the vicinity thereof, a driving source 238 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the driving pulley 237a, and a predetermined portion on the periphery of the driving pulley 237a and the driven pulley 237b. And an endless gear belt 239 to which the drive coupling body 234 is fixed. The end of the sub-screen movable body 231 is front and rear in the drive coupling body 234. It is connected rotatably by pivot 240 countercurrent.

  In addition, one of the left and right pivots 240, 240 is slidably connected to a left and right elongated hole 241 provided on the sub-screen movable body 231 side or the drive connecting body 234 side. Even when the ascending / descending drive means 232 and 232 perform an asymmetric drive operation, they can be followed by inclining the sub-screen movable body 231 within a predetermined range.

  The sub-screen movable body 231 of the present embodiment has an upper normal posture (FIG. 43 (a)) when the left and right lifting drive means 232, 232 are both stopped at the upper position, and a left / right lifting relative to the upper normal posture. The upper inclined posture when the driving means 232 is lowered by a predetermined step (FIG. 43B) and the lower normal posture when the left and right lifting driving means 232 and 232 are both stopped at the lower position (FIG. 43C). And a lower inclined posture (FIG. 43 (d)) in the case where the right raising / lowering driving means 232 is raised by a predetermined step with respect to the lower normal posture, can be changed between four types of stop postures.

  The sub-screen movable body 231 is substantially horizontal in the upper and lower normal postures (FIGS. 43A and 43C), and is displayed in the upper and lower inclined postures (FIGS. 43B and 43D). The frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are inclined downward to the left corresponding to the inclination postures. Since the sub-image display unit 233 operates integrally with the sub-screen movable body 231, the sub-image display means 233 is substantially horizontal when the sub-screen movable body 231 is in the normal posture, and has a downwardly inclined shape when it is in the tilted posture.

  FIG. 44 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. The control system of the present embodiment is different from the control system of the first embodiment (FIG. 11) in that the control target of the image display control means 150a is the image display means 60 and the sub image display means 233. The control object of the movable body control means 150d is that the tilt movable effect means 201 and the lift movable effect means 202 are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, at least one of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c of the tilt movable presentation means 201 and the sub-screen movable body 231 of the lift movable presentation means 202 is changed from the normal posture to the tilt posture. In accordance with this, it is possible to perform an inclination effect in which at least a part of the image on the image display means 60 is also inclined and displayed, and the symbol variation effect control means 152, the image display control means 150a, etc. execute the inclination effect. This is also different from the control system of the first embodiment (FIG. 11) in that it has a configuration for doing so.

  Here, the inclination deformation is a rotation process (predetermined deformation process) for rotating a predetermined image around a predetermined center by a predetermined angle of less than 90 degrees (predetermined deformation process). This substantially coincides with the inclination angle of the movable body 231 in the inclined posture.

  Hereinafter, a configuration for executing the tilt effect will be described. First, the images displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233 are drawn separately for each display means 60 and 233 in a plurality of layers set with a predetermined priority. .

  In the example of FIG. 49 (a), a background image displayed on the image display means 60, an effect design (symbol image), a character image, a reserved pedestal image, a reserved display image, a changing hold image, a volume setting image, an error notification image. In addition, the sub-effect design is drawn in a plurality of layers so that the display priority becomes higher in that order. Also, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the background image and the bubble effect image displayed on the sub image display means 233 are similarly drawn in a plurality of layers so that the display priority becomes higher in that order. It has come to be.

  In addition, deformation information regarding whether or not to perform a predetermined deformation (here, an inclination deformation) is added to each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, and the image to be deformed is added. 1 is set for each image, and 0 is set for an image that is not deformed.

  In the example of FIG. 49A, 0 (no deformation) is used for the deformation information of the right-handed guidance image, the volume setting image, the error notification image, and the sub-effects design, and the other background image, the design information, etc. 1 (with deformation) is set, and in the example of FIG. 49B, 0 (no deformation) is set in the deformation information of all images displayed on the sub-image display means 233.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub-screen movable body 231 is tilted, the sub-image display means 233 on the sub-screen movable body 231 is also inclined downward to the left, so that it is displayed on the sub-image display means 233. Even if the image is not inclined with respect to the sub-image display unit 233, the image is inclined with respect to the image display unit 60 and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub image display unit 233 is not image processing called tilt deformation, but the sub image display unit 233 is tilted via the sub screen movable body 231 to the image display unit 60 or the like. It is designed to incline against.

  Next, the drawing process on the image display unit 60 by the image display control unit 150a will be described. In the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of images displayed on the image display means 60, those that perform inclination deformation and those that do not perform inclination are mixed. Therefore, instead of drawing all the images uniformly in the frame buffer for the image display means 60, what is a frame buffer for an image subjected to tilt deformation (an image whose deformation information is 1) as shown in FIG. Draw in the frame buffer via another primary buffer, and perform transformation processing when drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer. For images that do not undergo tilt transformation (images with no transformation information), go through the primary buffer. It is designed to draw directly in the frame buffer without doing so.

  In addition, the tilt deformation process (rotation process) performed at the time of drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer is performed according to the procedures shown in FIGS. That is, first, image data in the primary buffer is read (S101). Also, coordinate axes (x, y), radius (r), and rotation angle (a) are designated (S102 to S104), and the coordinates of the four vertices 0 to 3 are calculated (S105).

  Then, the UV coordinates (upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right) of the read image data are designated (S106), and the UV coordinates of the image data are fixed to the coordinates of vertices 0 to 3 and drawn in the frame buffer (S107). . As a result, the image in the primary buffer can be drawn in the frame buffer by being rotated by a predetermined angle around a predetermined center (FIG. 47).

  Subsequently, a specific example of the tilt effect will be described with reference to display examples of various images displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, and display priorities of these various images and setting contents of deformation information. To do.

  FIG. 48 shows the operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 when the tilt notice effect is executed, and the change in the display image associated therewith. Here, the tilt notice effect (tilt effect) is an example of the “normal notice effect”, and the movable body and the image are inclined based on, for example, the jackpot reliability during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. It has become. In the tilt notice effect of FIG. 48, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the normal posture to the inclined posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is changed from the upper normal posture to the upper inclined posture.

  In the example of FIG. 48, the background image 160, the effect design (design image) 114a, the character image 251, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1, and the variation are displayed on the image display means 60 in order of decreasing priority. The middle hold image Z, the right-handed guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the sub-effects design 252 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image are displayed on the sub-image display means 233 in order of priority. In the state where 253 is displayed, the tilt notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) → (b). The secondary effect symbol 252 is a so-called fourth symbol displayed separately from the effect symbol 114, and always corresponds to the variation of the first and second special symbols while the first and second special symbols vary. The image display means 60 is variably displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, the deformation information of each image includes a right-handed guidance image 162b, a volume setting image 117a, an error notification image 163, a sub-effects design 252 displayed on the image display means 60, and a sub-image. All images displayed on the display means 233 are set to 0 (no deformation), and other images are set to 1 (with deformation).

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) → (b), when the tilt notice effect is executed, the background image 160, the effect design (design image) 114a, the character image 251, the reserved base image 161, the on hold on the image display means 60. The display images X1 to Y1 and the changing pending image Z are tilted to the left together with the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c due to the tilt deformation, but the right-handed guiding image 162b and the volume setting image 117a having higher priority than those images. The error notification image 163 and the sub-effects design 252 are not tilted and maintained in an upright state.

  Since each image displayed on the sub-image display unit 233 is not tilted and deformed (FIG. 49B), the sub-image display unit 233 stands upright without tilting even when the tilt notice effect is executed. Although the state is maintained, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the sub-image display unit 233 itself is tilted by the tilt notice effect, so that the background image 160 on the image display unit 60 side with respect to the image display unit 60 and the like. It will be in the state inclined like the effect design (symbol image) 114a.

  As described above, the right-handed guidance image 162b, the sound volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the secondary effect symbol 252 displayed on the image display means 60 are tilted during the display thereof, and the background effect image is generated. Even when the tilt deformation is performed on 160 or the like, the tilt deformation is not performed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to easily and surely recognize various important notification contents while performing a tilt notice effect on the image display means 60.

  FIG. 50 shows a change in the display image when a door opening error occurs during the execution of the tilt notice effect, or when the player performs a volume adjustment operation. Note that the priority and variation information of each image regarding the tilt notice effect are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the tilt notice effect is executed while the second special symbol is changing, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 are tilted and tilted to the left. . And among each image displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the effect design (symbol image) 114a, the character image 251, the reservation pedestal image 161, the reservation display images X1 to Y1, and the change in hold Since the deformation information for the image Z is 1 (with deformation), tilt deformation is performed and the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like are tilted to the left side. However, the deformation information is 0 (no deformation) for the sub-effects design 252. For this reason, no tilting deformation is performed and the upright state is maintained. Each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not deformed because the deformation information is 0. However, the image is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like due to the inclination of the sub-image display means 233 itself. It becomes the state.

  If a door opening error occurs in this state, an error notification image 163 is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 50B. The deformation information for this error notification image 163 is 0 (no deformation). (FIG. 49 (a)), it is displayed in an upright state without being tilted. Similarly, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the tilt notice effect, a volume setting image 117a is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 50 (c). Since the deformation information is 0 (no deformation) for the image 117a (FIG. 49 (a)), the image 117a is displayed in an upright state without being inclined.

  Although illustration is omitted, even when the right-handed guiding image 162b is displayed on the image display means 60 during the execution of the tilt notice effect, the deformation information for the right-handed guiding image 162b is 0 (no deformation). Because of this (FIG. 49 (a)), it is displayed in an upright state without being subjected to tilt deformation.

  FIG. 51 shows the operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the change in the display image associated therewith during the execution of the tilt-down notice effect. Here, the tilt descent notice effect is an example of the “normal notice effect” similar to the tilt notice effect shown in FIG. 48 and the like, and the movable body is based on the jackpot reliability during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. However, unlike the tilt notice effect, the sub-screen movable body 231 is not simply tilted, but also changes from the upper normal posture to the lower inclined posture with the descent. (FIG. 43 (a) → (d)).

  In the example of FIG. 51, the background image 160, the effect design (symbol image) 114a, the character images 250 and 251, the reserved base image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the variation are displayed on the image display means 60 in order of decreasing priority. 51 (a) → (b) in a state in which the middle reserved image Z and the sub-effects design 252 are displayed, and the background image and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed on the sub image display means 233 in order of priority. The descent notice effect is executed as shown in FIG.

  When the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting from the upper side of the image display means 60 to the approximate center due to the tilt-down notice effect, the character image 250 on the image display means 60 is displayed as shown in FIG. The sub screen movable body 231 changes to a position and mode related to the movement operation and the post-movement posture, for example, the sub screen movable body 231 is pushed obliquely downward from the upper side, and the sub screen movable body after the movement A movable body effect image 254 corresponding to H.231 is displayed.

  As described above, with respect to the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 displayed in association with the motion of the sub-screen movable body 231, the deformation information is 1 (with deformation) as shown in FIG. Therefore, the sub-screen movable body 231 is displayed in a tilted manner according to the tilt deformation.

  When the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting due to the tilt-down notice effect (FIG. 51 (b)), the effect design 114 changes to a smaller retraction symbol 255 while avoiding the sub-screen movable body 231 and the image display means 60. However, since the deformation information is 0 (no deformation) as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the evacuation symbol 255 is displayed in an upright state without being inclined and deformed. As for other background images 160 displayed on the image display means 60, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1, the on-change changing image Z, and the secondary effect design 252 as shown in FIG. Since the deformation information is 0 (no deformation), the inclined deformation is not performed and the upright state is maintained. Each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not deformed because the deformation information is 0. However, the image is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like due to the inclination of the sub-image display means 233 itself. It becomes the state.

  As described above, the image displayed in association with the movable body may be subjected to the tilt deformation in accordance with the operation of the movable body, and the other images may not be subjected to the tilt deformation.

  FIG. 53 shows the operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 when the tilt notice effect is executed at the start of symbol change (immediately after the start), and the change in the display image associated therewith.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), at the start of symbol variation, the background image 160, the effect symbol 114a, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-Y1, Y1- The hold image Z, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effects design 252 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed on the sub image display means 233 in order of priority, immediately after the start of the design change. The notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 53B, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the normal posture to the inclined posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is changed from the upper normal posture to the upper inclined posture, as shown in FIG. Move along the time chart. Further, among the images displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the production pattern 114, the reserved base image 161, the reserved display image whose deformation information shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 55, X1 to Y1 and the on-change pending image Z are subjected to tilt deformation in synchronization with the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, and are gradually tilted and displayed on the left side.

  In addition, when the tilting operations of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like are completed, an effect image 256 (deformation information: 1) indicating a crack is displayed on the image display unit 60 in a tilted state in accordance with the effect symbol 114 and the like. Is done.

  On the other hand, the deformation information for other images displayed on the image display means 60, that is, the volume setting image 117a and the sub-effects design 252 is 0 (no deformation) as shown in FIG. The tilt deformation is not performed and the upright state is maintained. Each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not deformed because the deformation information is 0. However, the image is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like due to the inclination of the sub-image display means 233 itself. It becomes the state.

  The tilt notice effect ends at a predetermined timing thereafter, and the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the tilted posture to the normal posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is moved from the upper tilted posture as shown in FIG. 53 (b) → (a). Return to the upper normal posture. The return operation at the end of the tilt notice effect is performed at a lower speed than the tilt operation at the start of the tilt notice effect as shown in FIG.

  Also, among the images displayed in the inclined deformation state on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the production pattern 114, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the changing pending image Z are reversed. As shown in FIG. 55, the direction is gradually deformed, and gradually returns to the upright state in synchronization with the return operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the like. On the other hand, the effect image 256 indicating the crack displayed when the tilting operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c is completed is erased from the image display means 60 almost simultaneously with the start of the return operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c. Is done.

  FIG. 56 shows the operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the change in the display image associated therewith when the tilt descent notice effect is executed at the start of the symbol variation (substantially simultaneously with the start). ing. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), at the start of symbol variation, the background image 160, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1, the changing hold image Z, The save symbol 255, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effects symbol 252 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed on the sub-image display means 233 in order of priority, At about the same time, the tilt notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are changed from the normal posture to the inclined posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is changed from the upper normal posture to the lower inclined posture. It moves along the time chart shown. In addition, the background image 160 displayed on the image display means 60, the holding base image 161, the holding display images X1 to Y1, the changing holding image Z, the evacuation symbol 255, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-effects symbol 252 are: As shown in FIG. 57 (a), since all the deformation information is 0 (no deformation), the inclined deformation is not performed and the upright state is maintained. Each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not deformed because the deformation information is 0. However, the image is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like due to the inclination of the sub-image display means 233 itself. It becomes the state.

  Further, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting from the upper side of the image display means 60 to substantially the center by the tilt-down notice effect, the character image 250 and the movable body are almost simultaneously with the completion of the operation as shown in FIG. The effect image 254 is displayed on the image display means 60.

  The character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 are inclined and deformed because the deformation information is set to 1 (with deformation) as shown in FIG. 57A, and the sub-screen movable body 231 is moved. For example, the character image 250 pushes the sub-screen movable body 231 obliquely downward from the upper side, and the movable-body effect image 254 follows the periphery of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the character image 250. Are displayed respectively.

  At a predetermined timing thereafter, the tilt-down notice effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (b) → (a), the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c change from the tilted posture to the normal posture, and the sub-screen movable body 231 tilts downward. The posture returns to the upper normal posture. As shown in FIG. 58, the return operation at the end of the tilt-down notice effect is performed at a lower speed than the tilt operation at the start of the tilt-down notice effect.

  At that time, the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 displayed on the image display means 60 in the inclined deformation state are erased substantially simultaneously with the start of the return operation of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the like. Then, the image display means 60 includes a background image 160 that has been maintained in an upright state without being inclined and deformed even during the tilt-down notice effect, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1 to Y1, and the changing pending image. Z, evacuation symbol 255, etc. are left, and the remaining symbol variation continues.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows a display image when the tilt effect is executed during the customer waiting normal effect in the customer waiting state, and FIG. 60 (a) shows the game during the execution of the tilt effect shown in FIG. 59 (a). The display images when the person operates the effect button 34 and the menu image 118b is displayed are shown. FIGS. 59B and 59C show the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub image display means 233, respectively, corresponding to FIG. 59A. Yes.

  Similarly, FIGS. 60B and 60C show the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display unit 60 and the sub image display unit 233, respectively, corresponding to FIG. 60A. ing. The tilt effect may be executed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (reception of a customer waiting demo command).

  In the example of FIG. 59 (a), the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the reserved base image 161, the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustment are displayed on the image display means 60 in order from the lowest display priority. The possible notification image 116b, the power saving mode notification image 120, and the error notification image 163 are displayed, and the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 are displayed on the sub-image display unit 233 in order of decreasing display priority. Tilt production is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), among the images displayed on the image display means 60 in FIG. 59 (a), the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the reserved base image 161, the menu displayable notification image 118a, Since the deformation information is set to 1 for the volume-adjustable notification image 116a, the light amount-adjustable notification image 116b, and the power saving mode notification image 120, the tilt deformation is performed and the image is tilted to the left. Since the deformation information is set to 0, the upright state is maintained even after the execution of the tilt effect. Each image displayed on the sub image display means 233 is not deformed because the deformation information is 0, but is tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60 and the like due to the inclination of the sub image display means 233 itself. It becomes.

  Note that the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed after the customer waiting state is started by receiving the customer waiting demo command. May be started. In addition, the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed when the tilt effect is executed during the customer waiting state.

  Further, when the player performs the volume adjustment operation and the light amount adjustment operation in the state of FIG. 59A, the volume adjustable notification image 116a and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b are deleted, and the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image are deleted. 117b is displayed. As shown in FIG. 59B, since the deformation information is set to 0 for the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b, the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b are displayed. Is displayed in an upright state (not shown) without tilting deformation. Note that the deformation information may be set to 0 for the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light amount adjustable notification image 116b, and the upright state may be maintained after execution of the tilt effect.

  When the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) (when the tilt effect is being executed), a new menu image is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 60 (a). 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c are displayed. Since the deformation information is set to 0 for the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c as shown in FIG. It is displayed upright.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment includes the image display unit 60 capable of displaying an image, and can display the volume setting image 117a indicating the volume setting state on the image display unit 60. When an effect control means 122 for controlling a specific effect for performing a predetermined deformation process on the image displayed on the means 60 is provided and the specific effect is executed while the volume setting image 117a is being displayed, the specific image not including the volume setting image 117a is displayed. On the other hand, the predetermined deformation process (inclined deformation process in this case) is performed, but the predetermined deformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a. Further, when the predetermined deformation process is performed on the specific image, the movable bodies 203a to 203c and 231 are operated corresponding to the predetermined deformation process. Further, the effect design 114 can be variably displayed on the image display means 60, and the specific image includes the effect design.

  In addition, each time the starting means 56, 57 detect a game ball, a random number value is acquired and the random number value is stored in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a symbol variation start is started. When the condition is satisfied, the symbol display means 53 and 54 for displaying the symbols in a variable manner based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139, and the stop symbol after the change by the symbol display means 53 and 54 are in a specific mode. Profit state generating means 142 for generating a profit state in the case of the display, and displaying the hold display images X1 to Y1 on the image display means 60, thereby storing them in the random number storage means 139 and still displaying the symbol display means 53, 54, it is possible to report the number of reservations, which is the number of random values that have not been subjected to symbol variation, and the specific image includes the hold display images X1 to Y1. The specific image includes an effect image.

  Further, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform the predetermined deformation process based on the deformation information given in advance for each image, and for the specific image, the volume setting image 117a includes the deformation information for performing the predetermined deformation process. Each is provided with deformation information indicating that the predetermined deformation process is not performed.

  In addition, when a new image is displayed during execution of the specific effect, if the image is a specific image that does not include the volume setting image 117a, a predetermined deformation process is performed on the specific image, but at least the volume setting image 117a. If so, the predetermined deformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a.

  Further, when a specific effect is executed while the error notification image 163 is displayed, a predetermined deformation process is performed on a specific image that does not include the error notification image 163, but at least the error notification image 163 is subjected to a predetermined deformation process. It is configured not to do. Further, when a new image is displayed during execution of the specific effect, if the image is a specific image that does not include the error notification image 163, the predetermined deformation process is performed. If the image is the error notification image 163, the predetermined deformation process is performed. Is configured to not.

  Further, it is possible to display on the image display means 60 the firing guidance images 162a and 162b indicating that the game area 23 should be aimed at the left and right sides, and execute a specific effect while the firing guidance images 162a and 162b are being displayed. In this case, the predetermined deformation process is performed on a specific image that does not include the firing guide images 162a and 162b, but the predetermined deformation process is not performed on the firing guide images 162a and 162b.

  In addition, the effect symbol 114 can be switched between a normal symbol and a retreat symbol 255 smaller than the normal symbol. When a specific effect is executed while the retreat symbol 255 is displayed, a specific image that does not include the retreat symbol 255 is displayed. Although the predetermined deformation process is performed, the predetermined deformation process is not performed on the save symbol 255.

  Although the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention have been described in detail above, the following configuration is also possible. That is, in the first embodiment, the mode may be changed by a player operation other than the selection operation from the menu screen. In addition, the mode may be changed by a player operation even during a symbol change other than in the customer waiting state. In this case, it is desirable to enable the mode change on the condition that the operation of the movable body is not reserved in the advance notice related to the symbol variation.

  In the notice shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the first effect image 168, the second effect image 169, etc. are not limited to characters, and any effect image can be used. Further, the first effect body image 168 may not be provided. A lightning effect image is used as a director image, and at least part of the lightning effect image is displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealment areas and the movable concealment area C, so that the ratio displayed in the non-hidden area D increases. By changing the image, it is possible to produce an effect that lightning runs on the screen.

  As in the notice shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the effect image such as the mini character image is displayed from the first state in which at least a part thereof is displayed in any one of the first to fifth fixed concealment areas and the movable concealment area C. When the ratio displayed in the non-hidden area D is changed to the second state that is larger than the first state, the display mode (color, size, It may be configured to suggest the jackpot reliability etc. according to the shape etc. In this case, if the ratio in which the portion indicating the reliability is displayed in the non-hidden region D is also larger in the second state than in the first state, the player will be able to make a big hit reliability, etc. Can be easily recognized, and the interest of the notice effect can be enhanced.

  In the prefetch hold change effect, when the display mode of the hold display images X1 to Y1 is changed based on the prefetch determination result, the hold display image before the change is displayed in the non-hidden area D, and the hold after the change is displayed. The display image may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and its outer area, such as displaying an enlarged part or an added effect part so as to protrude from the non-hidden area D. .

  If the first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5 and the movable concealment region C are widened, the non-concealment region D is narrowed, but the non-concealment region D is the other first to fifth fixed concealment regions B1 to B5, It is desirable to make it wider than the movable concealment region C. In addition, an arbitrary still image or moving image can be used as the background image 160.

  In the first embodiment, the movable area 75a to 78a being stopped is set as the movable concealment area C, but the movable body may naturally operate during the notice effect or the mode change. Therefore, in the entire screen area A, an area corresponding to the rear side of all the movable areas of the movable body (all areas in which the movable body may operate) may be set as the movable concealment area C. In this case, the non-hidden area D is narrower than in the case of the movable concealment area C for the movable body that is stopped, but the image displayed in the non-hidden area D is in what state the movable body is. However, it is always visible in front view, and higher visibility can be secured for images with high importance. Further, even when the movable concealment region C for the stationary movable body is employed, the error notification image 163 regarding the abnormality of the movable body (movable body error) can be obtained after all the movable regions of the movable body. It is desirable to display while avoiding the side.

  As in the first embodiment, when the movable concealment region C for the stationary movable body is employed, images of high importance (volume setting image 117a, light amount setting image 117b, error notification image 163, etc.) are displayed. If the movable body effect is executed during the display, the movable body may move in front of those images, and the visibility may be temporarily hindered. Therefore, when the movable body temporarily stops at a production position other than the origin position during the movable body production, a high importance image should be displayed avoiding the area behind the movable body at the production position. Is desirable. Thereby, even if there is a possibility that the visibility is temporarily hindered by the passage of the movable body, it is possible to prevent the invisible state from extending for a long time.

  However, at the time of execution of a movable body effect in which a plurality of movable bodies operate simultaneously (for example, a movable body effect during symbol variation due to a jackpot variation pattern, a movable body effect that is executed when developing from SP reach to SPSP reach, etc.) It is inevitable that the visibility of highly important images will be hindered for a long time.

  This is because, when high visibility is required even in such a case, there is a high possibility that the movable body is deprived of freedom and as a result, the production effect is reduced. Further, since such a movable body effect is often executed in a scene that is advantageous to the player, it is considered that a reduction in visibility is tolerated to some extent even in an image having a high degree of importance.

  In the embodiment, as an example of the launch notification related to the launch operation, the launch guidance notification that the player should launch aiming at one of the left and right sides of the game area is illustrated, but the game ball is launched on the opposite side to the direction to be aimed at The launch warning notification may be configured to be executable. It is desirable to display the firing notification image (launch guidance image, launch warning image) relating to the firing notification such as the firing guidance notification and the firing warning notification so as not to overlap with the sound volume and light amount setting images 117a and 117b. In this case, the fire notification image such as the fire guidance image may be displayed in a large size so that a part thereof protrudes from the concealed areas B1 to B3, B5, and C, but an important message part such as “To the right!” Is preferably displayed in the non-hidden region D.

  The step-up notice effect may change the display area gradually from the first stage to the final stage, or may not change the display area over a plurality of successive stages. The display area may not be changed until a predetermined stage (for example, the fourth stage), and the display area may be changed (enlarged) in the next stage (for example, the fifth stage).

  In addition, as a method of executing the step-up notice effect, the step-up notice effect may be divided into a hit part where the step-up notice effect is not confirmed and an execution part where the step-up notice effect stage is confirmed. In the hit part, the step-up notice effect is stepped up step by step, and the step-up notice effect is executed in a predetermined step predetermined in the execution part. In this case, the raised step-up notice effect is not necessarily executed in the subsequent execution part in the beat portion, and even if it is established from the first stage to the fourth stage, the step-up notice effect is subsequently executed. In some cases, the step-up notice effect is not executed.

  This is a so-called Gase effect (gase step-up notice effect). By doing so, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the step-up notice effect and to give a sense of expectation that a higher-level step-up notice effect that is rarely seen may be executed. In the case of such a step-up notice effect, the display area is not changed when the turn-up stage is established, and the step-up notice effect is displayed when the step-up notice effect is executed in the execution part. The area may be changed.

  Also in such a case, in addition to gradually changing (enlarging) the display area from the first stage to the final stage, the display area is not changed until the predetermined stage (for example, the fourth stage), and the next stage ( For example, the display area may not be changed over a plurality of successive stages, for example, the display area is changed (enlarged) in the fifth stage).

  In the second embodiment, it is desirable to display the entire image that is not deformed in the non-hidden area, but it may be displayed so that a part of the image protrudes outside the non-hidden area. In the second embodiment, the non-hidden area or the like is not mentioned, but the area displayed in gray in FIG. 43 is the window frame portion 74, the base plate 45, the central display frame unit 47, and the big winning unit in front view. 49, a non-hidden region that is not obstructed by any of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231.

  The deformation effect such as the tilt notice effect may be executed as a “prefetch notice effect” performed based on the prefetch determination result by the prefetch determination unit 138a, or the jackpot determination result at the start of symbol variation by the special symbol processing unit 140 You may perform as "normal notice effect" performed based on. Further, it may be executed in the promotion effect (round promotion or probability change promotion) in the case of jackpot, or may be executed during reach fluctuation.

  In the second embodiment, the fire guidance image is configured not to be deformed (not tilted) even if the specific effect accompanied by the deformation process is executed, but the specific effect is not executed (not selected) while the fire guide image is displayed. You may comprise as follows. In other words, the firing guidance notification changes the firing direction that is advantageous to the player, such as when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state (short time state, probability variation state), or from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. In this case, it is performed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a predetermined time (3 seconds or the like) elapses, until a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are completed, until a second special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times, etc.). In the meantime, it may be configured not to execute (not select) a specific effect accompanying a deformation process such as a tilt notice effect. The launch warning image in the launch warning notification can be handled in the same manner as the launch guidance image.

  It may be notified by a countdown or the like that a deformation effect such as a tilt notice effect is executed. In this case, the countdown notification effect may be performed as part of the tilt notice effect or the countdown notification effect may be performed separately from the tilt notice effect or the like before the tilt notice effect.

  Regarding the menu displayable notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, the light amount adjustable notification image 116b, etc., either when the deformation effect is performed during the display thereof or when they are displayed after the execution of the deformation effect. Also, the tilt deformation may not be performed.

  During the customer waiting state, it is desirable not to perform the deformation effect when the player performs a volume adjustment operation, a light amount adjustment operation, or the like. However, even when the deformation effect is performed, the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image are not displayed. About 117b, it is desirable not to carry out inclination deformation.

  Menu display may be possible during symbol changes other than in the customer waiting state. In this case, a sub window may be displayed on a part of the display screen 60a to display the menu image 118b or the like. When the menu image 118b or the like is displayed while the symbol is changing, it is preferable that the menu image 118b is not tilt-deformed together with the sub-window even when a deformation effect such as a tilt notice effect is executed.

  An effect using an RTC (real time clock) may be executable. This RTC is a timekeeping chip, and counts the date and time by supplying power from the built-in battery even when the power is off. The RTC effect may be executed when a predetermined time based on RTC elapses (for example, when a predetermined date and time has elapsed since power-on). Since this RTC effect is executed as an effect commonly set for the same gaming machine, when a plurality of the same gaming machines are installed side by side in the gaming hall, a timing such as after a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on A common RTC effect is executed at once.

  In addition, since such an RTC effect is executed regardless of the progress of the game, the execution timing may be reached during the execution of another effect such as a reach effect. In this case, the reach effect is given priority. The RTC effect may be executed in a subwindow displayed on a part of the display screen 60a. Further, at this time, when a deformation effect such as a tilt notice effect is executed, it is preferable not to perform the inclination deformation for the RTC effect executed in the sub-window. In addition, when the deformation effect is performed on the RTC effect side of the sub-window, it is desirable that the RTC effect is subjected to the inclination deformation, while the reach effect side is not subjected to the inclination deformation.

  Whether the predetermined image is inclined or deformed may be varied depending on the contents of the notice. The reserved pedestal image 161 may be tilted in the first notice effect and not tilted in the second notice effect. The same applies to the background image 160, the effect symbol 114, the hold display images X1 to Y1 and the changing hold image Z. However, it is desirable to set an image that does not depend on the content of the effect, such as the error notification image 163, the volume setting image 117a, and the light amount setting image 117b, without deformation regardless of the content of the notice.

  In the case of performing a deformation effect on the effect symbol 114 composed of the symbol image 114a and the decoration image 114b such as a character, it may be configured such that only the decoration image 114b is inclined and deformed. Since the number portion is a portion that directly indicates the lottery result depending on the display content, it is desirable that the display portion be removed from the target of the inclination deformation and easily recognized by the player.

  In the embodiment, an example of performing an inclined deformation as an example of the predetermined deformation process for the image is shown, but in addition to a rotation process that rotates a predetermined angle around a predetermined center, an enlargement process, a reduction process, a parallel movement process, or a combination thereof, Arbitrary image processing can be adopted. With regard to the enlargement / reduction process, the enlargement / reduction ratio may be uniform, or the enlargement / reduction ratio may be different in a plurality of directions.

  In the second embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform the predetermined deformation process based on the deformation information given in advance for each image. However, in the first embodiment, a plurality of layers are targets of the predetermined deformation process. It is possible to classify in advance into a layer and an untargeted second layer, and to perform a predetermined deformation process on the first layer image and not to perform a predetermined deformation process on the second layer image. Good.

  In the second embodiment, the image displayed on the sub-image display unit 233 is not an image process called tilt deformation, but the image display unit 60 or the like by tilting the sub-image display unit 233 via the sub-screen movable body 231. However, the image displayed on the sub-image display unit 233 may be subjected to a predetermined deformation process such as a tilt deformation.

  In this case, if the predetermined deformation process is a rotation process such as a tilt deformation, the rotation process for the image displayed on the sub-image display unit 233 may be in the same direction as the rotation of the sub-image display unit 233 or in the reverse direction. Also good. If the image displayed on the sub image display means 233 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation of the sub image display means 233 and at substantially the same angle, the image displayed on the sub image display means 233 is displayed to the player. Will be upright. Note that the predetermined deformation process may be performed on the image displayed on the sub image display unit 233 without operating the sub image display unit 233.

  In the second embodiment, the predetermined deformation process for the image displayed on the image display unit 60 or the like is performed in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable bodies 203a to 203c, 231; however, it is irrelevant to the deformation operation of the movable body. In addition, a predetermined deformation process may be performed on the image (for example, without deforming the movable body).

  The sub-design symbol 252 shown in the embodiment assumes a so-called fourth symbol that is resident on the liquid crystal and performs blinking display in response to fluctuations in the first and second special symbols. Even in the case where a symbol is provided separately from the image display means 60 by an LED or the like, a so-called mini-design may be displayed on the image display means 60 as the sub-effect design 252. This mini symbol is a small representation of the changing effect symbol 114 using numbers and symbols so that it is always displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special symbols are changing. It has become. It is desirable not to perform deformation processing such as inclined deformation on the mini-pattern. In addition, it is desirable to display the mini symbol in the non-hiding area D.

  For convenience of explanation, the configuration of the movable effect means is different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, the relationship between the image display area and the display image is different in the second embodiment. Although the display image deformation process has been mainly described, the two embodiments may be combined in any manner. The second embodiment may be applied to the first embodiment to enable execution of a deformation effect such as a tilt notice effect, or the second embodiment may include an image display area and a display image in the first embodiment. Relationships may apply.

  When an illumination panel is mounted on the front side of the game board 16, a light emission effect by the illumination panel may be executed when a deformation effect such as a tilt notice effect is executed. In this case, since the visibility of the liquid crystal display object may be hindered by the design portion of the illumination panel, at least one of the images that are not subjected to the predetermined deformation process, such as the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b. It is desirable to display the part at a position that does not overlap the design part of the illumination panel.

  Regarding the notice effect for executing the predetermined deformation process, depending on the reliability indicating the lottery result of the variable display, the type of image to be subjected to the deformation process, the time (period) and the number of times to execute the deformation process, the degree of deformation of the deformation process Etc. may be made different. For example, when the lottery result of the variation display is out of place, a notice effect that executes a predetermined deformation process with low reliability is easily executed, and the number of types of images subjected to the deformation process is smaller than in the case where the lottery result is a win. The notice effect with the deformation process is executed with a short time (period) for executing the deformation process, a small number of times, and a small degree of the deformation process. Thus, according to the lottery result of the variable display, you may comprise so that the notice effect with a different deformation | transformation process may be performed.

  Although the deformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b, the deformation process may be performed. However, in this case, it is desirable that the volume / light quantity can be adjusted based on the operation by the player even during the deformation process. Further, it is desirable that the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b be updated and displayed so as to reflect the adjustment contents by the player even during the deformation process.

  In a notice effect indicating a lottery result of variable display or a message display for notifying a player of predetermined information, a display indicating that volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is possible by a predetermined operation may be performed. Of course, it is desirable to enable the functions of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment even during such a notice effect or message display. When a predetermined operation is performed by the player, it is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and the light amount setting image 117b at a position that does not overlap the notice effect or the message display.

  Regarding the notice effect for executing the predetermined deformation process, the predetermined image that has been subjected to the predetermined deformation process may be changed to a new predetermined image and displayed. Specifically, when the background image 160 is deformed by a predetermined deformation process, the background image 160 is displayed so as to fade out from the liquid crystal by being reduced and displayed simultaneously with the deformation. At the same time, the new background image 160 is displayed in an enlarged manner while being deformed so as to fade in on the liquid crystal. As described above, the background change effect for changing the background image 160 by executing the predetermined deformation process may be executed. Even in this case, it is desirable to display a display object that does not execute the above-described deformation process without executing the deformation process.

  When executing a background modification effect in which the background image 160 is changed by executing the predetermined deformation process, not only the background image 160 but also other predetermined images may be similarly changed. For example, when the display mode of the hold differs for each background, the background image 160 may be changed and the hold image may be changed. Further, even when there is no need to change the display, the background image 160 may be faded out once, and the new background image 160 may be faded in again.

  The display object before execution of the predetermined deformation process and the display object after execution of the predetermined deformation process may be changed by executing the predetermined deformation process, not limited to the background change effect. In this way, by changing / updating the display object by utilizing the predetermined deformation process, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production rather than simply fading out / fade in the display object and performing the change / update.

  When executing the predetermined transformation process and executing the change effect, for example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed. Specifically, when the hold display mode before executing the predetermined deformation process is blue, the hold display mode after executing the predetermined deformation process may be displayed in red. Thus, in the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold, the interest of the hold change effect can be enhanced by utilizing the predetermined deformation process.

  When executing a predetermined effect by executing the predetermined deformation process, for example, the SU stage (eg, SU1 → SU2) of the step-up effect may be changed. Specifically, when the stage before executing the predetermined deformation process is the step-up image SU1, the stage after executing the predetermined deformation process may be displayed as the step-up image SU2. Thus, in the step-up notice of updating the SU stage, it is possible to enhance the interest of the step-up effect by utilizing the predetermined deformation process.

  In the case of executing the change effect by executing the predetermined deformation process, for example, the button image of the button effect, the gauge image, or the operation guide image 166 may be changed. Specifically, when the button image before executing the predetermined deformation process is the first button image, the button image after executing the predetermined deformation process may be displayed as the second button image. Thus, in the button effect using the operation means, the interest of the button effect can be enhanced by utilizing the predetermined deformation process.

  Further, the button transformation operation may be valid during the predetermined deformation process. When an operation by the player is performed during the predetermined deformation process, the predetermined deformation process may be interrupted and the on-operation effect may be executed. Further, the operation-time effect may be executed after the predetermined deformation process is completed.

  Further, the button effect operation may be invalidated during the predetermined deformation process. The operation valid period may be started after the predetermined deformation process is executed.

  The button effect includes a fade-in period in which an image imitating a button or a button image is displayed in a fade-in state, a button image, a gauge image, and an operation guidance image 166, an operation period in which an operation effective period starts, and after the operation period ends. It is desirable that an image imitating a button or a fade-out period in which a button image is displayed in a fade-out manner, and an operation-time effect period to be executed thereafter. And when performing predetermined deformation | transformation processing in a button effect, you may comprise so that predetermined deformation | transformation processing may be performed in all the periods of each period, at least one period, or several periods.

  You may comprise so that the predetermined | prescribed effect with a predetermined deformation | transformation process may be performed during execution of the vibration effect by the vibration means provided in the operation means etc. (it may be provided in addition to the operation means). As described above, when the predetermined deformation process is executed in various effects, the vibration effect may be executed during the predetermined deformation process. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined deformation process is being performed via the vibration effect.

  The effect accompanied by the predetermined deformation process may be configured such that the reach variation period after the reach state is more easily executed than the normal variation period before the symbol is reached. The effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed during the normal fluctuation period and the effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed during the reach change period may be different effects or a common effect. Further, it may be configured such that an effect of executing the predetermined deformation process is not performed at all during the normal variation period, and an effect of executing the predetermined deformation process may be performed during the reach variation period. In any case, the reach change period may be more easily executed by changing the appearance rate of the effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed in the normal change period and the reach change period.

  In the reach variation period, when a plurality of reach effects can be executed, a reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed depending on the type of reach and a reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is not executed may be provided. Further, the reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is executed and the reach effect in which the predetermined deformation process is not executed may be different reach effects or a common reach effect. Further, in the case where the reach effect being executed develops and the post-development reach effect is executed, the reach effect before development and the reach effect after development may be used. Moreover, the reach production with low reliability and the reach production with high reliability may be used. In any case, the execution probability of the predetermined deformation effect may be varied by changing the possibility that the predetermined deformation process is executed depending on the type of reach effect.

  As described above, the predetermined deformation process may be executed in various effects, but more preferably, the predetermined lamp effect may be executed during the execution of the predetermined deformation process. In this case, a lamp effect corresponding to the image display subjected to the predetermined deformation process is executed. Specifically, when the image deformed by the predetermined deformation process rotates counterclockwise, it is desirable to execute a lamp effect such that the light emitting means arranged on the board surface or the frame are sequentially turned on / off counterclockwise. Further, it may be configured to execute a lamp effect such as a clockwise rotation in the case of a clockwise rotation and a blinking display of each light emitting means when accompanied by enlargement / reduction.

  As described above, when the predetermined deformation process is executed in various effects, the reliability of the lottery result of the variable display is different between the case where the predetermined notice process is not accompanied and the case where the predetermined effect is accompanied. You may comprise so that it may differ. In other words, when the notice effect is executed, the case where the predetermined deformation process is not executed may be configured to be the notice effect indicating that the reliability is high.

  61 to 89 illustrate a third embodiment. 61 and 62, the gaming machine main body 300 includes an outer frame (first support frame) 301 and a front frame (second support frame) 302 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 301. The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 arranged on the left end side, and is openably and detachably pivoted, and on the right end side opposite to the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction. The provided locking means 304 can lock the outer frame 301 in a closed state.

  The front frame 302 includes a main body frame 305 and a glass door 306 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 305. The glass door 306 is pivotally attached to the main body frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 disposed on the left end side so as to be openable and detachable. It can be locked. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are disposed so as to have the same axis.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A synthetic resin front cover member 310 that covers the horizontal frame member 309 from the front side is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to connect the front lower portions of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front cover member 310 protrudes forward of the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main body frame 305 is disposed on the upper side thereof.

  The main body frame 305 is made of a synthetic resin and is configured in a rectangular shape that can contact the front edge side of the outer frame 301 on the upper side of the front cover member 310, and a gaming board mounted in a rectangular opening shape on the upper side. A part 311 and a lower mounting part 312 provided under the game board mounting part 311 are integrally provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the game board mounting portion 311 is detachable from the front side of the game board 313. The game board mounting portion 311 includes a contact portion 314 with which the game board 313 contacts from the front side. An engaging portion 315 that engages with the game board 313 when the left and right ends of the game board 313 are inserted into the game board mounting section 311, and the other end of the game board 313 in the game board mounting section 311 are connected to the main body frame. Fixing means 316 for detachably fixing to 305 is provided. The game board mounting unit 311 may make the game board 313 detachable from the back side.

  When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting part 311, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting part 311 from the front side of the game board mounting part 311. It is inserted between the part 314 and the engaging part 315. Next, when the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 is moved backward with the engaging portion 315 side or an intermediate side between the contact portion 314 and the engaging portion 315 as the rotation center O. 65 and 313A in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 is played against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting portion 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. It can be pushed into the board mounting portion 311.

  When the game board 313 enters the game board mounting part 311, the other end of the game board 313 is fastened and fixed to the game board mounting part 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. Thereby, the game board 313 can be easily mounted. In addition, when removing the game board 313, a finger | toe is put on the suitable site | part of the game board 313, and what is necessary is just to rotate to the anti-313A arrow direction around the rotation center O in reverse order.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the main body frame 305 is integrally or separately provided with a surrounding wall 317 that protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the game board mounting portion 311. The surrounding wall 317 protects the backside mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting part 311 from the outer peripheral side, and protects the upper wall part 318 protruding rearward from the upper side of the game board mounting part 311; A pair of left and right side wall portions 319 projecting rearward from the left and right sides of the game board mounting portion 311 and a bottom wall portion 320 projecting rearward from the lower side of the game board mounting portion 311 are provided.

  The upper wall portion 318 and the bottom wall portion 320 are arranged in the left and right sides on the upper and lower sides of the game board mounting portion 311, and the side wall portions 319 are arranged in the upper and lower sides on the left and right sides on the rear side of the game board mounting portion 311. The bottom wall 320 is provided with a discharge port 321 for discharging the game ball that has passed to the back side of the game board 313 downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the glass door 306 includes a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 305. In the door base 322, a window hole 324 is formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 323 formed in the game board 313, and a plurality of speakers 325 are provided around the window hole 324 at predetermined locations such as up, down, left, and right. A decorative cover 326 that is disposed and substantially covers each speaker 325 from the front side is mounted.

  Further, on the lower front side of the door base 322, as shown in FIG. 61, an upper plate (launched ball storage plate) 328 that stores game balls and supplies them to the launching means 327, and the game balls of the upper plate 328 are full. At this time, a lower plate (excess ball receiving tray) 329 for storing surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 328 side, a firing handle 330 operated to operate the firing means 327, and the like are further arranged. A lower decorative cover 331 that substantially covers the lower plate 329 and the like from the front side is attached.

  The lower decorative cover 331 is formed in a forward bulging shape, and operation means such as an effect button 332 and a cross operation means 333 that can be pressed by the player are provided on the upper side. The cross operation means 333 includes four operation units 334 including a rear upper key, a front lower key, a left left key, and a right right key.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 322 so as to substantially close the window hole 324 from the rear side, and the first and second hinges 303 and 307 are provided. Reinforcing sheet metal 335 disposed in the vertical direction along the edge, reinforcing sheet metal 336 disposed in the vertical direction along the edge on the opening / closing end side, and reinforcement disposed in the left / right direction below the window hole 324 The sheet metal 337 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like.

  On the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337, ball feeding means 338, ball guiding means 339 and the like are mounted. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 328 one by one to the launching means 327 and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 guides the surplus ball overflowing from the upper plate 328 when the game ball of the upper plate 328 becomes full and the foul ball returned without reaching the game area 323 to the lower plate 329. It is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 69, the game board 313 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 311, and the effect control board 345, the power supply module board 346, and the like are provided on the back side of the game board 313. A main control board 354 is arranged. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information takeout means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350 and a ball guide means 351 on one side in the left-right direction. The relay board 352 is arranged in the vertical direction, and the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction on the other side in the left-right direction. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball lending board 356 are arranged on the left and right sides below the main control board 354.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, and the external information take-out means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. The ball tank 347 is used to store a game ball for a winning ball or a rental ball, and is configured in a rectangular shape in plan view that is long in the left-right direction, and abuts on a step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. And is detachably fixed. The ball tank 347 is open on the upper side so as to receive game balls replenished from the island-side replenishing means 357.

  The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding the game ball from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is inclined in the left-right direction from the lower side of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350. It is arrange | positioned and is attached to the back side of the main body frame 305 so that attachment or detachment is possible. A ball breaker mechanism 358 is provided in the middle of the ball guide rail 348 as necessary. The external information extracting means 349 is for extracting various types of game information to the outside. The external information extracting means 349 includes a plurality of extraction terminals 359 arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the upper side of the ball guide rail 348.

  Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 side is bent from the rear end to the inner side in the left and right direction as shown in FIGS. The mounting base 360 is integrally provided, and thereafter, the ball payout means 350 and the ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction on the back side of the mounting base 360 and are detachably mounted.

  The ball payout means 350 is for paying out a game ball in the ball tank 347 based on a prize ball payout instruction from the payout board 355 and a ball rental instruction from the ball rental board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape that is flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag manner in the payout case 362, and a storage passage 363. And a driving motor (not shown) for driving the rotating body 364, and are detachably mounted on the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game balls paid out from the ball paying means 350 are guided to the upper plate 328 via the ball guiding means 351.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and an extraction passage 367. When the ball payout means 350 pays out the game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 through the payout passage 366, and from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350. When the game ball is extracted, the game ball can be extracted from the extraction passage 367 to the outside through an extraction port (not shown). A relay substrate 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guide means 351.

  Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 is positioned on the side wall portion 319 located on the opposite side of the rotation center O when the game board 313 is attached and detached, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 68. A side wall reinforcing member 368 made of sheet metal that reinforces from the outside is provided, and a frame side joint portion 369 is provided from the side wall portion 319 along the bottom wall portion 320 in an L shape in front view. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has a function of making contact with other members when the front frame 302 is opened and closed to protect the side wall portion 319 and the backside mechanism of the game board 313 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame side joint part 369 is disposed corresponding to the front and rear board side joint parts 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and when the game board 313 is attached to and detached from the game board mounting part 311. The panel side joint portion 370 is electrically detachably connected.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a launching means 327, a lower speaker 325a, and the like are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting portion 312. Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, a first substrate mounting base 371 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting portion 312 from the back side. On the back side of the mounting base 371, a payout board 355 accommodated in the payout board case 372 and a ball rental board 356 accommodated in the ball rental board case 373 are arranged on the left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a sheet metal support plate 374, a launch rail 375 attached to the front surface of the support plate 374, and a launch game ball attached to the front surface of the support plate 374. A ball holding portion 376 held on the firing rail 375, an impact rod 378 supported on the front surface of the support plate 374 so as to be swingable around a driving shaft 377 in the front-rear direction, and an impact rod mounted on the back side of the support plate 374 And a firing drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid for driving the 378 in the striking direction via the drive shaft 377. When the firing handle 330 is rotated, the firing drive means 379 causes the striking rod 378 according to the amount of operation. Is driven in the striking direction (clockwise), and the game ball on the launch rail 375 is fired to the game board 313 side.

  The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with the payout command. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the payout board case 372 for accommodating the payout board 355 is attached to and detached from the first board mounting base 371 by the engaging means 380 on the left and right end sides and the fastener 381 on the other end side. It is fixed as possible. The fastener 381 has a knob portion 382 that can be rotated around the front and rear axes on the first board mounting base 371, and the picking-up board case 372 is fastened to the first board mounting base 371 side by the knob portion 382. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball paying means 350 in accordance with a ball lending command from a ball lending button or the like. A ball rental board case 373 that accommodates the ball rental board 356 is pivotally mounted around a vertical axis by a pivot support means 383 on one end of the left and right sides, and a first board mounting base 371 by a lock means 384 on the other end side. It is detachably fixed to. The locking means 384 has a lock button 385 that can be operated in the front-rear direction. When the lock button 385 is pressed forward, the ball rental board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and the lock button 385 is moved to the rear side. The lock is released when it is pulled.

  The game board 313 is configured in a substantially rectangular shape by a non-translucent material such as a plywood board or a transparent material such as a synthetic resin. On the front side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70, a game area 323, a guide rail 387 for guiding the game ball fired from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323, and a substantially central position are arranged. A central display frame (center case) 388 that is detachably mounted on the game board 313 from the front side is provided. A front decoration member 389 is provided on the front surface of the game board 313 on the outer peripheral side of the game area 323.

  Also, on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 and FIGS. 71 to 75, a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base arranged so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391. 392 is attached. The attachment frame 391 includes a liquid crystal type image display means 393 disposed on the back side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, and first to first disposed between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393. The fourth movable effect means 394 to 397, the LED connection board 353 to which the LED for the light emission effect on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, and the harness pedestal 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back side are mounted. Yes.

  Further, an effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 as shown in FIG. On the back side of the second board mounting base 392, as shown in FIG. 72, the main control board case 513 for housing the main control board 354 and the frame side joint portion 369 are electrically attached / detached when the game board 313 is attached / detached. A board-side joint portion 370 is provided.

  The attachment frame 391 has a rectangular cylinder shape that is short in the front-rear direction, and is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are incorporated in the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, and are attached to the game board 313 by attaching and detaching the mounting frame 391 to the game board 313. On the other hand, it is detachable from the back side integrally with the mounting frame 391.

  In the game area 323, as shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is disposed at the approximate center thereof, and a left flow path 401 and a right flow path 402 are formed on the left and right sides of the central display frame 388. The start winning means 403 is arranged at the approximate center below the central display frame 388, and the big winning means 404 and the normal winning means 405 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the starting winning means 403. Various display means including a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the central display frame 388. ing.

  The guide rail 387 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer periphery side of the game area 323, and the game ball fired from the launching means 327 is guided to the upper side of the game area 323 through the guide path 411. It is designed to guide you. A large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 323, and a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is connected to the left flow path 401 and the right side by the central display frame 388 or the like. It is distributed to any one of the flow-down paths 402 and flows down while colliding with the game nail.

  In the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70 and the like, a plurality of mounting holes 413 to 415 for mounting a central display frame 388, start winning means 403, large winning means 404, normal winning means 405, etc., an out port 416, etc. Is formed in a penetrating manner in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388 and is provided at a substantially central portion in the game area 323. The mounting hole 414 is for mounting the start winning means 403, and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The out port 416 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area 323.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the central display frame 388 covers the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 on the inner side. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and an outer peripheral portion of the display window 418 is located in the mounting hole 413. Thus, it is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction. However, the entire display frame 388 may be divided into three or more as necessary, and It may be divided into a plurality of directions.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is arranged along the front surface of the game board 313 outside the mounting hole 413 and has a plate shape or the like through which the game ball can pass through the front side. Front mounting portion 421, and a decorative front frame portion provided in a front gate shape from the top side to the left and right sides on the front side of front mounting portion 421 and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of front mounting portion 421 422, a window frame portion 423 that is bent backward from the inner periphery of the front frame portion 422 and is disposed in the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and the rear of the window frame portion 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418 Left and right decorative members 424 arranged in the vertical direction, and detachably mounted on the front surface of the game board 313.

  The decorative member 424 has a plate shape or other shapes, and as shown in FIGS. 73, 76, and 77, the decorative member 424 is disposed so as to protrude from the inner periphery of the window frame portion 423 toward the display window 418. Among the left and right decorative members 424, one decorative member 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 or the like via the attachment portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is attached to the window frame portion 423 or the like via the attachment portion 424a. It is fixed.

  The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 constitute a front side member 426 that partitions the game area 323 on the outer peripheral side of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 is an image on the rear side of the front side member 426. A rear member 427 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the display means 393 is configured. Various display means such as a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419. ing.

  The second display frame 420 includes a stage 429 for dropping a game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 for guiding the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 side to the stage 429. Is provided.

  The second display frame 420 is disposed between the left and right lower end portions of the window frame portion 423 and the like of the first display frame 419, and has a plate shape or the like that contacts the front surface of the game board 313 on the lower side of the mounting hole 413. A front mounting member 432; a stage 429 disposed above the front mounting member 432; and an entry preventing member 431 disposed from the upper side to the rear side of the stage 429; It is detachably connected to both lower ends of the screw with screws or the like.

  The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 disposed on the inner periphery of the mounting hole 413 over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the front mounting member 432 has a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow path 401 side, and a guide passage 434 that guides game balls from the warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. And are formed. The guide passage 434 communicates with a guide passage 435 formed in the entry preventing member 431 on the rear side, and a game ball that has entered the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow path 401 is passed from the guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435. It is guided and guided to one end side of the stage 429.

  The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 is provided with an open portion 437 on the front side of the warp port 430, and on the lower side of the warp port 430, a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 protruding in a U shape toward the front side is integrally provided. ing. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 through the connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and the passage wall 440 provided in the U-shaped cross section in the intrusion prevention member 431.

  By providing the front mounting member 432 with the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 having such a structure, the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 can be integrally formed on the front mounting member 432 using a front and rear split mold. Yes, the number of parts of the second display frame 420 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the warp port member including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is detachably provided on the front mounting member 432 from the front side. it can.

  Note that the rear side of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is configured to be open, and the open side excluding the connection hole 439 to the guide passage 435 is the game board 313, the stage 429, the entry preventing member 431, and the like. You may make it close with this member. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the front mounting member 432 including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 can be integrally formed by a front and rear die.

  The stage 429 has a generally arcuate shape when viewed from the front, with both the left and right sides raised, and has a central drop part 450 arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction and left and right drop parts 451 arranged on the left and right sides of the central drop part 450. Then, after the game ball guided from the warp port 430 freely rolls in the left-right direction, the game ball falls to the front side of the game board 313 from either the central drop part 450 or the left-right drop part 451. The central dropping portion 450 is substantially directly above the start winning means 403, and when the game ball falls from the central dropping portion 450, there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the starting winning means 403.

  In addition to the guide passage 435, the entry prevention member 431 is bent from the upper end of the rear entry prevention plate 443 to the front side, and a rear entry prevention plate 443 provided substantially parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side. And an upper entry prevention plate 444 that covers the stage 429 from above, and a game ball that has flowed down the flow paths 401 and 402 or has rebounded on the stage 429 by the entry prevention plates 443 and 444. It is designed to prevent entry to the rear side. The intrusion prevention member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a display image displayed on the image display means 393 can be viewed from the front side through the intrusion prevention member 431.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, 81 to 83, and the like, the mounting frame 391 is formed substantially in parallel with the game board 313 and has a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed at a substantially center thereof. And a peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the wall portion 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and bent outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall portion 447 along the game board 313 by a fixing screw or the like. A fixed portion 448 fixed to the game board 313 is integrally provided. The upper, lower, left and right wall portions of the peripheral wall portion 447 are disposed close to the upper wall portion 318, the side wall portion 319, and the bottom wall portion 320 of the outer surrounding wall 317.

  As shown in FIG. 73, FIG. 75, and FIG. 81, on the back side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, display means on which image display means 393 is mounted so as to be detachable in the vertical direction along the game board 313 A mounting portion 453, a bulging portion 454 having a U-shaped cross section in a plan view and arranged in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453 and bulging rearward from the image display means 393, and the bulging portion 454 A harness receiving base 399 is provided on the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 and disposed on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., a plurality of openings 456 are formed on the left and right bulged portions 454 in the vertical direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 A handle portion 457 is provided. A plurality of the handle portions 457 are vertically provided in each bulging portion 454, and the game board 313 can be easily transported even when each component is mounted by placing a finger on one of the left and right handle portions 457. It can be done. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has a plurality of handle portions 457 in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides, the handle portion in the optimum position in terms of weight balance in consideration of the mounting status of each component on the game board 313 and the like. 457 can be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 81, and 82, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and the outer peripheral portion on the front side of the image display means 393. Receiving portion 460 for receiving the image from the front side, a bulging portion 454 provided on the left and right sides of the receiving portion 460 and guiding the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion / removal direction, and provided below the receiving portion 460 and The image display means 393 is provided with a protruding wall 461 that contacts the insertion end side, and the upper side is an insertion / removal portion 462 for the image display means 393.

  The protruding height of the protruding wall 461 to the rear is about half of the bulging portion 454, and is bent upward from the left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the lower side of the bulging portion 454. An upper end portion of the image display means 393 is detachably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and a plurality of lower end sides of the image display means 393 are fixed to the protruding wall 461 in the left-right direction. The fixing means 464 is detachably fixed.

  The insertion / removal portion 462 of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the upper end side of the attachment frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82, and the game board 313 is attached to the front frame 302. When mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, frame side members such as the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302 and the ball tank 347 are close to the upper side of the insertion / removal portion 462, and the upper wall It is covered from above by frame side members such as the portion 318 and the ball tank 347. Therefore, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion / removal unit 462 when the game board 313 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portion 454 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view with the front side open, and is disposed vertically on the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453, and the bulging portions 454 on both the left and right sides. The guide rails 465 that guide the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides are configured by the receiving portions 460 on both the left and right sides.

  The internal space of the bulging portion 454 functions as a housing portion that houses a part or all of the internal mechanism (game component) in the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulging portions 454, the bulging portion 454 on the side of the ball dispensing means 350 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear mounting base 360 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The part 454 is provided with a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes behind the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 has a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer side in the left-right direction is detachably fixed to the back side of the bulging part 454 and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the back side of the harness receiving base 399 by screws or the like. Yes.

  The side substrate mounting base 467 is fixed to the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of upper and lower fixing tools 473 on the left and right sides and to the harness receiving base 399 by a plurality of left and right fixing tools 474, respectively. The harness pedestal 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 475 such as a screw. Note that screws or the like are used for the fixtures 473 to 475.

  The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute a protruding member (fixing member) that protrudes to the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and includes a left and right side portion of the display means mounting portion 453 and It overlaps from the back side with respect to the lower part, and when inserting / removing the image display means 393, it constitutes back side guide means for pressing and guiding the image display means 393 from the back side. The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute restriction means (back side pressing means) for restricting movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side in addition to the back side guide means. The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 are close to each other through a slight gap between the image display means 393, but may be slidably contacted with the image display means 393. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. The LED connection board 353 is connected to an LED (not shown) for emitting light on the front side of the front frame 302. The side board mounting base 467 includes a peripheral wall part 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact part 470 that the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, and a board engagement that engages with the left and right edges of the LED connection board 353. It has a part 471 and a board engaging claw 472 that engages with the other left and right edges of the LED connection board 353, and the LED connection board 353 is detachably fixed thereto.

  A plurality of substrate contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the outer periphery of the LED connection substrate 353. A plurality of substrate engaging portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction inside the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the middle between the substrate contact portions 470. The board engagement claws 472 can be elastically deformed in the engagement / disengagement direction with respect to the LED connection board 353, and a plurality of board engagement claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the other left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

  When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first, one end side of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact part 470 and the board engagement part 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed to the side board mounting base 467 side with the board contact part 470 and the board engagement part 471 side as a fulcrum, the board engagement claw 472 is elastically deformed outward and the LED connection board 353 is pressed. Is contained in the peripheral wall portion 469, and the outer peripheral portion thereof abuts on each substrate abutting portion 470. When the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claw 472, the board engagement claw 472 is restored by an elastic force and engaged with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

  Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached to and detached from the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as a synthetic resin material. There are advantages you can do. In addition, a screw for fixing the LED connection substrate 353 is unnecessary, and the amount of the screw used can be reduced as much as possible.

  Note that the mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 to the side board mounting base 467 can be similarly adopted when attaching a member to be mounted to another mounting base.

  The image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482. FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 85, 86 As shown in FIG. 6, the insertion means 462 is inserted from the insertion / removal part 462 side so as to be vertically removable with respect to the display means mounting part 453, and the upper and lower ends of the housing case 482 are fixed by the fixing means 463, 464. The housing case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the front opening side. The image display panel 481 is held by a housing case 482 and a presser frame 483 arranged corresponding to the front outer periphery of the image display panel 481. The presser frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 484 of the housing case 482.

  A plurality of fixing means 463 and 464 are provided in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 includes an attachment portion 485 protruding upward from the housing case 482 and attachment holes provided in the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attachment portion 485. 486 and a fixture 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the attachment portion 485 into the attachment hole 486.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 is provided on a mounting portion 488 that protrudes downward from the housing case 482 and on the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 488. An attachment hole 489 and a fixture 490 such as a screw inserted from the attachment portion 488 to the attachment hole 489 are provided. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 that positions the left and right positions of the image display means 393 with the attachment portion 488.

  The positioning portion 491 is formed in a cutout shape in the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 is inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided in the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 constitute positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness receiving base 399 is provided with an operation portion 492 having an opening shape or a notch shape so as to face the fixing means 464, and a tool or the like for the fixing device 490 is inserted from the operation portion 492, and the fixing device 490 is attached. It is designed to perform operations such as turning.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the housing case 482 is formed integrally with the peripheral wall portion 484 and the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484, and is in contact with the back surface of the image display panel 481 and the lower rear wall portion 493. Wall 494. The housing case 482 has a large depth in the front-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and is provided with ribs and other reinforcing portions 493 a on the front side or both front and rear sides, and slightly behind the lower rear wall portion 494. It protrudes. An effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the rear side of the upper rear wall 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and a harness receiving base 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

  The effect control board 345 has a function of controlling various effect images displayed on the image display means 393, a function of controlling the effect image, and a function of controlling other various movable effect means 394 to 397. The production control board case 495 is housed. As shown in FIG. 85A, the effect control board case 495 is configured by connecting a front case 495a and a rear case 495b so as to be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. The rear case 495b is provided with an opening 498 corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the effect control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

  The effect control board case 495 is detachably attached to the back side of the housing case 482 with respect to the housing case 482 of the image display means 393 by a fixed engaging portion 499, a contact portion 500, a fastener 501, and an engaging claw 502. ing. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500 protrude rearward from the housing case 482 with an interval of the production control board case 495, and the production control board case 495 is detachable from the fixed engagement portion 499. In addition, the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction with the fixed engagement portion 499.

  The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by a pivot 505 and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the housing case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned on the contact portion 500 between the fastening position and the release position. The engaging claw 502 protrudes from the housing case 482 to the back side and is disposed on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is detachably engaged with the effect control board case 495.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the contact portion 500, the fastener 501 and the engaging claw 502 do not interfere with the side substrate mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. Has been placed. On the other hand, the fixed engagement portion 499 is on the side edge in the left-right direction of the housing case 482, and when the image display means 393 is to be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 with the right and left being incorrect, FIG. 89 (b) As shown in FIG. 5, the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 to prevent the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in this state. .

  Accordingly, the improper mounting prevention means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means mounting portion 453 is constituted by the fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467. Has been.

  The fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 constitutes an attachment for detachably attaching the effect control board case 495 to the housing case 482, and the attachment target of the attachment is the effect control board case. Other parts other than 495 may be used. Further, the first member may be a protrusion provided in a protruding shape for other purposes, and is not limited to a fixture.

  As shown in FIG. 85B, the power supply module board 346 is accommodated in the power supply module board case 506, and is engaged with the engaging means 503 and 504 on the back side of the upper rear wall 493 of the accommodation case 482 on the upper side of the effect control board 345. Etc. are detachably mounted via, for example.

  When the image display means 393 is attached to the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means attachment part 453 from the insertion / removal part 462 side. Install. In FIG. 89, for convenience of drawing, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are in a standing posture. However, when the image display means 393 is mounted when the game board 313 is assembled, for example, the front side is directed downward. The work is carried out with the game board 313 tilted horizontally.

  When the image display unit 393 is mounted, the image display unit 393 is inserted from the insertion / removal unit 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display unit mounting unit 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. Then, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 until the insertion end side of the housing case 482 contacts the protruding wall 461.

  When the attachment portion 485 on the insertion end side of the housing case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453 is provided by the positioning function of the attachment portion 485 and the positioning portion 491. Can be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 may be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 463 and 464 on both the upper and lower sides.

  In this way, if the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 is in an open state, the image display means 393 can be attached / detached from the insertion / removal portion 462 side substantially in parallel with the game board 313, so the periphery of the display means mounting portion 453 Although there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 so as to overlap the image display means 393, there is an advantage that the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without removing them. is there. Therefore, other parts can be arranged so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

  Further, when the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453, the left and right end sides of the image display means 393 enter the lower side of the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 is the harness. In order to enter the lower side of the cradle 399, the side substrate mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when the image display means 393 is inserted / removed with the game board 313 standing, there is no fear that the image display means 393 will drop backward, and the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed easily and safely. It can be carried out.

  When assembling and the like, if the left and right sides of the image display means 393 are in the wrong direction and an attempt is made to insert the display means mounting portion 453 in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. 89 (b), The image display means 393 cannot be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 because the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the side substrate mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the image display means 393 from being erroneously inserted or erroneously attached.

  The fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute an erroneous mounting prevention means 516, and the fixed engagement section 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used as the erroneous mounting prevention means 516. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the dedicated erroneous mounting preventing means 516 is provided.

  Even when the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side substrate mounting base 467 are used for preventing erroneous mounting, other members than the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side substrate mounting base 467 may be used. In addition, it is possible to provide dedicated means and members for preventing erroneous mounting without using other members as well.

  When mounting the effect control board 345, after engaging one end side of the effect control board case 495 with the fixed engagement portion 499, the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the housing case 482 to fix the effect control board case 495. It is sandwiched between the joint part 499 and the contact part 500. Further, when the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the housing case 482, the engaging claws 502 are engaged with the effect control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 stands up, the effect control board case 495 does not drop off. Finally, the fastener 501 is turned around the pivot 505 toward the effect control board case 495, and the effect control board case 495 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the housing case 482 by the fastener 501.

  On the rear side of the protruding wall 461, a harness pedestal 399 is provided on the rear side of the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the lower rear wall portion 494 of the housing case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the harness pedestal 399 is fixed to the protruding wall 461 by fixing tools 475 such as screws on the lower side and the left and right sides.

  As shown in FIG. 72, a plurality of hanging portions 507 for the harness 476 are provided on the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the harness 467 is formed using the hanging portions 507 at appropriate positions. Is supposed to stop. The hanging portion 507 stops the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399, and is arranged in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction substantially parallel to the harness pedestal 399, and is elastically deformable at one end in the longitudinal direction. The side is connected to the harness cradle 399. The hanging portion 507 has a claw shape and a hook shape.

  When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired in the left-right direction along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399 and in other predetermined directions, and the harness 476 is hooked on a part or all of the hanging portions 507 as necessary. . The hook portion 507 has a claw shape and a hook shape having appropriate elasticity, and the harness 476 is difficult to come off.

  In this way, the harness receiving base 399 is provided on the lower rear side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the harness 476 is disposed on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, whereby the image display means 393 is inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image display unit 393 and the harness 476 from being complicated. Further, by arranging the harness receiving base 399 close to the back surface of the image display means 393, the harness receiving base 399 can also be used as a guide for the image display means 393.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness receiving base 399. The second board mounting base 392 includes a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, a side wall portion 509 fixed to the game board 313 on the left and right sides of the lower portion of the mounting frame 391, and a ball discharge port 510. A bottom wall portion 511 formed and fixed to the game board 313 below the mounting frame 391.

  The second board mounting base 392 is provided with an opening 512 corresponding to the back side of the harness wired on the back side of the harness receiving base 399 by the wall portion 508, and the main part of the second board mounting base 392 is closed so as to close the opening 512 from the back side. A main control board case 513 that accommodates the control board 354 is detachably attached to the back side of the rear wall portion 508.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is configured by connecting a front case 513a and a rear case 513b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. The main control board case 513 is disposed horizontally in the vicinity of the lower side of the effect control board case 495, and is detachably attached to the second board mounting base 392 by the engaging means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 69, 71, and 72, the frame side joint portion 369 and the panel side joint portion 370 are configured in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the frame side joint portion 369 has the front frame 302. The board-side joint portion 370 is disposed on the lower side of the game board 313 farther from the hinges 303 and 307 and is opposed to the lower side of the game board 313 in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame side joint portion 369 is a joint support portion 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 319 and a joint that is bent inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcing member 368. A joint reinforcing portion 520 that reinforces the supporting portion 519 from the back side, a frame side mounting plate 521 disposed on the front side of the joint supporting portion 519, and first to third frame side connectors attached to the frame side mounting plate 521 in a forward direction. 525-527.

  The frame-side mounting plate 521 has a first frame-side mounting portion 522 arranged in the vertical direction and second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524 arranged in the left-right direction, and the first frame The first frame side connector 525 is mounted on the side mounting portion 522, and the second and third frame side connectors 526 and 527 are mounted on the second and third frame side mounting portions 523 and 524, respectively, facing forward. The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 are supported so as to be floatable via attachment tools 528 on both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 71 and 72, the board side joint portion 370 is disposed at the lower corner portion of the rear wall portion 508 of the second substrate mounting base 392 so as to face the frame side joint portion 369, and thereafter The first board-side mounting part 530 in the vertical direction and the second and third board-side mounting parts 531 and 532 in the left-right direction are formed on the wall part 508, and the first board is attached to the first panel-side mounting part 530. The side connector 533 is disposed on the second and third panel side mounting portions 531 and 532, and the second and third panel side connectors 534 and 535 are disposed rearward.

  The first to third frame side attachment portions 522 to 524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 are located on the front side near the rotation center O of the game board 313, and are attached to the first to third board side attachments. The parts 530 to 532 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are inclined obliquely with respect to the left and right line segments so that the side close to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located on the front side. Are arranged. The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are rotated when the game board 313 is rotated with the engaging portion 315 side as the rotation center O. The pin insertion / removal portions are sequentially connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O from the side close to the movement center O.

  The 1st-3rd board side attaching parts 530-532 are arrange | positioned on the line segment which passes through substantially the rotation center O, and the 1st-3rd board is added to the 1st-3rd board side attaching parts 530-532. First to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 are mounted via the side relay boards 536 to 538. Therefore, the pin insertion / removal portions of the first to third panel-side connectors 533 to 535 are substantially parallel to the first to third panel-side attachment portions 530 to 532, and the front side of the first to third panel-side attachment portions 530 to 532. It is arranged close to. The first to third board side relay boards 536 to 538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539 to 541 for connecting the harnesses 476 to the boards on the game board 313 side.

  The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint portion 369 are configured to correspond to the first to third panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint portion 370. The second and third frame side connectors 526 and 527 and the second and third panel side connectors 534 and 535 are on the side closer to the second frame side connector 526 and the second panel side connector 534 far from the rotation center O. The third frame side connector 527 and the third board side connector 535 are disposed on the upper side. The first to third frame-side connectors 525 to 527 and the first to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portions are inserted / removed substantially simultaneously, or are far from the rotation center O. You may arrange | position so that a pin insertion / extraction part may insert / remove sequentially from the side.

  If the frame side joint part 369 and the board side joint part 370 having such a configuration are provided, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O when the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting part 311. As a result, the frame side connectors 533 to 535 of the frame side joint portion 369 and the panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint portion 370 are connected in a tangential direction. It is possible to connect to ˜527 without difficulty.

  That is, one end side of the game board 313 is inserted between the contact part of the game board mounting part 311, 314, and the engaging part 315, and the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed in the direction of the arrow from the front side. By rotating the panel 313 around the rotation center O, the frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint part 369 and the panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint part 370 are connected in a tangential direction. The board side connectors 533 to 535 can be connected to the frame side connectors 525 to 527 without difficulty.

  When the game board 313 is attached to the game board attachment part 311, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board attachment part 311 from the front side of the game board attachment part 311. It inserts between the part 314 and the engaging part 315, and presses the other end side of the game board 313 into the main body frame 305 next. Then, the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65 around the rotation center O, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting portion 311.

  When the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A, the board side connectors 533 to 535 of the board side joint part 370 and the frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint part 369 are shown in FIG. After approaching as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the corresponding board side connectors 533 to 535 and frame side connectors 525 to 527 are sequentially connected in the tangential direction from the side close to the rotation center O. Therefore, the board side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame side connectors 525 to 527 can be connected without difficulty.

  Further, by arranging the plurality of frame side joint parts 369 and the board side joint part 370 in an L shape, for example, on the board side joint part 370 side, the two sides of the corner portion of the second board mounting base 392 are formed. It is possible to arrange the board-side joint portion 370 by making effective use. Therefore, even though there are a plurality of the frame-side connectors 525 to 527 and the board-side connectors 533 to 535, the frame-side joint part 369 and the board-side joint part 370 are efficiently used by effectively utilizing the space having two sides. Can be arranged.

  In the attachment frame 391, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393, and the front side of the image display means 393. 3rd and 4th movable production | presentation means 396,397 are arrange | positioned at the right and left.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first movable effect means 394 includes a first movable effect body 546 and first drive means 547 that drives the first movable effect body 546 in the vertical direction. The first driving unit 547 can be moved in the vertical direction between the upper position on the upper front side and the lower position on the lower front side of the image display unit 393 while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the first movable effect body 546.

  The first movable effect body 546 includes a support body 548 disposed in a horizontally long shape on the front upper portion of the image display means 393, and a decorative body 549 mounted on the front surface side of the support body 548. Both end sides are supported by a pair of first drive means 547 disposed on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 via the first drive connector 550 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The first drive means 547 is supported by the attachment frame 391 via a vertically long support member 551. The first drive means 547 is disposed in the vertical direction along the outer edge of the image display means 393 and on both the upper and lower ends thereof, and is an elongated cylindrical lift guide body 552 that guides the first drive connection body 550 in the vertical direction. A drive pulley 553 disposed in the vicinity of the lower end of the elevating guide body 552, a driven pulley 554 disposed in the vicinity of the upper end side of the elevating guide body 552, and a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 553. And an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around the drive pulley 553 and the driven pulley 554 and has a first drive connector 550 fixed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof.

  An end of the first movable effect body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connecting body 550 by a pivot 557 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 558 into which the pivot 557 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 can be inclined obliquely within a range in which the pivot 557 slides in the long hole 558.

  The decorative body 549 has a three-dimensional decoration using an airplane as a motif, and has a body portion 559 and wing portions 560 extending from the body portion 559 to the left and right sides. The decorative body 549 is arranged such that the front end side of the body portion 559 protrudes into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The front end side of the wing part 560 is disposed in front of the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388.

  The wing portion 560 which is a part of the decorative body 549 constitutes a front side portion disposed on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and other portions except the body portion 559 and the like are on the rear side of the decorative member 424. It constitutes the rear side part to be arranged. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 so as to overlap both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the arrangement area of the first movable effect means 394.

  Further, the interval between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different between the upper and lower sides, and the decorative body 549 can pass in the front-rear direction with respect to the left and right decorative members 424 at the widened position. . For example, in this embodiment, since the space between the left and right decorative members 424 is large on the lower side, when the first movable effect means 394 is assembled to the mounting frame 391, the first side to the lower side of the decorative member 424 is the first. The movable effect body 546 is moved so that the wing 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

  Inside the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391, an LED substrate 542 is provided so as to illuminate the first movable effect body 546 of the first movable effect means 394 and, in particular, the decoration body 549. The LED board 542 includes a plurality of LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the moving range of the first movable effect body 546, and illuminates the decorative body 549 by causing the LED 543 to emit light during a predetermined movable effect.

  Note that the decorative body 549 may be a motif other than an airplane. When the decorative body 549 moves in the left-right direction, the decorative body 549 may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved to a position that is disengaged from the decorative member 424. Further, the decorative body 549 only needs to be movable between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position deviating from the front side of the decorative member 424. In addition, the decorative body 549 moves linearly in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the like, and also rotates or swings. You may make it do. Moreover, you may make it remove | deviate from the front side of the decoration member 424 by elastic deformation. Further, the first movable effect means 394 may be arranged at least partly on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 and other main part on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the second movable effect means 395 is supported by the second movable effect body 562 and the support member 563 fixed to the attachment frame 391, and the second movable effect body 562. Second driving means 564 that drives in the up-down direction, and the second movable effect body 562 is driven by the second driving means 564, while maintaining a substantially horizontal state, the lower position of the lower front side of the image display means 393 It is movable between the upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle part. Note that the second drive means 564 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the second movable effect body 562.

  The second driving means 564 is disposed on the rear side of the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 on the rear side of the first driving means 547, and is arranged vertically on the lower side along the side edge of the image display means 393. In addition, an elongate cylindrical elevating guide body 566 that guides the second drive coupling body 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 disposed in the vicinity of the upper end side of the elevating guide body 566, and the vicinity of the lower end side of the elevating guide body 566 The second drive coupling body is wound around the drive pulley 568, the drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 567, and the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof. And an endless timing belt 570 to which 565 is fixed.

  The drive source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and the rear end side thereof is disposed in the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the drive source 569 which is a part of the second drive means 564 is disposed in the bulging portion 454, but at least a part of the second movable effect means 395, for example, the second movable effect means 395 is provided. At least a part of the support mechanism and / or the second driving means 564 may be incorporated in the bulging portion 454.

  In this way, by incorporating the gaming parts, which are internal mechanisms arranged inside the attachment frame 391, into the bulging portion 454, the first movable effect means 394 and the second movable effect means 395 are provided on the front side of the image display means 393. Even when the game board 313 is arranged, it is not necessary to secure a large space between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be arranged close to the game board 313 side.

  An end of the second movable effect body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connecting body 565 by a pivot 571 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 572 through which the pivot 571 is slidable in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the second movable effect body 562 can also be inclined obliquely within a range in which the pivot 571 slides in the long hole 572.

  Although the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 are arranged up and down, the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562 are arranged shifted in the front-rear direction. ing. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 can arbitrarily move in the vertical direction without interfering with the other party.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, and are vertically long movable effects. Body 574 and driving means 575 for driving the movable effect body 574 in the left-right direction. By the driving means 575, an external position outside in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393 and an internal position inside in the left-right direction. It is possible to move between. The driving means 575 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the movable effect body 574.

  The movable effect body 574 is provided with an arbitrary decoration (not shown) on the front surface side, and is arranged vertically in front of the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The driving means 575 is provided with a support portion 576 fixed inside the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391, and is slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the support portion 576, and a movable effect body 574 is fixed on the front side. An electromagnetic sliding means including a sliding portion 577 is included. The movable effect body 574 can be moved by the driving means 575 between an external position outside in the left-right direction and an internal position inside in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393.

  Note that the movable effect bodies 574 of the third movable effect means 396 and the fourth movable effect means 397 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other when moved to the internal position. In addition, the movement path of each movable effect body 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396, 397 is between the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562, and moves. Sometimes the movable effect bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 do not interfere with each other.

  The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are used for the movable effect similar to that of the first embodiment, and all or part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are appropriately moved, The image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 can be limited or enlarged.

  For example, during normal times, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the display screen 578 is limited by the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 to play a game in a narrow image display area 579, which is advantageous for reach and other players. In the case of a specific gaming state or a precursor gaming state, the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are moved backward to the outside of the display screen 578 as shown in FIG. It is also possible to play a game in a wide image display area 579.

  As a method of restricting the image display area 579, one or both of the upper and lower first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are moved to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to move the image display area 579 up and down. The left and right widths of the image display area 579 by moving one or both of the left and right third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 There is a second method for limiting. There is also a method of limiting the vertical width and the horizontal width of the image display area 579 by combining the first method and the second method. The enlargement / reduction of the vertical width and / or the horizontal width of the display area using all or part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 may be intermittently repeated a plurality of times.

  90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the image display means 393 can be inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313 in the horizontal direction. The insertion / removal type is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the game board 313 includes a mounting frame 391 on the back side. On the back side of the mounting frame 391, a liquid crystal type image display means 393 corresponding to the center display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, and a light emitting effect LED (not shown) on the front side of the front frame 302 are provided. A connected LED connection board 353, a harness receiving base 399 for receiving a harness arranged on the back side, and a relay board 352 for relaying each harness are mounted.

  On the back side of the image display means 393, an effect control board case 495 that accommodates the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 that accommodates the power module board 346 are mounted, and under the effect control board case 495. A harness cradle 399 is provided on the side.

  93 to 98 and the like, the attachment frame 391 is formed substantially in parallel with the game board 313 and has a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed at a substantially center thereof, and a rear wall portion 446. A peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the game board 313 to the back of the game board 313, and the front end portion of the peripheral wall section 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by a fixing tool 586 such as a screw or a nail. .

  As shown in FIG. 93, on the back side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, a display means mounting portion 453 capable of inserting and removing the image display means 393 along the game board 313 in the left-right direction, and the display means mounting On one end of the left and right sides of the portion 453, there is provided a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 and is arranged in the vertical direction and to which the LED connection board 353 is detachably attached.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482. The image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion / removal portion 462 that is open on the opposite side of the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting portion 453 in the left-right direction (horizontal). Direction) and is fixed at a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584 and 585 at both left and right ends.

  The housing case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIGS. 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the front open side, and is inserted into the peripheral wall portion 484 from both the left and right sides. The image display panel 481 is detachably held by a fixture 586 such as a screw that contacts the side surface of the display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494, and the upper rear wall portion 493 is reinforced in a predetermined direction such as a vertical direction or a horizontal direction in order to ensure the strength of the storage case 482. A rib 587 and a reinforcing protrusion 588 having a U-shaped cross section are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the front and rear surfaces of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494, such as the reinforcing ribs 587 and the reinforcing protrusions 588, and the rear surface of the image display panel 481 A slight gap s is provided in the direction. Therefore, when the image display means 393 is handled alone, it is reinforced even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the storage case 482 are pressed toward the image display panel 481. The upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the housing case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the gap s between the rib 587, the reinforcing protrusion 588 and the like and the image display panel 481. The image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged by the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the housing case 482.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a plurality of sets of fixing means 584 and 585 are provided in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. Then, as shown in FIG. 98, each fixing means 584, 585 is provided on an attaching portion 589, 590 protruding in the left-right direction from the housing case 482, and on the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attaching portions 589, 590. There are provided mounting holes 591, 592, and fixtures 593, 594 such as screws that are inserted from the mounting portions 589, 590 into the mounting holes 591, 592.

  The attachment hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the front end side of the image display means 393 is provided in a cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 protruding backward from the rear wall portion 446. The notch 596 is formed corresponding to the attachment portion 589, and the attachment portion 589 can be inserted into and removed from the notch 596 in the lateral direction. Accordingly, the notch 596 has a function as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the housing case 482 with the mounting portion 589 on the housing case 482 side.

  An inclined guide portion 598 is provided on the distal end side of the attachment portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the projecting wall 595 corresponding to the notch portion 596. The guide portions 598 and 599 are used for attachment. The portion 589 is guided to the notch 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598 and 599 are formed by inclined portions, but may be arcuate surfaces or the like.

  On the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the housing case 482, as in the third embodiment, an effect control board case 495 that houses the effect control board 345, and a power module board case 506 that houses the power module board 346 Is detachably arranged. The effect control board case 495 is horizontally long in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is disposed on the upper side thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control board case 495 has a fixed engagement portion 499, an abutment portion 500, a fastener 501 and an engagement claw 502 with respect to the housing case 482 of the image display means 393. It is detachably attached to the back side of the portion 493. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the contact portion 500 protrude rearward from the housing case 482 with an interval of the production control board case 495, and the engagement protrusion of the production control board case 495 is formed in the fixed engagement portion 499. 503 is detachably engaged, and the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction with the fixed engagement portion 499.

  The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by a pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the upper rear wall 493. The engaging claw 502 protrudes from the housing case 482 to the back side and is disposed on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is detachably engaged with the effect control board case 495.

  On the back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the housing case 482, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 92 and FIGS. 100 to 103, a harness pedestal 399 is provided below the effect control board case 495. The harness pedestal 399 is configured by the lower rear wall portion 494 itself of the housing case 482, and various harnesses 600 such as a flat harness connecting the effect control board 345 and movable effect means (not shown) are in a predetermined direction. And is stopped by a stopper 601.

  On the back surface side of the lower rear wall 494 of the housing case 482 constituting the harness pedestal 399, a plurality of mounting portions 602 are provided in a recessed shape, and a large number of mounting holes 603 are formed vertically and horizontally in the respective mounting portions 602. Is provided.

  The attachment portion 602 has a vertical portion 602a that is long in the up-down direction and a horizontal portion 602b that is long in the left-right direction. (Several sets) of mounting holes 603 are provided, and the mounting position of the stopper 601 can be arbitrarily changed in the vertical and horizontal directions by attaching the stopper 601 using any one of the mounting holes 603. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stopping portion) 601 includes a base portion 604, a presser portion 605 formed integrally with one end of the base portion 604, and the other end side of the presser portion 605 on the other end side of the base portion 604. The harness 600 is sandwiched between the base portion 604 and the presser portion 605, and the other end of the presser portion 605 is engaged with the other end of the base portion 604. The locking means 606 is used for locking. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are engaged and disengaged. Yes.

  The base portion 604 has a thickness substantially the same as the depth of the recessed portion of the attachment portion 602, and includes two (plural) attachment protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the attachment holes 603, and the attachment protrusions 609 are formed in the attachment holes 603. The stopper 601 is detachably attached by being inserted. The stopper (stopping portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness receiving base 399.

  One end of the harness 600 is connected to the effect control board 345. 101 and 102, the other end of the harness 600 is led from the side surface of the housing case 482 to the inside of the mounting frame 391 through the side surface of the mounting frame 391, and inside the mounting frame 391. It is connected to the movable effect means 394-397 side. The harness 600 is pressed along the side surface of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the attachment frame 391 by the pressing member 638. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 637 such as a screw.

  In this way, if a large number of mounting holes 603 are provided in the mounting portion 602 of the housing case 482, the stoppers 601 can be disposed at necessary locations according to the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600, It is possible to arbitrarily cope with a change in wiring of the harness 600 and others. In addition, the attachment portion 572 of the housing case 482 is recessed, and by arranging the stopper 601 on the attachment portion 572, the amount of protrusion of the stopper 601 to the rear of the base portion 604 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be disposed along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the housing case 482.

  93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and both upper and lower sides of the receiving portion 460. And a guide protrusion 610 that guides both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the horizontal insertion / removal direction, and the other end opposite to the side board mounting base 467 disposed on the left and right ends is inserted / removed. Part 462. The upper guide protrusion 610 is formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide protrusion 610 is formed in a U-shaped cross section. However, the guide protrusion 610 may have substantially the same structure in both the upper and lower sides.

  The receiving portion 460 and the guide protrusion 610 constitute a pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 that guide the image display means 393 in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455. The guide rail 611 includes a receiving portion 460 and a front rail portion 613 that guides a sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482, and protrudes from the outside of the front rail portion 613 to the back side, and the housing case 482. And an outer rail portion 614 for guiding both the upper and lower sides from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both upper and lower end portions on the insertion end side of the housing case 482 and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the housing case 482 toward the tip side.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the insertion / removal unit 462 is disposed on the back side of the other end of the display means mounting unit 453. The insertion / removal unit 462 is configured to incline the image display unit 393 obliquely from the rear side with respect to the guide rail 611 on the other end side of the display unit mounting unit 453, and in this state, the front end sliding unit 612 is moved to the guide rail 611. What is necessary is just to be able to make it contact | abut to this front side rail part 613. FIG. Therefore, the insertion / removal portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453.

  The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 is provided with an insertion portion 615 that is partially cut away and corresponding to the front side of the side substrate mounting base 467 for the LED connection substrate 353, and the image display means 393 is provided. When tilted in the oblique direction with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects the front rail portion 613. It is configured as follows.

  96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 has a restricting portion 616 with which the tip sliding portion 612 abuts when the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615. And a fulcrum part 617 that serves as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated to the front rail part 613 in a state where the tip sliding part 612 is in contact with the restricting part 616 and regulated. ing.

  When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end side approaches the front rail portion 613, the front end sliding portion 612 and the restriction portion 616 are relatively relative to each other so that the front end sliding portion 612 is raised. A guide unit 618 and a guide unit 619 for guiding the user.

  The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the insertion / removal part 462 side is the insertion end of the image display means 393 when the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is moved along the guide rail 611 toward the mounting position. The contact portion 620 is in contact with the vicinity of the side or the insertion end side.

  The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but the restriction portion 616 is not provided. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured similarly to the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, the restricting portion 616 may be provided on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

  The mounting portion 572 of the housing case 482 protrudes from the tip sliding portion 612. The tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, whereas the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the restricting portion 616, the attachment portion 572 does not interfere with other members.

  As shown in FIGS. 90, 92, 96 and 105, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. ing. The pushing means 623 rotates the rear end side of the image display means 393 to the front rail section 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum part 617 of FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail section 613. When the image display means 393 is pushed, the rear end of the image display means 393 is pushed along the front rail portion 613 into a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A (to assist the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A). The pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end portion of the housing case 482 of the image display means 393 and the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 are inclined and the pressed portion 624 is in contact with the pressed portion 624. And a pressing guide portion 625 for pressing and guiding the housing case 482 to the mounting position.

  Pushing means 623 is provided on both upper and lower sides of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the front rail portion 613, and presses both upper and lower ends of the housing case 482. The rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing portion 626 that bends in a U-shaped cross section corresponding to the pressing guide portion 625. This reinforcing portion 626 may be provided along the opening edge of the opening 455 along the entire length in the vertical direction.

  The pressed portion 624 is provided in a square shape on the housing case 482 side, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 side of the mounting frame 391 in an inclined shape, but may be configured in reverse. The pressed part 624 and the pressing guide part 625 can both be configured to be inclined or curved.

  The push-in means 623 is an end opposite to the moving direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, that is, an end opposite to the side substrate mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455. One or a plurality of them may be arranged in the vertical direction, for example, in the middle or central part in the vertical direction in addition to the upper and lower sides. Further, the pressing guide portion 625 can be constituted by a rotating body or the like that rotates around the vertical axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a ride-up portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side with respect to the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 of the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the riding-up portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is at a predetermined mounting position.

  When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum part 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail part 613, the riding section 627 has a front surface of the housing case 482. In contact with each other, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the housing case 482 is lifted in the direction indicated by the arrow 627A in FIG.

  The housing recess 628 is formed in a recessed shape on the front surfaces of the housing case 482 at both the upper and lower ends, and the riding-up portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The ride-up portion 627 is formed with an inclined shape on the side of the pressure guide portion 625 so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482 can easily slide. The lower guide rail 611 is provided with a notch 639 in the front rail 613, but the notch 639 may not be provided.

  When the image display means 393 is mounted on the display means mounting portion 453, for example, the game board 313 is tilted so that the front surface of the game board 313 is on the lower side and the attachment frame 391 is on the upper side, and in that state, FIG. ) To (c).

  First, on the insertion / removal part 462 side, the image display means 393 is arranged in an inclined state inclined in an oblique direction as shown in FIG. 107 (a) with respect to the front rail part 613 of the pair of guide rails 611, and its tip side. The tip sliding portion 612 is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A and moved to the lower mounting position of the side substrate mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Let

  At this time, if the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 of the side board mounting base 467, the image display means 393 is tilted around the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611 as necessary. The distal end side of the display means 393 is inserted below the side substrate mounting base 467.

  When the image display means 393 moves to the mounting position in an inclined state, the tip sliding portion 612 enters the lower side of the side substrate mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615. FIG. As shown, the distal end side of the image display means 393 including the distal end sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the distal end of the distal end sliding portion 612 contacts the restricting portion 616.

  Accordingly, the front end side of the image display means 393 is attached to the side substrate even though the side board mounting base 467 is located on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the attached image display means 393. A large amount can be inserted below the base 467.

  When the image display means 393 has a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 when approaching the side board mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the opposite insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. Thereby, the image display means 393 can be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

  Next, when the non-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611 side, the image display means 393 is rotated in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum part 617 and along the front rail part 613 of the guide rail 611. Put it in a state. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 moves away from the restricting portion 616 while being guided by the restricting portion 616 along with the rotation in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum portion 617.

  When the opposite side of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, the pressed portion 624 on the opposite side of the image display means 393 on the side of the mounting frame 391, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Abutting on the pressing guide portion 625, the pressed portion 624 is guided in the pressing direction in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625. As a result, the image display means 393 can be pushed along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG.

  Accordingly, the image display means 393 is placed between the upper and lower guide rails 611 in an inclined manner, and the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the guide rail 611 while the rear end side of the image display means 393 is on the guide rail 611. The image display means 393 can be easily and surely guided to the predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 by tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 as shown in FIG.

  When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the push-in means 623 places the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A before pushing the image display means 393 into the mounting position. The front surface of 482 abuts on the ride-up portion 627. Therefore, the leading end side of the image display means 393 is slightly lifted, and in this state, the image display means 393 slides to the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A.

  Further, guide portions 598 and 599 are provided between the attachment portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595, and the attachment portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protrusion wall 595 through the guide portions 598 and 599. . For this reason, the attachment portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 even though the attachment portion 589 has a protruding shape on the distal end side of the image display means 393.

  When the image display means 393 moves to a predetermined mounting position, the ride-up portion 627 corresponds to the accommodation recess 628, so that the front surface of the accommodation case 482 of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. Thereafter, if the image display means 393 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 by a plurality of fixing means 584 and 585 on both the left and right sides, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG.

  When removing the image display means 393 from the display means mounting portion 453, the reverse procedure is performed. First, after fixing the image display means 393 by the fixing means 584 and 585, the image display means 393 is detached by placing a finger on the effect control board case 495 mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 and other appropriate places. Move in the direction. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625 and the rear end side of the image display means 393 is lifted from the front rail portion 613. Therefore, the rear end side of the image display means 393 Can be grasped with fingers. Therefore, the image display means 393 can be easily taken out from the display means mounting portion 453.

  When the image display unit 393 is mounted, the tip side of the image display unit 393 is slid while being in contact with the front rail portion 613, and the tip side thereof is a side substrate for the LED connection board 353. It is also possible to insert it below the mounting base 467. Therefore, in that case, the insertion portion 615, the restriction portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, and the like of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

  The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction with a gap enough to accommodate the image display means 393 between the display means mounting part 453 and the front rail part 613. FIG. 91 and 93, the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 disposed on both sides of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453 are detachably fixed from the back side.

  The upper support base 629 is bent toward the opening 455 from the rear ends of the bases 631 and 632 projecting rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the upper side of the opening 455. And an attachment portion 633. Among the plurality of base parts 631 and 632, one base part 631 is arranged in the left-right direction above the opening part 455, and the other base part 632 is arranged in the vertical direction at the end part of the opening part 455. An opening 634 is formed in the opening. A restricting portion 616 is formed corresponding to the opening 634, and a tip sliding portion 612 on the upper side of the housing case 482 protrudes.

  The lower support base 630 includes a plurality of base portions 635 projecting rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 on the lower side of the opening portion 455, and an attachment portion that bends upward from the rear end of the base portion 635 to the opening portion 455 side. 636, and is configured in an L shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably attached to the mounting parts 633 and 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629 and 630 from the back side by fixing tools 640 and 641 such as screws. An LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the back side of the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment.

  In this way, when the side substrate mounting base 467 is provided corresponding to the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391, it can be provided integrally with the mounting frame 391. However, support bases 629 and 630 having base portions 631 and 632 and mounting portions 633 and 636 that are bent from the rear end toward the opening portion 455 are provided on the upper and lower sides. By attaching 467, the support bases 629 and 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be configured to be rigid, so that the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453 can be improved.

  Note that the LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, but a relay board other than the LED connection board 353 or other boards may be used. Further, the side substrate mounting base 467 may be provided integrally with the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

  In the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first inclined obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, and then the tip sliding portion 612 is left and right along the guide rail 611 in that state. While sliding in the direction, the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 with the tip sliding portion 612 as a fulcrum, and the image display means 393 is slid in the left-right direction and attached. However, it may be attached by sliding in the vertical direction. Other configurations are the same as those of the third embodiment.

  Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

  In the case of a gaming machine including a game board 313 detachably attached to the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 attached to a display means attachment portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313, an image display The means 393 may be detachable from the display means mounting portion 453 from one insertion / removal portion 462 side in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion / removal portion 462 side shown in the third embodiment), or You may make it removable from the one side of the left-right direction (For example, the left or right which is the one side of the left-right direction shown in 4th Embodiment). In that case, in the former, the frame side members on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the image display means 393 are the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, the external information extraction means 349, etc. A ball payout means 350 or the like can be considered. Of course, other frame side members may be used.

  In the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means mounting portion 453 on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313 and detachably attaching the image display means 393 to the display means mounting portion 453, in the third embodiment, the display means is mounted. A bulging portion that bulges backward from the mounting frame 391 in both the direction intersecting the attaching / detaching direction (vertical direction or left / right direction) of the image display means 393 with respect to the portion 453 and guides the image display means 393 in the attaching / detaching direction. 454 is provided, and the gaming parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged in the bulging portion 454. The bulging portion 454 intersects with the attaching / detaching direction (vertical direction or horizontal direction) of the image display means 393. You may provide in one of these.

  Further, as an internal mechanism in the attachment frame 391, there are movable effect means 394 to 397 in the attachment frame 391 on the front side of the image display means 393, and a part of the mechanism part of the movable effect means 394 to 397 is bulged out. Although it is possible to arrange in 454, other things may be used. The bulging portion 454 may be the entire length of the guide rail 611 or more, or a part thereof. The movable effects means 394 to 397 include movable effects bodies 546, 562, and 574 arranged on the front side of the image display means 393, a support mechanism that movably supports the movable effects bodies 546, 562, and 574, and a movable effect body. Any device provided with driving means 547, 564, and 575 for driving 546, 562, and 574 may be used, and other than those exemplified in the third embodiment may be used. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and / or driving means 547, 564, and 575 may be disposed in the bulging portion 454.

  The erroneous attachment preventing means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means attachment portion 453 is provided on the image display means 393 side, the first member 499 provided on the display means attachment portion 453 side, and erroneously attached. A second member 467 that sometimes interferes with the first member 499 is sufficient, and as illustrated in the third embodiment, an engaging portion (fixed) for fixing the effect control board case 495 is used. In addition to the combination of the tool) and the side board mounting base 467, various types can be used. Further, the erroneous mounting preventing means 516 may be dedicated to it, or may be used as any component member.

  When the image display means 393 is attached to the display means attachment part 453 of the attachment frame 391 so as to be detachable from the insertion / removal part 462 side, a pressing member that holds the image display means 393 from the back side to the insertion end side of the image display means 393 However, the holding member may also be used as another fixing member fixed to the attachment frame 391 in addition to a dedicated member. In that case, a projecting member projecting to the back side of the image display means 393 may be provided in the mounting frame 391, and the projecting member may also be used as the back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side substrate mounting base 467 is illustrated as the protruding member, and the substrate is disposed on the back side of the side substrate mounting base 467. However, other than the side substrate mounting base 467 may be used.

  When the image display unit 393 and the movable effect unit 394 are used in combination, the movable effect unit 394 may be at least partly in front of the image display unit 393. A center case 388 mounted from the front side to the approximate center of the game board 313 is disposed on the front side of the game board 313 and forms a game area 323 in which a game ball flows down on the outer peripheral side, and the front member 426. Further, the rear member 427 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the rear side may be provided integrally, or may be provided separately.

  By disposing at least a part of the movable effect means 394 on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable effect means 394 can be expanded. In that case, the movable effect means 394 includes a rear side portion disposed on the rear side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side that overlaps the front side from the rear side portion through the inner side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388. It is desirable to make it the structure provided with the part.

  The LED board may not be provided on the front side portion of the movable effect means 394, and the LED board may be provided on the rear side portion of the movable effect means 394. Since the rear side portion → rear side member 427 → front side portion is arranged from the rear side toward the front side, the light emission effect from the LED board provided on the rear side portion is also reflected in the rear side member 427 and the front side portion. Is possible. Moreover, you may make it provide an LED board also in a front side part. In that case, it is desirable not to provide the LED substrate on the rear side. Moreover, when providing LED boards on both sides, it is desirable to arrange at least a part of each LED board so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Provided in at least one of the rear side, the rear member 427, or the front side when at least a part of the front side of the movable effect body 546 overlaps the rear member 427 of the center case 388. A predetermined light emission effect may be executed by the light emitting means provided. Further, when an LED board is mounted on a part of the center case 388, a predetermined light emission effect may be executed by light emitting means provided on the LED board. Further, not only the center case 388 but also a predetermined light emission effect may be executed by the light emitting means of the LED board provided on the game board 313 side or the frame side.

  When at least a part of the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is disposed at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, a front side movable effect for moving the front side portion may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the back side part movement production | movement which makes a back side part move, and you may make it perform both.

  It is desirable that at least a part of the rear side portion of the center case 388 is formed of a resin member having transparency or translucency. Thereby, it is possible to visually recognize the rear member 427 arranged on the rear side from the front side.

  As for the front side part of the movable production | presentation means 394, it is desirable that at least one part is shape | molded by the resin member which has transparency or translucency. Thereby, it is possible to see the rear side member 427 and the rear side portion arranged rearward from the front side.

  In the case where the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the movable effect body 546 may be configured to overlap when the movable effect body 546 is movable. You may comprise so that it may overlap at the time of a non-movable production (origin position). Here, at the time of the movable effect, both the case where the movable effector 546 is located at the predetermined effect position and the case where the movable effector 546 is moving toward the predetermined effect position are assumed. . Further, the entire front side portion of the movable effect body 546 may be configured to overlap the rear side member 427, or at least a part thereof may be configured to overlap.

  A part of the center case 388 where the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 overlaps may be a wall portion constituting the rear of the stage 429, or may be a ball rebound prevention portion positioned at the upper rear portion of the stage 429.

  A predetermined decorative portion may be provided on the rear member 427 of the center case 388. For example, character information or numerical information may be displayed. In addition, by displaying at least a part of the decorative portion at a position that does not overlap the front side portion of the movable effect body 546, the decorativeness of the rear member 427 can be improved without reducing the visibility of the decorative portion.

  In a state where the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is disposed at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the liquid crystal so as to correspond to the movable effect body 546. Good. Here, the effect image may be, for example, a predetermined effect display corresponding to a reliability (eg, blue, green, red, gold) indicating the winning expectation of the variable display. The display mode of the effect display is desirably displayed according to the movable effect body 546. For example, the display mode may be determined according to the shape and size of the front side portion, the driving mode, and the like.

  Although the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, it is desirable to provide a predetermined interval between the rear side member 427 and the front side portion. Also, it is desirable to provide a predetermined distance between the rear side portion and the rear side member 427. Thereby, the interference between the movable effect body 546 and the center case 388 can be prevented. Further, as the predetermined interval is shorter, a sense of unity between a part of the movable effector 546 and the center case 388 is born, so that the decorativeness can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the predetermined interval is provided in order to prevent interference. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in order to provide a sense of unity between the movable effector 546 and the center case 388, the two are arranged in a state where they interfere with each other. May be.

  Although the front side portion of the movable effect body 546 is arranged at a position overlapping the rear side member 427 of the center case 388, the present invention is not limited to this, and any part of the game component that is mounted from the front side of the game board 313 may be used. Any may be sufficient and it is not limited to the center case 388 in particular.

  In the state where the movable effect body 546 is located at the origin position and the front side portion is located on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the movable effect body is provided when the game board 313 is assembled. Since 546 is mounted from the rear side of the game board 313 and the center case 388 is mounted from the front side of the game board 313, there is a problem that assembly becomes difficult. For example, when the center case 388 is mounted after the movable effect body 546 is mounted on the game board 313, the rear member 427 of the center case 388 is assembled so as not to contact the front side portion of the movable effect body 546. Must be done. In this way, the assembly work may become complicated.

  Therefore, by constructing the movable effector 546 so as to be arranged at different positions during assembly, they can be prevented from interfering with each other, and the assembly work can be easily performed. Then, in the initializing operation of the movable effector 546 performed when power is turned on after assembly, the front part is moved to the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388 by moving the movable effector 546 to the origin position of the main body. You may comprise so that it may be located.

  Generally, the center case 388 can be attached to and detached from the game board 313 from the front side, while the movable effect means 394 can be attached to and detached from the game board 313 from the back side. Needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so as to be disengaged from the rear member 427 inward. In this case, as long as the front side portion can move relative to the rear member 427, any movement mode such as a swinging motion or a linear motion may be adopted, and the front member 426 and the rear side may be employed. Either one of the members 427 may move with respect to the other, or both may move. Further, the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 may be one side or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or one side or both sides in the up-down direction. The shape and structure of the front side of the movable effect means 394 to 397 are not a problem.

  When the image display unit 393 is inserted into and removed from the insertion / removal unit 462 side with respect to the predetermined mounting position of the display unit mounting unit 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 is used as the insertion / removal unit 462, and the guide rail extends from the insertion / removal unit 462. The image display unit 393 may be moved in the insertion / removal direction along the line 611. However, in this case, the insertion / removal part 462 side of the display means mounting part 453 needs to be configured to be open, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 during insertion / removal becomes longer.

  Compared to this, the image display means 393 is inclined with respect to the guide rail 611 in an inclined posture, and the tip side is brought into contact with the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved toward the guide rail 611 from the inclined posture. When moving the image display means 393 to the predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 while tilting, it is not necessary to open the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the image display means 393 The moving distance can be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted / removed along the guide rail 611, but the insertion / removal direction may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction in the rear view, in addition to the horizontal direction.

  When the image display unit 393 is inserted into and removed from the guide rail 611 in an inclined posture, the insertion side of the image display unit 393 in the inclined posture is held by the holding unit, and then the image display unit 393 is moved to the guide rail 611 side. Although it is desirable to tilt, the holding portion may be in contact with the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined posture, or the tip side may be in contact with the image display means 393 when it reaches a predetermined mounting position. . In addition, when the distal end side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611, the restricting portion 616 with which the distal end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact is also one of the holding portions. When the image display means 393 reaches the predetermined mounting position, the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611 is not necessary when the distal end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the holding portion.

  The display means mounting unit 453 moves the image display means 393 to the guide rail 611 when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side. If the push-in means 623 for pushing into the mounting position along 611 is provided, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably moved along the guide rail 611 to the mounting position. The pushing means 623 is preferably provided on the side opposite to the movement direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position on the rear end side of the image display means 393, but may be provided in the middle of the movement direction of the image display means 393. Is possible.

  Further, when the image display unit 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side, the pushing unit 623 presses the pressed portion 624 on the image display unit 393 side by the inclined pressing guide unit 625 to display the image. It is desirable that the means 393 is configured to guide to the mounting position, but the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side is formed in an inclined shape, and the pressed guide portion 625 has a rod shape that contacts the pressed portion 624. It is also possible to configure a spherical shape or other shapes. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines but can be similarly implemented in other game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

  61 to 177 illustrate a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 62, the pachinko machine 300 includes an outer frame 301 and a front frame 32 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 301. The outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 constitute a gaming machine main body.

  The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 arranged on the left end side, and is openably and detachably pivoted, and on the right end side opposite to the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction. The provided locking means 304 can lock the outer frame 301 in a closed state.

  The front frame 302 includes a main body frame 305 and a front door 306 disposed on the front side of the main body frame 305. The front door 306 is pivotally attached to the main body frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 arranged on the left end side so as to be openable and detachable. It can be locked. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are disposed so as to have the same axis.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A synthetic resin front decoration member 310 that covers the horizontal frame member 309 from the front side is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to connect the front lower portions of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front decoration member 310 protrudes forward of the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main body frame 305 is disposed on the upper side thereof.

  The main body frame 305 is made of a synthetic resin, and is configured in a rectangular shape that can contact the front edge side of the outer frame 301 on the upper side of the front decoration member 310, and is mounted with a game board provided with a rectangular opening on the upper side. A part 311 and a lower mounting part 312 provided under the game board mounting part 311 are integrally provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the game board mounting portion 311 is detachable from the front side of the game board 313. The game board mounting portion 311 includes a contact portion 314 with which the game board 313 contacts from the front side. An engaging portion 315 that engages with the game board 313 when the left and right ends of the game board 313 are inserted into the game board mounting section 311, and the other end of the game board 313 in the game board mounting section 311 are connected to the main body frame. Fixing means 316 for detachably fixing to 305 is provided. The game board mounting unit 311 may make the game board 313 detachable from the back side.

  When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting part 311, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board mounting part 311 from the front side of the game board mounting part 311. It is inserted between the part 314 and the engaging part 315. Next, when the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 is moved backward with the engaging portion 315 side or an intermediate side between the contact portion 314 and the engaging portion 315 as the rotation center O. 65 and 313A in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 is played against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting portion 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. It can be pushed into the board mounting portion 311.

  When the game board 313 enters the game board mounting part 311, the other end of the game board 313 is fastened and fixed to the game board mounting part 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. Thereby, the game board 313 can be easily mounted. In addition, when removing the game board 313, a finger | toe is put on the suitable site | part of the game board 313, and what is necessary is just to rotate to the anti-313A arrow direction around the rotation center O in reverse order.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, the main body frame 305 is integrally or separately provided with a surrounding wall 317 that protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the game board mounting portion 311. The surrounding wall 317 protects the backside mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting part 311 from the outer peripheral side, and protects the upper wall part 318 protruding rearward from the upper side of the game board mounting part 311; A pair of left and right side wall portions 319 projecting rearward from the left and right sides of the game board mounting portion 311 and a bottom wall portion 320 projecting rearward from the lower side of the game board mounting portion 311 are provided.

  The upper wall portion 318 and the bottom wall portion 320 are arranged in the left and right sides on the upper and lower sides of the game board mounting portion 311, and the side wall portions 319 are arranged in the upper and lower sides on the left and right sides on the rear side of the game board mounting portion 311. The bottom wall 320 is provided with a discharge port 321 for discharging the game ball that has passed to the back side of the game board 313 downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the front door 306 includes a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 305. In the door base 322, a window hole 324 is formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 323 formed in the game board 313, and a plurality of speakers 325 are provided around the window hole 324 at predetermined locations such as up, down, left, and right. A decorative cover 326 that is disposed and substantially covers each speaker 325 from the front side is mounted.

  Further, on the lower front side of the door base 322, as shown in FIG. 61, an upper plate (launched ball storage unit) 328 that stores game balls and supplies them to the launching means 327, and the game balls of the upper plate 328 are full. A lower plate (excess ball receiving portion) 329 for storing excess spheres overflowing from the upper plate 328 side, a firing handle 330 operated to operate the firing means 327, and the like A lower decorative cover 331 that substantially covers 328, the lower plate 329, and the like from the front side is attached.

  The lower decorative cover 331 is formed in a forward bulging shape, and operation means such as an effect button 332 and a cross operation means 333 that can be pressed by the player are provided on the upper side. The cross operation means 333 includes four operation units 334 including a rear upper key, a front lower key, a left left key, and a right right key.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 322 so as to substantially close the window hole 324 from the rear side, and the first and second hinges 303 and 307 are provided. Reinforcing sheet metal 335 disposed in the vertical direction along the edge, reinforcing sheet metal 336 disposed in the vertical direction along the edge on the opening / closing end side, and reinforcement disposed in the left / right direction below the window hole 324 The sheet metal 337 is detachably fixed by screwing or the like.

  On the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337, ball feeding means 338, ball guiding means 339 and the like are mounted. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper plate 328 one by one to the launching means 327 and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 guides the surplus ball overflowing from the upper plate 328 when the game ball of the upper plate 328 becomes full and the foul ball returned without reaching the game area 323 to the lower plate 329. It is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 69, the game board 313 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 311, and the effect control board 345, the power supply module board 346, and the like are provided on the back side of the game board 313. A main control board 354 is arranged. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information takeout means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350 and a ball guide means 351 on one side in the left-right direction. The relay board 352 is arranged in the vertical direction, and the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction on the other side in the left-right direction. Further, on the back side of the main body frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball lending board 356 are arranged on the left and right sides below the main control board 354.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, and the external information take-out means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. The ball tank 347 is used to store a game ball for a winning ball or a rental ball, and is configured in a rectangular shape in plan view that is long in the left-right direction, and abuts on a step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317. And is detachably fixed. The ball tank 347 is open on the upper side so as to receive game balls replenished from the island-side replenishing means 357.

  The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding the game ball from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is inclined in the left-right direction from the lower side of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350. It is arrange | positioned and is attached to the back side of the main body frame 305 so that attachment or detachment is possible. A ball breaker mechanism 358 is provided in the middle of the ball guide rail 348 as necessary. The external information extracting means 349 is for extracting various types of game information to the outside. The external information extracting means 349 includes a plurality of extraction terminals 359 arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the upper side of the ball guide rail 348.

  Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 on the first and second hinges 303 and 307 side is bent from the rear end to the inner side in the left and right direction as shown in FIGS. The mounting base 360 is integrally provided, and thereafter, the ball payout means 350 and the ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction on the back side of the mounting base 360 and are detachably mounted.

  The ball payout means 350 is for paying out a game ball in the ball tank 347 based on a prize ball payout instruction from the payout board 355 and a ball rental instruction from the ball rental board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape that is flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag manner in the payout case 362, and a storage passage 363. And a driving motor (not shown) for driving the rotating body 364, and are detachably mounted on the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game balls paid out from the ball paying means 350 are guided to the upper plate 328 via the ball guiding means 351.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and an extraction passage 367. When the ball payout means 350 pays out the game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper plate 328 through the payout passage 366, and from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350. When the game ball is extracted, the game ball can be extracted from the extraction passage 367 to the outside through an extraction port (not shown). A relay substrate 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guide means 351.

  Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 is positioned on the side wall portion 319 located on the opposite side of the rotation center O when the game board 313 is attached and detached, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 68. A side wall reinforcing member 368 made of sheet metal that reinforces from the outside is provided, and a frame side joint portion 369 is provided from the side wall portion 319 along the bottom wall portion 320 in an L shape in front view. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has a function of making contact with other members when the front frame 302 is opened and closed to protect the side wall portion 319 and the backside mechanism of the game board 313 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame side joint part 369 is disposed corresponding to the front and rear board side joint parts 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and when the game board 313 is attached to and detached from the game board mounting part 311. The panel side joint portion 370 is electrically detachably connected.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a launching means 327, a lower speaker 325a, and the like are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting portion 312. Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, a first substrate mounting base 371 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting portion 312 from the back side. On the back side of the mounting base 371, a payout board 355 accommodated in the payout board case 372 and a ball rental board 356 accommodated in the ball rental board case 373 are arranged on the left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a sheet metal support plate 374, a launch rail 375 attached to the front surface of the support plate 374, and a launch game ball attached to the front surface of the support plate 374. A ball holding portion 376 held on the firing rail 375, an impact rod 378 supported on the front surface of the support plate 374 so as to be swingable around a driving shaft 377 in the front-rear direction, and an impact rod mounted on the back side of the support plate 374 And a firing drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid for driving the 378 in the striking direction via the drive shaft 377. When the firing handle 330 is rotated, the firing drive means 379 causes the striking rod 378 according to the amount of operation. Is driven in the striking direction (clockwise), and the game ball on the launch rail 375 is fired to the game board 313 side.

  The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with the payout command. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the payout board case 372 for accommodating the payout board 355 is attached to and detached from the first board mounting base 371 by the engaging means 380 on the left and right end sides and the fastener 381 on the other end side. It is fixed as possible. The fastener 381 has a knob portion 382 that can be rotated around the front and rear axes on the first board mounting base 371, and the picking-up board case 372 is fastened to the first board mounting base 371 side by the knob portion 382. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball paying means 350 in accordance with a ball lending command from a ball lending button or the like. A ball rental board case 373 that accommodates the ball rental board 356 is pivotally mounted around a vertical axis by a pivot support means 383 on one end of the left and right sides, and a first board mounting base 371 by a lock means 384 on the other end side. It is detachably fixed to. The locking means 384 has a lock button 385 that can be operated in the front-rear direction. When the lock button 385 is pressed forward, the ball rental board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and the lock button 385 is moved to the rear side. The lock is released when it is pulled.

  The game board 313 is configured in a substantially rectangular shape by a non-translucent material such as a plywood board or a transparent material such as a synthetic resin. On the front side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70, a game area 323, a guide rail 387 for guiding the game ball fired from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323, and a substantially central position are arranged. A central display frame (center case) 388 that is detachably mounted on the game board 313 from the front side is provided. A front decoration member 389 is provided on the front surface of the game board 313 on the outer peripheral side of the game area 323.

  Also, on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 and FIGS. 71 to 75, a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base arranged so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391. 392 is attached. The attachment frame 391 includes a liquid crystal type image display means 393 disposed on the back side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, and first to first disposed between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393. The fourth movable effect means 394 to 397, the LED connection board 353 to which the LED for the light emission effect on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, and the harness pedestal 399 for receiving the harness arranged on the back side are mounted. Yes.

  Further, an effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 as shown in FIG. On the back side of the second board mounting base 392, as shown in FIG. 72, the main control board case 513 for housing the main control board 354 and the frame side joint portion 369 are electrically attached / detached when the game board 313 is attached / detached. A board-side joint portion 370 is provided.

  The attachment frame 391 has a rectangular cylinder shape that is short in the front-rear direction, and is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are incorporated in the mounting frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, and are attached to the game board 313 by attaching and detaching the mounting frame 391 to the game board 313. On the other hand, it is detachable from the back side integrally with the mounting frame 391.

  In the game area 323, as shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is disposed at the approximate center thereof, and a left flow path 401 and a right flow path 402 are formed on the left and right sides of the central display frame 388. A start winning means 403 is arranged at the approximate center below the center display frame 388, and variable winning means 404 and a normal winning means 405 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the starting winning means 403. Various display means including a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the central display frame 388. ing.

  The guide rail 387 is arranged on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer periphery side of the game area 323, and the game ball fired from the launching means 327 is guided to the upper side of the game area 323 through the guide path 411. It is designed to guide you. A large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 323, and a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is connected to the left flow path 401 and the right side by the central display frame 388 or the like. It is distributed to any one of the flow-down paths 402 and flows down while colliding with the game nail.

  In the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 70 and the like, a plurality of mounting holes 413 to 415 for mounting a central display frame 388, a start winning means 403, a variable winning means 404, a normal winning means 405, etc., an out port 416, etc. Is formed in a penetrating manner in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388 and is provided at a substantially central portion in the game area 323. The mounting hole 414 is for mounting the start winning means 403, and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The out port 416 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area 323.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the central display frame 388 covers the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 on the inner side. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and an outer peripheral portion of the display window 418 is located in the mounting hole 413. Thus, it is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like. The central display frame 388 includes a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided into two in the circumferential direction. However, the entire display frame 388 may be divided into three or more as necessary, and It may be divided into a plurality of directions.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is arranged along the front surface of the game board 313 outside the mounting hole 413 and has a plate shape or the like through which the game ball can pass through the front side. Front mounting portion 421, and a decorative front frame portion provided in a front gate shape from the top side to the left and right sides on the front side of front mounting portion 421 and projecting forward on the inner peripheral side of front mounting portion 421 422, a window frame portion 423 that is bent backward from the inner periphery of the front frame portion 422 and is disposed in the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and the rear of the window frame portion 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418 Left and right decorative members 424 arranged in the vertical direction, and detachably mounted on the front surface of the game board 313.

  The decorative member 424 has a plate shape or other shapes, and as shown in FIGS. 73, 76, and 77, the decorative member 424 is disposed so as to protrude from the inner periphery of the window frame portion 423 toward the display window 418. Among the left and right decorative members 424, one decorative member 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 or the like via the attachment portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is attached to the window frame portion 423 or the like via the attachment portion 424a. It is fixed.

  The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 constitute a front side member 426 that partitions the game area 323 on the outer peripheral side of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 is an image on the rear side of the front side member 426. A rear member 427 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the display means 393 is configured. Various display means such as a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are arranged at appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419. ing.

  The second display frame 420 includes a stage 429 for dropping a game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 for guiding the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 side to the stage 429. Is provided.

  The second display frame 420 is disposed between the left and right lower end portions of the window frame portion 423 and the like of the first display frame 419, and has a plate shape or the like that contacts the front surface of the game board 313 on the lower side of the mounting hole 413. A front mounting member 432; a stage 429 disposed above the front mounting member 432; and an entry preventing member 431 disposed from the upper side to the rear side of the stage 429; It is detachably connected to both lower ends of the screw with screws or the like.

  The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 disposed on the inner periphery of the mounting hole 413 over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, the front mounting member 432 has a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow path 401 side, and a guide passage 434 that guides game balls from the warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. And are formed. The guide passage 434 communicates with a guide passage 435 formed in the entry preventing member 431 on the rear side, and a game ball that has entered the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow path 401 is passed from the guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435. It is guided and guided to one end side of the stage 429.

  The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 is provided with an open portion 437 on the front side of the warp port 430, and on the lower side of the warp port 430, a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 protruding in a U shape toward the front side is integrally provided. ing. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is communicated with the guide passage 435 through the connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and the passage wall 440 provided in the U-shaped cross section in the intrusion prevention member 431.

  By providing the front mounting member 432 with the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 having such a structure, the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 can be integrally formed on the front mounting member 432 using a front and rear split mold. Yes, the number of parts of the second display frame 420 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the warp port member including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is detachably provided on the front mounting member 432 from the front side. it can.

  Note that the rear side of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 is configured to be open, and the open side excluding the connection hole 439 to the guide passage 435 is the game board 313, the stage 429, the entry preventing member 431, and the like. You may make it close with this member. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the front mounting member 432 including the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 can be integrally formed by a front and rear die.

  The stage 429 has a generally arcuate shape when viewed from the front, with both the left and right sides raised, and has a central drop part 450 arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction and left and right drop parts 451 arranged on the left and right sides of the central drop part 450. Then, after the game ball guided from the warp port 430 freely rolls in the left-right direction, the game ball falls to the front side of the game board 313 from either the central drop part 450 or the left-right drop part 451. The central dropping portion 450 is substantially directly above the start winning means 403, and when the game ball falls from the central dropping portion 450, there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the starting winning means 403.

  In addition to the guide passage 435, the entry prevention member 431 is bent from the upper end of the rear entry prevention plate 443 to the front side, and a rear entry prevention plate 443 provided substantially parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side. And an upper entry prevention plate 444 that covers the stage 429 from above, and a game ball that has flowed down the flow paths 401 and 402 or has rebounded on the stage 429 by the entry prevention plates 443 and 444. It is designed to prevent entry to the rear side. The entry preventing member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a display image displayed on the image display unit 393 can be visually recognized from the front side via the entry preventing member 431.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, 81 to 83, and the like, the mounting frame 391 is formed substantially in parallel with the game board 313 and has a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed at a substantially center thereof. And a peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the wall portion 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and bent outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall portion 447 along the game board 313 by a fixing screw or the like. A fixed portion 448 fixed to the game board 313 is integrally provided. The upper, lower, left and right wall portions of the peripheral wall portion 447 are disposed close to the upper wall portion 318, the side wall portion 319, and the bottom wall portion 320 of the outer surrounding wall 317.

  As shown in FIG. 73, FIG. 75, and FIG. 81, on the back side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, display means on which image display means 393 is mounted so as to be detachable in the vertical direction along the game board 313 A mounting portion 453, a bulging portion 454 having a U-shaped cross section in a plan view and arranged in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453 and bulging rearward from the image display means 393, and the bulging portion 454 A harness receiving base 399 is provided on the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 and disposed on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., a plurality of openings 456 are formed on the left and right bulged portions 454 in the vertical direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 A handle portion 457 is provided. A plurality of the handle portions 457 are vertically provided in each bulging portion 454, and the game board 313 can be easily transported even when each component is mounted by placing a finger on one of the left and right handle portions 457. It can be done. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has a plurality of handle portions 457 in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides, the handle portion in the optimum position in terms of weight balance in consideration of the mounting status of each component on the game board 313 and the like. 457 can be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 81, and 82, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and the outer peripheral portion on the front side of the image display means 393. Receiving portion 460 for receiving the image from the front side, a bulging portion 454 provided on the left and right sides of the receiving portion 460 and guiding the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion / removal direction, and provided below the receiving portion 460 and The image display means 393 is provided with a protruding wall 461 that contacts the insertion end side, and the upper side is an insertion / removal portion 462 for the image display means 393.

  The protruding height of the protruding wall 461 to the rear is about half of the bulging portion 454, and is bent upward from the left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the lower side of the bulging portion 454. An upper end portion of the image display means 393 is detachably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and a plurality of lower end sides of the image display means 393 are fixed to the protruding wall 461 in the left-right direction. The fixing means 464 is detachably fixed.

  The insertion / removal portion 462 of the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the upper end side of the attachment frame 391 as shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82, and the game board 313 is attached to the front frame 302. When mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, frame side members such as the upper wall portion 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302 and the ball tank 347 are close to the upper side of the insertion / removal portion 462, and the upper wall It is covered from above by frame side members such as the portion 318 and the ball tank 347. Therefore, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion / removal unit 462 when the game board 313 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portion 454 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view with the front side open, and is disposed vertically on the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453, and the bulging portions 454 on both the left and right sides. The guide rails 465 that guide the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides are configured by the receiving portions 460 on both the left and right sides.

  The internal space of the bulging portion 454 functions as a housing portion that houses a part or all of the internal mechanism (game component) in the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulging portions 454, the bulging portion 454 on the side of the ball dispensing means 350 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear mounting base 360 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The part 454 is provided with a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes behind the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 has a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer side in the left-right direction is detachably fixed to the back side of the bulging part 454 and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the back side of the harness receiving base 399 by screws or the like. Yes.

  The side substrate mounting base 467 is fixed to the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391 by a plurality of upper and lower fixing tools 473 on the left and right sides and to the harness receiving base 399 by a plurality of left and right fixing tools 474, respectively. The harness pedestal 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 475 such as a screw. Note that screws or the like are used for the fixtures 473 to 475.

  The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute a protruding member (fixing member) that protrudes to the back side of the display means mounting portion 453, and includes a left and right side portion of the display means mounting portion 453 and It overlaps from the back side with respect to the lower part, and when inserting / removing the image display means 393, it constitutes back side guide means for pressing and guiding the image display means 393 from the back side. The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 constitute restriction means (back side pressing means) for restricting movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side in addition to the back side guide means. The side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 are close to each other through a slight gap between the image display means 393, but may be slidably contacted with the image display means 393. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. The LED connection board 353 is connected to an LED (not shown) for emitting light on the front side of the front frame 302. The side board mounting base 467 includes a peripheral wall part 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact part 470 that the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, and a board engagement that engages with the left and right edges of the LED connection board 353. It has a part 471 and a board engaging claw 472 that engages with the other left and right edges of the LED connection board 353, and the LED connection board 353 is detachably fixed thereto.

  A plurality of substrate contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the outer periphery of the LED connection substrate 353. A plurality of substrate engaging portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction inside the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 corresponding to the middle between the substrate contact portions 470. The board engagement claws 472 can be elastically deformed in the engagement / disengagement direction with respect to the LED connection board 353, and a plurality of board engagement claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the other left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

  When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first, one end side of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact part 470 and the board engagement part 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed to the side board mounting base 467 side with the board contact part 470 and the board engagement part 471 side as a fulcrum, the board engagement claw 472 is elastically deformed outward and the LED connection board 353 is pressed. Is contained in the peripheral wall portion 469, and the outer peripheral portion thereof abuts on each substrate abutting portion 470. When the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claw 472, the board engagement claw 472 is restored by an elastic force and engaged with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

  Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached to and detached from the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as a synthetic resin material. There are advantages you can do. In addition, a screw for fixing the LED connection substrate 353 is unnecessary, and the amount of the screw used can be reduced as much as possible.

  Note that the mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 to the side board mounting base 467 can be similarly adopted when attaching a member to be mounted to another mounting base.

  The image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482. FIGS. 65, 67, 68, 73, 85, 86 As shown in FIG. 6, the insertion means 462 is inserted from the insertion / removal part 462 side so as to be vertically removable with respect to the display means mounting part 453, and the upper and lower ends of the housing case 482 are fixed by the fixing means 463, 464. The housing case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the front opening side. The image display panel 481 is held by a housing case 482 and a presser frame 483 arranged corresponding to the front outer periphery of the image display panel 481. The presser frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 484 of the housing case 482.

  A plurality of fixing means 463 and 464 are provided in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 includes an attachment portion 485 protruding upward from the housing case 482 and attachment holes provided in the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attachment portion 485. 486 and a fixture 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the attachment portion 485 into the attachment hole 486.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 is provided on a mounting portion 488 that protrudes downward from the housing case 482 and on the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the mounting portion 488. An attachment hole 489 and a fixture 490 such as a screw inserted from the attachment portion 488 to the attachment hole 489 are provided. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 that positions the left and right positions of the image display means 393 with the attachment portion 488.

  The positioning portion 491 is formed in a cutout shape in the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 is inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided in the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 constitute positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness receiving base 399 is provided with an operation portion 492 having an opening shape or a notch shape so as to face the fixing means 464, and a tool or the like for the fixing device 490 is inserted from the operation portion 492, and the fixing device 490 is attached. It is designed to perform operations such as turning.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the housing case 482 is formed integrally with the peripheral wall portion 484 and the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484, and is in contact with the back surface of the image display panel 481 and the lower rear wall portion 493. Wall 494. The housing case 482 has a large depth in the front-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and is provided with ribs and other reinforcing portions 493 a on the front side or both front and rear sides, and slightly behind the lower rear wall portion 494. It protrudes. An effect control board 345 and a power supply module board 346 are mounted on the rear side of the upper rear wall 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and a harness receiving base 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

  The effect control board 345 has a function of controlling various effect images displayed on the image display means 393, a function of controlling the effect image, and a function of controlling other various movable effect means 394 to 397. The production control board case 495 is housed. As shown in FIG. 85A, the effect control board case 495 is configured by connecting a front case 495a and a rear case 495b so as to be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. The rear case 495b is provided with an opening 498 corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the effect control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

  The effect control board case 495 is detachably attached to the back side of the housing case 482 with respect to the housing case 482 of the image display means 393 by a fixed engaging portion 499, a contact portion 500, a fastener 501, and an engaging claw 502. ing. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500 protrude rearward from the housing case 482 with an interval of the production control board case 495, and the production control board case 495 is detachable from the fixed engagement portion 499. In addition, the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction with the fixed engagement portion 499.

  The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by a pivot 505 and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the housing case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned on the contact portion 500 between the fastening position and the release position. The engaging claw 502 protrudes from the housing case 482 to the back side and is disposed on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is detachably engaged with the effect control board case 495.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the contact portion 500, the fastener 501 and the engaging claw 502 do not interfere with the side substrate mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. Has been placed. On the other hand, the fixed engagement portion 499 is on the side edge in the left-right direction of the housing case 482, and when the image display means 393 is to be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 with the right and left being incorrect, FIG. 89 (b) As shown in FIG. 5, the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 to prevent the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in this state. .

  Accordingly, the improper mounting prevention means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means mounting portion 453 is constituted by the fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467. Has been.

  The fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 constitutes an attachment for detachably attaching the effect control board case 495 to the housing case 482, and the attachment target of the attachment is the effect control board case. Other parts other than 495 may be used. Further, the first member may be a protrusion provided in a protruding shape for other purposes, and is not limited to a fixture.

  As shown in FIG. 85B, the power supply module board 346 is accommodated in the power supply module board case 506, and is engaged with the engaging means 503 and 504 on the back side of the upper rear wall 493 of the accommodation case 482 on the upper side of the effect control board 345. Etc. are detachably mounted via, for example.

  When the image display means 393 is attached to the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means attachment part 453 from the insertion / removal part 462 side. Install. In FIG. 89, for convenience of drawing, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are in a standing posture. However, when the image display means 393 is mounted when the game board 313 is assembled, for example, the front side is directed downward. The work is carried out with the game board 313 tilted horizontally.

  When the image display unit 393 is mounted, the image display unit 393 is inserted from the insertion / removal unit 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display unit mounting unit 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. Then, the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 until the insertion end side of the housing case 482 contacts the protruding wall 461.

  When the attachment portion 485 on the insertion end side of the housing case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453 is provided by the positioning function of the attachment portion 485 and the positioning portion 491. Can be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 may be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 463 and 464 on both the upper and lower sides.

  In this way, if the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the display means mounting portion 453 is in an open state, the image display means 393 can be attached / detached from the insertion / removal portion 462 side substantially in parallel with the game board 313, so the periphery of the display means mounting portion 453 Although there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 so as to overlap the image display means 393, there is an advantage that the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without removing them. is there. Therefore, other parts can be arranged so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

  Further, when the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453, the left and right end sides of the image display means 393 enter the lower side of the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 is the harness. In order to enter the lower side of the cradle 399, the side substrate mounting base 467 and the harness cradle 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when the image display means 393 is inserted / removed with the game board 313 standing, there is no fear that the image display means 393 will drop backward, and the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed easily and safely. It can be carried out.

  When assembling and the like, if the left and right sides of the image display means 393 are in the wrong direction and an attempt is made to insert the display means mounting portion 453 in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. 89 (b), The image display means 393 cannot be inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 because the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the side substrate mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the image display means 393 from being erroneously inserted or erroneously attached.

  The fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute an erroneous mounting prevention means 516, and the fixed engagement section 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are also used as the erroneous mounting prevention means 516. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the dedicated erroneous mounting preventing means 516 is provided.

  Even when the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side substrate mounting base 467 are used for preventing erroneous mounting, other members than the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side substrate mounting base 467 may be used. In addition, it is possible to provide dedicated means and members for preventing erroneous mounting without using other members as well.

  When mounting the effect control board 345, after engaging one end side of the effect control board case 495 with the fixed engagement portion 499, the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the housing case 482 to fix the effect control board case 495. It is sandwiched between the joint part 499 and the contact part 500. Further, when the effect control board case 495 is brought into contact with the back surface of the housing case 482, the engaging claws 502 are engaged with the effect control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 stands up, the effect control board case 495 does not drop off. Finally, the fastener 501 is turned around the pivot 505 toward the effect control board case 495, and the effect control board case 495 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the housing case 482 by the fastener 501.

  On the rear side of the protruding wall 461, a harness pedestal 399 is provided on the rear side of the lower side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the lower rear wall portion 494 of the housing case 482 of the image display means 393. ing. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the harness pedestal 399 is fixed to the protruding wall 461 by fixing tools 475 such as screws on the lower side and the left and right sides.

  As shown in FIG. 72, a plurality of hanging portions 507 for the harness 476 are provided on the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the harness 467 is formed using the hanging portions 507 at appropriate positions. Is supposed to stop. The hanging portion 507 stops the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399, and is arranged in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction substantially parallel to the harness pedestal 399, and is elastically deformable at one end in the longitudinal direction. The side is connected to the harness cradle 399. The hanging portion 507 has a claw shape and a hook shape.

  When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired in the left-right direction along the back surface of the harness pedestal 399 and in other predetermined directions, and the harness 476 is hooked on a part or all of the hanging portions 507 as necessary. . The hook portion 507 has a claw shape and a hook shape having appropriate elasticity, and the harness 476 is difficult to come off.

  In this way, the harness receiving base 399 is provided on the lower rear side of the display means mounting portion 453, and the harness 476 is disposed on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, whereby the image display means 393 is inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image display unit 393 and the harness 476 from being complicated. Further, by arranging the harness receiving base 399 close to the back surface of the image display means 393, the harness receiving base 399 can also be used as a guide for the image display means 393.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness receiving base 399. The second board mounting base 392 includes a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, a side wall portion 509 fixed to the game board 313 on the left and right sides of the lower portion of the mounting frame 391, and a ball discharge port 510. A bottom wall portion 511 formed and fixed to the game board 313 below the mounting frame 391.

  The second board mounting base 392 is provided with an opening 512 corresponding to the back side of the harness wired on the back side of the harness receiving base 399 by the wall portion 508, and the main part of the second board mounting base 392 is closed so as to close the opening 512 from the back side. A main control board case 513 that accommodates the control board 354 is detachably attached to the back side of the rear wall portion 508.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is configured by connecting a front case 513a and a rear case 513b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. The main control board case 513 is disposed horizontally in the vicinity of the lower side of the effect control board case 495, and is detachably attached to the second board mounting base 392 by the engaging means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 69, 71, and 72, the frame side joint portion 369 and the panel side joint portion 370 are configured in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the frame side joint portion 369 has the front frame 302. The board-side joint portion 370 is disposed on the lower side of the game board 313 farther from the hinges 303 and 307 and is opposed to the lower side of the game board 313 in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 and 69, the frame side joint portion 369 is a joint support portion 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 319 and a joint that is bent inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcing member 368. A joint reinforcing portion 520 that reinforces the supporting portion 519 from the back side, a frame side mounting plate 521 disposed on the front side of the joint supporting portion 519, and first to third frame side connectors attached to the frame side mounting plate 521 in a forward direction. 525-527.

  The frame-side mounting plate 521 has a first frame-side mounting portion 522 arranged in the vertical direction and second and third frame-side mounting portions 523 and 524 arranged in the left-right direction, and the first frame The first frame side connector 525 is mounted on the side mounting portion 522, and the second and third frame side connectors 526 and 527 are mounted on the second and third frame side mounting portions 523 and 524, respectively, facing forward. The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 are supported so as to be floatable via attachment tools 528 on both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 71 and 72, the board side joint portion 370 is disposed at the lower corner portion of the rear wall portion 508 of the second substrate mounting base 392 so as to face the frame side joint portion 369, and thereafter The first board-side mounting part 530 in the vertical direction and the second and third board-side mounting parts 531 and 532 in the left-right direction are formed on the wall part 508, and the first board is attached to the first panel-side mounting part 530. The side connector 533 is disposed on the second and third panel side mounting portions 531 and 532, and the second and third panel side connectors 534 and 535 are disposed rearward.

  The first to third frame side attachment portions 522 to 524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 are located on the front side near the rotation center O of the game board 313, and are attached to the first to third board side attachments. The parts 530 to 532 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are inclined obliquely with respect to the left and right line segments so that the side close to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located on the front side. Are arranged. The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 and the first to third board side connectors 533 to 535 are rotated when the game board 313 is rotated with the engaging portion 315 side as the rotation center O. The pin insertion / removal portions are sequentially connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O from the side close to the movement center O.

  The 1st-3rd board side attaching parts 530-532 are arrange | positioned on the line segment which passes through substantially the rotation center O, and the 1st-3rd board is added to the 1st-3rd board side attaching parts 530-532. First to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 are mounted via the side relay boards 536 to 538. Therefore, the pin insertion / removal portions of the first to third panel-side connectors 533 to 535 are substantially parallel to the first to third panel-side attachment portions 530 to 532, and the front side of the first to third panel-side attachment portions 530 to 532. It is arranged close to. The first to third board side relay boards 536 to 538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539 to 541 for connecting the harnesses 476 to the boards on the game board 313 side.

  The first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint portion 369 are configured to correspond to the first to third panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint portion 370. The second and third frame side connectors 526 and 527 and the second and third panel side connectors 534 and 535 are on the side closer to the second frame side connector 526 and the second panel side connector 534 far from the rotation center O. The third frame side connector 527 and the third board side connector 535 are disposed on the upper side. The first to third frame-side connectors 525 to 527 and the first to third board-side connectors 533 to 535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion / removal portions are inserted / removed substantially simultaneously, or are far from the rotation center O. You may arrange | position so that a pin insertion / extraction part may insert / remove sequentially from the side.

  If the frame side joint part 369 and the board side joint part 370 having such a configuration are provided, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O when the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting part 311. As a result, the frame side connectors 533 to 535 of the frame side joint portion 369 and the panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint portion 370 are connected in a tangential direction. It is possible to connect to ˜527 without difficulty.

  That is, one end side of the game board 313 is inserted between the contact part of the game board mounting part 311, 314, and the engaging part 315, and the other end side of the game board 313 is pressed in the direction of the arrow from the front side. By rotating the panel 313 around the rotation center O, the frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint part 369 and the panel side connectors 533 to 535 of the panel side joint part 370 are connected in a tangential direction. The board side connectors 533 to 535 can be connected to the frame side connectors 525 to 527 without difficulty.

  When the game board 313 is attached to the game board attachment part 311, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, one end side of the game board 313 is brought into contact with the game board attachment part 311 from the front side of the game board attachment part 311. It inserts between the part 314 and the engaging part 315, and presses the other end side of the game board 313 into the main body frame 305 next. Then, the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A in FIG. 65 around the rotation center O, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting portion 311.

  When the game board 313 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 313A, the board side connectors 533 to 535 of the board side joint part 370 and the frame side connectors 525 to 527 of the frame side joint part 369 are shown in FIG. After approaching as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the corresponding board side connectors 533 to 535 and frame side connectors 525 to 527 are sequentially connected in the tangential direction from the side close to the rotation center O. Therefore, the board side connectors 533 to 535 and the frame side connectors 525 to 527 can be connected without difficulty.

  Further, by arranging the plurality of frame side joint parts 369 and the board side joint part 370 in an L shape, for example, on the board side joint part 370 side, the two sides of the corner portion of the second board mounting base 392 are formed. It is possible to arrange the board-side joint portion 370 by making effective use. Therefore, even though there are a plurality of the frame-side connectors 525 to 527 and the board-side connectors 533 to 535, the frame-side joint part 369 and the board-side joint part 370 are efficiently used by effectively utilizing the space having two sides. Can be arranged.

  In the attachment frame 391, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393, and the front side of the image display means 393. 3rd and 4th movable production | presentation means 396,397 are arrange | positioned at the right and left.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the first movable effect means 394 includes a first movable effect body 546 and first drive means 547 that drives the first movable effect body 546 in the vertical direction. The first driving unit 547 can be moved in the vertical direction between the upper position on the upper front side and the lower position on the lower front side of the image display unit 393 while maintaining a substantially horizontal state. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the first movable effect body 546.

  The first movable effect body 546 includes a support body 548 disposed in a horizontally long shape on the front upper portion of the image display means 393, and a decorative body 549 mounted on the front surface side of the support body 548. Both end sides are supported by a pair of first drive means 547 disposed on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 via the first drive connector 550 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The first drive means 547 is supported by the attachment frame 391 via a vertically long support member 551. The first drive means 547 is disposed in the vertical direction along the outer edge of the image display means 393 and on both the upper and lower ends thereof, and is an elongated cylindrical lift guide body 552 that guides the first drive connection body 550 in the vertical direction. A drive pulley 553 disposed in the vicinity of the lower end of the elevating guide body 552, a driven pulley 554 disposed in the vicinity of the upper end side of the elevating guide body 552, and a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 553. And an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around the drive pulley 553 and the driven pulley 554 and has a first drive connector 550 fixed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof.

  An end of the first movable effect body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connecting body 550 by a pivot 557 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 558 into which the pivot 557 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 can be inclined obliquely within a range in which the pivot 557 slides in the long hole 558.

  The decorative body 549 has a three-dimensional decoration using an airplane as a motif, and has a body portion 559 and wing portions 560 extending from the body portion 559 to the left and right sides. The decorative body 549 is arranged such that the front end side of the body portion 559 protrudes into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The front end side of the wing part 560 is disposed in front of the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388.

  The wing portion 560 which is a part of the decorative body 549 constitutes a front side portion disposed on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and other portions except the body portion 559 and the like are on the rear side of the decorative member 424. It constitutes the rear side part to be arranged. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 so as to overlap both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this way, it is possible to sufficiently secure the arrangement area of the first movable effect means 394.

  Further, the interval between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different between the upper and lower sides, and the decorative body 549 can pass in the front-rear direction with respect to the left and right decorative members 424 at the widened position. . For example, in this embodiment, since the space between the left and right decorative members 424 is large on the lower side, when the first movable effect means 394 is assembled to the mounting frame 391, the first side to the lower side of the decorative member 424 is the first. The movable effect body 546 is moved so that the wing 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

  Inside the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391, an LED substrate 542 is provided so as to illuminate the first movable effect body 546 of the first movable effect means 394 and, in particular, the decoration body 549. The LED board 542 includes a plurality of LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the moving range of the first movable effect body 546, and illuminates the decorative body 549 by causing the LED 543 to emit light during a predetermined movable effect.

  Note that the decorative body 549 may be a motif other than an airplane. When the decorative body 549 moves in the left-right direction, the decorative body 549 may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved to a position that is disengaged from the decorative member 424. Further, the decorative body 549 only needs to be movable between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position deviating from the front side of the decorative member 424. In addition, the decorative body 549 moves linearly in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the like, and also rotates or swings. You may make it do. Moreover, you may make it remove | deviate from the front side of the decoration member 424 by elastic deformation. Further, the first movable effect means 394 may be arranged at least partly on the front side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 and other main part on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the second movable effect means 395 is supported by the second movable effect body 562 and the support member 563 fixed to the attachment frame 391, and the second movable effect body 562. Second driving means 564 that drives in the up-down direction, and the second movable effect body 562 is driven by the second driving means 564, while maintaining a substantially horizontal state, the lower position of the lower front side of the image display means 393 It is movable between the upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle part. Note that the second drive means 564 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the second movable effect body 562.

  The second driving means 564 is disposed on the rear side of the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 on the rear side of the first driving means 547, and is arranged vertically on the lower side along the side edge of the image display means 393. In addition, an elongate cylindrical elevating guide body 566 that guides the second drive coupling body 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 disposed in the vicinity of the upper end side of the elevating guide body 566, and the vicinity of the lower end side of the elevating guide body 566 The second drive coupling body is wound around the drive pulley 568, the drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotationally drives the drive pulley 567, and the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction thereof. And an endless timing belt 570 to which 565 is fixed.

  The drive source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and the rear end side thereof is disposed in the bulging portion 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the drive source 569 which is a part of the second drive means 564 is disposed in the bulging portion 454, but at least a part of the second movable effect means 395, for example, the second movable effect means 395 is provided. At least a part of the support mechanism and / or the second driving means 564 may be incorporated in the bulging portion 454.

  In this way, by incorporating the gaming parts, which are internal mechanisms arranged inside the attachment frame 391, into the bulging portion 454, the first movable effect means 394 and the second movable effect means 395 are provided on the front side of the image display means 393. Even when the game board 313 is arranged, it is not necessary to secure a large space between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be arranged close to the game board 313 side.

  An end of the second movable effect body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connecting body 565 by a pivot 571 in the front-rear direction. A long hole 572 through which the pivot 571 is slidable in the left-right direction is formed on one end side of the first movable effect body 546. Therefore, the second movable effect body 562 can also be inclined obliquely within a range in which the pivot 571 slides in the long hole 572.

  Although the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 are arranged up and down, the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562 are arranged shifted in the front-rear direction. ing. Therefore, the first movable effect body 546 and the second movable effect body 562 can arbitrarily move in the vertical direction without interfering with the other party.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 73 to 75, the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 are arranged symmetrically corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, and are vertically long movable effects. Body 574 and driving means 575 for driving the movable effect body 574 in the left-right direction. By the driving means 575, an external position outside in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393 and an internal position inside in the left-right direction. It is possible to move between. The driving means 575 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the movable effect body 574.

  The movable effect body 574 is provided with an arbitrary decoration (not shown) on the front surface side, and is arranged vertically in front of the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The driving means 575 is provided with a support portion 576 fixed inside the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391, and is slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the support portion 576, and a movable effect body 574 is fixed on the front side. An electromagnetic sliding means including a sliding portion 577 is included. The movable effect body 574 can be moved by the driving means 575 between an external position outside in the left-right direction and an internal position inside in the left-right direction with respect to the image display means 393.

  Note that the movable effect bodies 574 of the third movable effect means 396 and the fourth movable effect means 397 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other when moved to the internal position. In addition, the movement path of each movable effect body 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396, 397 is between the movement path of the first movable effect body 546 and the movement path of the second movable effect body 562, and moves. Sometimes the movable effect bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 do not interfere with each other.

  The first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are used for the movable effect similar to that of the first embodiment, and all or part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are appropriately moved, The image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 can be limited or enlarged.

  For example, during normal times, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the display screen 578 is limited by the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 to play a game in a narrow image display area 579, which is advantageous for reach and other players. In the case of a specific gaming state or a precursor gaming state, the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 are moved backward to the outside of the display screen 578 as shown in FIG. It is also possible to play a game in a wide image display area 579.

  As a method of restricting the image display area 579, one or both of the upper and lower first and second movable effect means 394 and 395 are moved to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to move the image display area 579 up and down. The left and right widths of the image display area 579 by moving one or both of the left and right third and fourth movable effect means 396 and 397 to the center side of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 There is a second method for limiting. There is also a method of limiting the vertical width and the horizontal width of the image display area 579 by combining the first method and the second method. The enlargement / reduction of the vertical width and / or the horizontal width of the display area using all or part of the first to fourth movable effect means 394 to 397 may be intermittently repeated a plurality of times.

  90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the image display means 393 can be inserted into and removed from the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313 in the horizontal direction. The insertion / removal type is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the game board 313 includes a mounting frame 391 on the back side. On the back side of the mounting frame 391, a liquid crystal type image display means 393 corresponding to the center display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, and a light emitting effect LED (not shown) on the front side of the front frame 302 are provided. A connected LED connection board 353, a harness receiving base 399 for receiving a harness arranged on the back side, and a relay board 352 for relaying each harness are mounted.

  On the back side of the image display means 393, an effect control board case 495 that accommodates the effect control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 that accommodates the power module board 346 are mounted, and under the effect control board case 495. A harness cradle 399 is provided on the side.

  93 to 98 and the like, the attachment frame 391 is formed substantially in parallel with the game board 313 and has a rear wall portion 446 in which a rectangular opening 455 is formed at a substantially center thereof, and a rear wall portion 446. A peripheral wall portion 447 extending forward from the outer edge portion of the game board 313 to the back of the game board 313, and the front end portion of the peripheral wall section 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by a fixing tool 586 such as a screw or a nail. .

  As shown in FIG. 93, on the back side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, a display means mounting portion 453 capable of inserting and removing the image display means 393 along the game board 313 in the left-right direction, and the display means mounting On one end of the left and right sides of the portion 453, there is provided a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 and is arranged in the vertical direction and to which the LED connection board 353 is detachably attached.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482. The image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion / removal portion 462 that is open on the opposite side of the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting portion 453 in the left-right direction (horizontal). Direction) and is fixed at a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584 and 585 at both left and right ends.

  The housing case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIGS. 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is detachably housed from the front open side, and is inserted into the peripheral wall portion 484 from both the left and right sides. The image display panel 481 is detachably held by a fixture 586 such as a screw that contacts the side surface of the display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494, and the upper rear wall portion 493 is reinforced in a predetermined direction such as a vertical direction or a horizontal direction in order to ensure the strength of the storage case 482. A rib 587 and a reinforcing protrusion 588 having a U-shaped cross section are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the front and rear surfaces of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494, such as the reinforcing ribs 587 and the reinforcing protrusions 588, and the rear surface of the image display panel 481 A slight gap s is provided in the direction. Therefore, when the image display means 393 is handled alone, it is reinforced even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the storage case 482 are pressed toward the image display panel 481. The upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the housing case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the gap s between the rib 587, the reinforcing protrusion 588 and the like and the image display panel 481. The image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged by the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493 and 494 of the housing case 482.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a plurality of sets of fixing means 584 and 585 are provided in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. Then, as shown in FIG. 98, each fixing means 584, 585 is provided on an attaching portion 589, 590 protruding in the left-right direction from the housing case 482, and on the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attaching portions 589, 590. There are provided mounting holes 591, 592, and fixtures 593, 594 such as screws that are inserted from the mounting portions 589, 590 into the mounting holes 591, 592.

  The attachment hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the front end side of the image display means 393 is provided in a cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 protruding backward from the rear wall portion 446. The notch 596 is formed corresponding to the attachment portion 589, and the attachment portion 589 can be inserted into and removed from the notch 596 in the lateral direction. Accordingly, the notch 596 has a function as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the housing case 482 with the mounting portion 589 on the housing case 482 side.

  An inclined guide portion 598 is provided on the distal end side of the attachment portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the projecting wall 595 corresponding to the notch portion 596. The guide portions 598 and 599 are used for attachment. The portion 589 is guided to the notch 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598 and 599 are formed by inclined portions, but may be arcuate surfaces or the like.

  On the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the housing case 482, as in the third embodiment, an effect control board case 495 that houses the effect control board 345, and a power module board case 506 that houses the power module board 346 Is detachably arranged. The effect control board case 495 is horizontally long in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is disposed on the upper side thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the effect control board case 495 has a fixed engagement portion 499, an abutment portion 500, a fastener 501 and an engagement claw 502 with respect to the housing case 482 of the image display means 393. It is detachably attached to the back side of the portion 493. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the contact portion 500 protrude rearward from the housing case 482 with an interval of the production control board case 495, and the engagement protrusion of the production control board case 495 is formed in the fixed engagement portion 499. 503 is detachably engaged, and the contact portion 500 sandwiches the effect control board case 495 in the left-right direction with the fixed engagement portion 499.

  The fastener 501 is rotatably supported on the contact portion 500 by a pivot 505, and is operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the effect control board case 495 to the upper rear wall 493. The engaging claw 502 protrudes from the housing case 482 to the back side and is disposed on the upper side of the contact portion 500, and is detachably engaged with the effect control board case 495.

  On the back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the housing case 482, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 92 and FIGS. 100 to 103, a harness pedestal 399 is provided below the effect control board case 495. The harness pedestal 399 is configured by the lower rear wall portion 494 itself of the housing case 482, and various harnesses 600 such as a flat harness connecting the effect control board 345 and movable effect means (not shown) are in a predetermined direction. And is stopped by a stopper 601.

  On the back surface side of the lower rear wall 494 of the housing case 482 constituting the harness pedestal 399, a plurality of mounting portions 602 are provided in a recessed shape, and a large number of mounting holes 603 are formed vertically and horizontally in the respective mounting portions 602. Is provided.

  The attachment portion 602 has a vertical portion 602a that is long in the up-down direction and a horizontal portion 602b that is long in the left-right direction. (Several sets) of mounting holes 603 are provided, and the mounting position of the stopper 601 can be arbitrarily changed in the vertical and horizontal directions by attaching the stopper 601 using any one of the mounting holes 603. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stopping portion) 601 includes a base portion 604, a presser portion 605 formed integrally with one end of the base portion 604, and the other end side of the presser portion 605 on the other end side of the base portion 604. The harness 600 is sandwiched between the base portion 604 and the presser portion 605, and the other end of the presser portion 605 is engaged with the other end of the base portion 604. The locking means 606 is used for locking. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are engaged and disengaged. Yes.

  The base portion 604 has a thickness substantially the same as the depth of the recessed portion of the attachment portion 602, and includes two (plural) attachment protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the attachment holes 603, and the attachment protrusions 609 are formed in the attachment holes 603. The stopper 601 is detachably attached by being inserted. The stopper (stopping portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness receiving base 399.

  One end of the harness 600 is connected to the effect control board 345. 101 and 102, the other end of the harness 600 is led from the side surface of the housing case 482 to the inside of the mounting frame 391 through the side surface of the mounting frame 391, and inside the mounting frame 391. It is connected to the movable effect means 394-397 side. The harness 600 is pressed along the side surface of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the attachment frame 391 by the pressing member 638. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing tool 637 such as a screw.

  In this way, if a large number of mounting holes 603 are provided in the mounting portion 602 of the housing case 482, the stoppers 601 can be disposed at necessary locations according to the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600, It is possible to arbitrarily cope with a change in wiring of the harness 600 and others. In addition, the attachment portion 572 of the housing case 482 is recessed, and by arranging the stopper 601 on the attachment portion 572, the amount of protrusion of the stopper 601 to the rear of the base portion 604 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be disposed along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the housing case 482.

  93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and both upper and lower sides of the receiving portion 460. And a guide protrusion 610 that guides both the upper and lower sides of the image display means 393 in the horizontal insertion / removal direction, and the other end opposite to the side board mounting base 467 disposed on the left and right ends is inserted / removed. Part 462. The upper guide protrusion 610 is formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide protrusion 610 is formed in a U-shaped cross section. However, the guide protrusion 610 may have substantially the same structure in both the upper and lower sides.

  The receiving portion 460 and the guide protrusion 610 constitute a pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 that guide the image display means 393 in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455. The guide rail 611 includes a receiving portion 460 and a front rail portion 613 that guides a sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482, and protrudes from the outside of the front rail portion 613 to the back side, and the housing case 482. And an outer rail portion 614 for guiding both the upper and lower sides from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both upper and lower end portions on the insertion end side of the housing case 482 and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the housing case 482 toward the tip side.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the insertion / removal unit 462 is disposed on the back side of the other end of the display means mounting unit 453. The insertion / removal unit 462 is configured to incline the image display unit 393 obliquely from the rear side with respect to the guide rail 611 on the other end side of the display unit mounting unit 453, and in this state, the front end sliding unit 612 is moved to the guide rail 611. What is necessary is just to be able to make it contact | abut to this front side rail part 613. FIG. Therefore, the insertion / removal portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end side of the display means mounting portion 453.

  The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 is provided with an insertion portion 615 that is partially cut away and corresponding to the front side of the side substrate mounting base 467 for the LED connection substrate 353, and the image display means 393 is provided. When tilted in the oblique direction with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects the front rail portion 613. It is configured as follows.

  96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 has a restricting portion 616 with which the tip sliding portion 612 abuts when the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615. And a fulcrum part 617 that serves as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated to the front rail part 613 in a state where the tip sliding part 612 is in contact with the restricting part 616 and regulated. ing.

  When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end side approaches the front rail portion 613, the front end sliding portion 612 and the restriction portion 616 are relatively relative to each other so that the front end sliding portion 612 is raised. A guide unit 618 and a guide unit 619 for guiding the user.

  The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the insertion / removal part 462 side is the insertion end of the image display means 393 when the image display means 393 in the inclined posture is moved along the guide rail 611 toward the mounting position. The contact portion 620 is in contact with the vicinity of the side or the insertion end side.

  The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but the restriction portion 616 is not provided. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured similarly to the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, the restricting portion 616 may be provided on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

  The mounting portion 572 of the housing case 482 protrudes from the tip sliding portion 612. The tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, whereas the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 comes into contact with the restricting portion 616, the attachment portion 572 does not interfere with other members.

  As shown in FIGS. 90, 92, 96 and 105, the display means mounting portion 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. ing. The pushing means 623 rotates the rear end side of the image display means 393 to the front rail section 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum part 617 of FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail section 613. When the image display means 393 is pushed, the rear end of the image display means 393 is pushed along the front rail portion 613 into a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A (to assist the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A). The pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end portion of the housing case 482 of the image display means 393 and the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 are inclined and the pressed portion 624 is in contact with the pressed portion 624. And a pressing guide portion 625 for pressing and guiding the housing case 482 to the mounting position.

  Pushing means 623 is provided on both upper and lower sides of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the front rail portion 613, and presses both upper and lower ends of the housing case 482. The rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing portion 626 that bends in a U-shaped cross section corresponding to the pressing guide portion 625. This reinforcing portion 626 may be provided along the opening edge of the opening 455 along the entire length in the vertical direction.

  The pressed portion 624 is provided in a square shape on the housing case 482 side, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 side of the mounting frame 391 in an inclined shape, but may be configured in reverse. The pressed part 624 and the pressing guide part 625 can both be configured to be inclined or curved.

  The push-in means 623 is an end opposite to the moving direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting portion 453, that is, an end opposite to the side substrate mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455. One or a plurality of them may be arranged in the vertical direction, for example, in the middle or central part in the vertical direction in addition to the upper and lower sides. Further, the pressing guide portion 625 can be constituted by a rotating body or the like that rotates around the vertical axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a ride-up portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side with respect to the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 of the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the riding-up portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is at a predetermined mounting position.

  When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum part 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail part 613, the riding section 627 has a front surface of the housing case 482. In contact with each other, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the housing case 482 is lifted in the direction indicated by the arrow 627A in FIG.

  The housing recess 628 is formed in a recessed shape on the front surfaces of the housing case 482 at both the upper and lower ends, and the riding-up portion 627 is inserted when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The ride-up portion 627 is formed with an inclined shape on the side of the pressure guide portion 625 so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the housing case 482 can easily slide. The lower guide rail 611 is provided with a notch 639 in the front rail 613, but the notch 639 may not be provided.

  When the image display means 393 is mounted on the display means mounting portion 453, for example, the game board 313 is tilted so that the front surface of the game board 313 is on the lower side and the attachment frame 391 is on the upper side, and in that state, FIG. ) To (c).

  First, on the insertion / removal part 462 side, the image display means 393 is arranged in an inclined state inclined in an oblique direction as shown in FIG. 107 (a) with respect to the front rail part 613 of the pair of guide rails 611, and its tip side. The tip sliding portion 612 is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the front rail portion 613 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A and moved to the lower mounting position of the side substrate mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Let

  At this time, if the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 of the side board mounting base 467, the image display means 393 is tilted around the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rail 611 as necessary. The distal end side of the display means 393 is inserted below the side substrate mounting base 467.

  When the image display means 393 moves to the mounting position in an inclined state, the tip sliding portion 612 enters the lower side of the side substrate mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615. FIG. As shown, the distal end side of the image display means 393 including the distal end sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the distal end of the distal end sliding portion 612 contacts the restricting portion 616.

  Accordingly, the front end side of the image display means 393 is attached to the side substrate even though the side board mounting base 467 is located on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the attached image display means 393. A large amount can be inserted below the base 467.

  When the image display means 393 has a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620 when approaching the side board mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 comes into contact with the contact portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the opposite insertion end side of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. Thereby, the image display means 393 can be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

  Next, when the non-insertion end side of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611 side, the image display means 393 is rotated in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum part 617 and along the front rail part 613 of the guide rail 611. Put it in a state. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 moves away from the restricting portion 616 while being guided by the restricting portion 616 along with the rotation in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A around the fulcrum portion 617.

  When the opposite side of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, the pressed portion 624 on the opposite side of the image display means 393 on the side of the mounting frame 391, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Abutting on the pressing guide portion 625, the pressed portion 624 is guided in the pressing direction in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625. As a result, the image display means 393 can be pushed along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG.

  Accordingly, the image display means 393 is placed between the upper and lower guide rails 611 in an inclined manner, and the tip sliding portion 612 is slid along the guide rail 611 while the rear end side of the image display means 393 is on the guide rail 611. The image display means 393 can be easily and surely guided to the predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 by tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 as shown in FIG.

  When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the push-in means 623 places the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A before pushing the image display means 393 into the mounting position. The front surface of 482 abuts on the ride-up portion 627. Therefore, the leading end side of the image display means 393 is slightly lifted, and in this state, the image display means 393 slides to the mounting position in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A.

  Further, guide portions 598 and 599 are provided between the attachment portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595, and the attachment portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protrusion wall 595 through the guide portions 598 and 599. . For this reason, the attachment portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 even though the attachment portion 589 has a protruding shape on the distal end side of the image display means 393.

  When the image display means 393 moves to a predetermined mounting position, the ride-up portion 627 corresponds to the accommodation recess 628, so that the front surface of the accommodation case 482 of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. Thereafter, if the image display means 393 is fixed to the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 by a plurality of fixing means 584 and 585 on both the left and right sides, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG.

  When removing the image display means 393 from the display means mounting portion 453, the reverse procedure is performed. First, after fixing the image display means 393 by the fixing means 584 and 585, the image display means 393 is detached by placing a finger on the effect control board case 495 mounted on the back side of the image display means 393 and other appropriate places. Move in the direction. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625 and the rear end side of the image display means 393 is lifted from the front rail portion 613. Therefore, the rear end side of the image display means 393 Can be grasped with fingers. Therefore, the image display means 393 can be easily taken out from the display means mounting portion 453.

  When the image display unit 393 is mounted, the tip side of the image display unit 393 is slid while being in contact with the front rail portion 613, and the tip side thereof is a side substrate for the LED connection board 353. It is also possible to insert it below the mounting base 467. Therefore, in that case, the insertion portion 615, the restriction portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, and the like of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

  The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged in the vertical direction with a gap enough to accommodate the image display means 393 between the display means mounting part 453 and the front rail part 613. FIG. 91 and 93, the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 disposed on both sides of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453 are detachably fixed from the back side.

  The upper support base 629 is bent toward the opening 455 from the rear ends of the bases 631 and 632 projecting rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 on the upper side of the opening 455. And an attachment portion 633. Among the plurality of base parts 631 and 632, one base part 631 is arranged in the left-right direction above the opening part 455, and the other base part 632 is arranged in the vertical direction at the end part of the opening part 455. An opening 634 is formed in the opening. A restricting portion 616 is formed corresponding to the opening 634, and a tip sliding portion 612 on the upper side of the housing case 482 protrudes.

  The lower support base 630 includes a plurality of base portions 635 projecting rearward from the rear wall portion 446 of the attachment frame 391 on the lower side of the opening portion 455, and an attachment portion that bends upward from the rear end of the base portion 635 to the opening portion 455 side. 636, and is configured in an L shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably attached to the mounting parts 633 and 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629 and 630 from the back side by fixing tools 640 and 641 such as screws. An LED connection board 353 is detachably mounted on the back side of the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment.

  In this way, when the side substrate mounting base 467 is provided corresponding to the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391, it can be provided integrally with the mounting frame 391. However, support bases 629 and 630 having base portions 631 and 632 and mounting portions 633 and 636 that are bent from the rear end toward the opening portion 455 are provided on the upper and lower sides. By attaching 467, the support bases 629 and 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be configured to be rigid, so that the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453 can be improved.

  Note that the LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, but a relay board other than the LED connection board 353 or other boards may be used. Further, the side substrate mounting base 467 may be provided integrally with the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

  In the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first inclined obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611 from the insertion / removal portion 462 side, and then the tip sliding portion 612 is left and right along the guide rail 611 in that state. While sliding in the direction, the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 with the tip sliding portion 612 as a fulcrum, and the image display means 393 is slid in the left-right direction and attached. However, it may be attached by sliding in the vertical direction. Other configurations are the same as those of the third embodiment.

  Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

  In the case of a gaming machine including a game board 313 detachably attached to the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 attached to a display means attachment portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313, an image display The means 393 may be detachable from the display means mounting portion 453 from one insertion / removal portion 462 side in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion / removal portion 462 side shown in the third embodiment), or You may make it removable from the one side of the left-right direction (For example, the left or right which is the one side of the left-right direction shown in 4th Embodiment). In that case, in the former, the frame side members on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the image display means 393 are the ball tank 347, the ball guide rail 348, the external information extraction means 349, etc. A ball payout means 350 or the like can be considered. Of course, other frame side members may be used.

  In the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means mounting portion 453 on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313 and detachably attaching the image display means 393 to the display means mounting portion 453, in the third embodiment, the display means is mounted. A bulging portion that bulges backward from the mounting frame 391 in both the direction intersecting the attaching / detaching direction (vertical direction or left / right direction) of the image display means 393 with respect to the portion 453 and guides the image display means 393 in the attaching / detaching direction. 454 is provided, and the gaming parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged in the bulging portion 454. The bulging portion 454 intersects with the attaching / detaching direction (vertical direction or horizontal direction) of the image display means 393. You may provide in one of these.

  Further, as an internal mechanism in the attachment frame 391, there are movable effect means 394 to 397 in the attachment frame 391 on the front side of the image display means 393, and a part of the mechanism part of the movable effect means 394 to 397 is bulged out. Although it is possible to arrange in 454, other things may be used. The bulging portion 454 may be the entire length of the guide rail 611 or more, or a part thereof. The movable effects means 394 to 397 include movable effects bodies 546, 562, and 574 arranged on the front side of the image display means 393, a support mechanism that movably supports the movable effects bodies 546, 562, and 574, and a movable effect body. Any device provided with driving means 547, 564, and 575 for driving 546, 562, and 574 may be used, and other than those exemplified in the third embodiment may be used. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and / or driving means 547, 564, and 575 may be disposed in the bulging portion 454.

  The erroneous attachment preventing means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means attachment portion 453 is provided on the image display means 393 side, the first member 499 provided on the display means attachment portion 453 side, and erroneously attached. A second member 467 that sometimes interferes with the first member 499 is sufficient, and as illustrated in the third embodiment, an engaging portion (fixed) for fixing the effect control board case 495 is used. In addition to the combination of the tool) and the side board mounting base 467, various types can be used. Further, the erroneous mounting preventing means 516 may be dedicated to it, or may be used as any component member.

  When the image display means 393 is attached to the display means attachment part 453 of the attachment frame 391 so as to be detachable from the insertion / removal part 462 side, a pressing member that holds the image display means 393 from the back side to the insertion end side of the image display means 393 However, the holding member may also be used as another fixing member fixed to the attachment frame 391 in addition to a dedicated member. In that case, a projecting member projecting to the back side of the image display means 393 may be provided in the mounting frame 391, and the projecting member may also be used as the back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side substrate mounting base 467 is illustrated as the protruding member, and the substrate is disposed on the back side of the side substrate mounting base 467. However, other than the side substrate mounting base 467 may be used.

  When the image display unit 393 and the movable effect unit 394 are used in combination, the movable effect unit 394 may be at least partly in front of the image display unit 393. A center case 388 mounted from the front side to the approximate center of the game board 313 is disposed on the front side of the game board 313 and forms a game area 323 in which a game ball flows down on the outer peripheral side, and the front member 426. Further, the rear member 427 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the image display means 393 on the rear side may be provided integrally, or may be provided separately.

  By disposing at least a part of the movable effect means 394 on the front side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable effect means 394 can be expanded. In that case, the movable effect means 394 includes a rear side portion disposed on the rear side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side that overlaps the front side from the rear side portion through the inner side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388. It is desirable to make it the structure provided with the part.

  Generally, the center case 388 can be attached to and detached from the game board 313 from the front side, while the movable effect means 394 can be attached to and detached from the game board 313 from the back side. Needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so as to be disengaged from the rear member 427 inward. In this case, as long as the front side portion can move relative to the rear member 427, any movement mode such as a swinging motion or a linear motion may be adopted, and the front member 426 and the rear side may be employed. Either one of the members 427 may move with respect to the other, or both may move. Further, the front side portion of the movable effect means 394 may be one side or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or one side or both sides in the up-down direction. The shape and structure of the front side of the movable effect means 394 to 397 are not a problem.

  When the image display unit 393 is inserted into and removed from the insertion / removal unit 462 side with respect to the predetermined mounting position of the display unit mounting unit 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 is used as the insertion / removal unit 462, and the guide rail extends from the insertion / removal unit 462. The image display unit 393 may be moved in the insertion / removal direction along the line 611. However, in this case, the insertion / removal part 462 side of the display means mounting part 453 needs to be configured to be open, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 during insertion / removal becomes longer.

  Compared to this, the image display means 393 is inclined with respect to the guide rail 611 in an inclined posture, and the tip side is brought into contact with the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved toward the guide rail 611 from the inclined posture. When moving the image display means 393 to the predetermined mounting position along the guide rail 611 while tilting, it is not necessary to open the insertion / removal portion 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the image display means 393 The moving distance can be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted / removed along the guide rail 611, but the insertion / removal direction may be the vertical direction or the oblique direction in the rear view, in addition to the horizontal direction.

  When the image display unit 393 is inserted into and removed from the guide rail 611 in an inclined posture, the insertion side of the image display unit 393 in the inclined posture is held by the holding unit, and then the image display unit 393 is moved to the guide rail 611 side. Although it is desirable to tilt, the holding portion may be in contact with the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined posture, or the tip side may be in contact with the image display means 393 when it reaches a predetermined mounting position. . In addition, when the distal end side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611, the restricting portion 616 with which the distal end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact is also one of the holding portions. When the image display means 393 reaches the predetermined mounting position, the insertion portion 615 of the guide rail 611 is not necessary when the distal end side of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the holding portion.

  The display means mounting unit 453 moves the image display means 393 to the guide rail 611 when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side. If the push-in means 623 for pushing into the mounting position along 611 is provided, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably moved along the guide rail 611 to the mounting position. The pushing means 623 is preferably provided on the side opposite to the movement direction of the image display means 393 to the mounting position on the rear end side of the image display means 393, but may be provided in the middle of the movement direction of the image display means 393. Is possible.

  Further, when the image display unit 393 is moved from the inclined posture to the guide rail 611 side, the pushing unit 623 presses the pressed portion 624 on the image display unit 393 side by the inclined pressing guide unit 625 to display the image. It is desirable that the means 393 is configured to guide to the mounting position, but the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side is formed in an inclined shape, and the pressed guide portion 625 has a rod shape that contacts the pressed portion 624. It is also possible to configure a spherical shape or other shapes. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 300 but can be similarly implemented in other game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

  108 to 158 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 108 to 113, this pachinko machine 300 includes an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 301, and a front door 306 is opened and closed on the front side of the front frame 302. Arranged freely. The outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 constitute a gaming machine main body.

  The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via the first hinge 303 so as to be openable and detachable, and the front door 306 is pivotally attached to the front frame 302 via the second hinge 307 so as to be openable and detachable. The front frame 302 and the front door 306 can be locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 by locking means 304 on the side opposite to the hinges 303 and 307.

  The outer frame 301 includes a pair of left and right vertical frame members 341 and 342, an upper horizontal frame member 343 that connects the upper ends of the vertical frame members 341 and 342 to the left and right, and a lower end of the vertical frame members 341 and 342 to the left and right. The lower horizontal frame member 344 to be connected and the decorative member 310 that is disposed forward of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and connects the left and right vertical frame members 341 and 342 are formed in a rectangular shape.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the lower horizontal frame member 344 is provided in a substantially horizontal shape in the front-rear and left-right directions, and a substantially entire lower surface thereof contacts the floor surface F and supports the outer frame 301 in an upright state. It becomes the 1st support part 645 for self-supporting. The decorative member 310 has a hollow shape made of a synthetic resin and has a rear member 310a disposed between the left and right vertical frame members 341 and 342 on the lower horizontal frame member 344 and a front member disposed on the front side of the rear member 310a. Member 310b. The rear member 310a and the front member 310b are joined back and forth by a fixture 310c such as a screw at a plurality of locations in the left-right direction.

  The lower part of the rear member 310 a protrudes to the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 344. The front member 310b corresponds to the rear member 310a, and has a concavo-convex shape and other decorations on the front side. As shown in FIG. 114, the lower surface 310d of the decoration member 310 is located slightly above the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and in the vicinity of the front end on the lower surface 310d side, a second support portion that protrudes downward is provided. 646 is provided in substantially the entire length in the left-right direction.

  The lower surface of the second support portion 646 is substantially the same height as the first support portion 645 on the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344 or slightly higher than the first support portion 645, and the outer frame 301 is flat on the floor surface. When placed on F or the like, it grounds together with the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and supports the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 in a substantially vertical standing state.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity of the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine 300 is between the rear end of the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the front end of the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310, the outer frame 301 Alternatively, the entire pachinko machine 300 can be stably erected in a substantially vertical state, and the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine is compared with the case where only the first support portion 645 on the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is grounded. The entire machine 300 can be made to stand upright in a stable manner.

  When installing the pachinko machine 300 in the island facility 796a, as shown in FIG. 109, the outer frame 301 is placed and fixed on the receiving frame 796b. In general, the first support portion 645 is generally formed on the lower surface side of the lower horizontal frame member 344. However, the first support portion 645 need not be provided on the substantially entire lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and may be provided continuously in the left-right direction on the rear end side, or provided at the intermediate portion and the left and right end portions. For example, a plurality may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

  Moreover, although the 2nd support part 646 is provided in the left-right direction in the lower surface of the front member 310b, you may provide in the lower surface ranging over both the rear member 310a and the front member 310b. Further, a plurality of the second support portions 646 may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction, such as provided at the intermediate portion and the left and right end portions.

  The second support portion 646 of the decoration member 310 can also be provided as shown in FIG. 115 (a) or (b). 115 (a) is provided with front protrusions 647 that protrude from the lower side to the front side at substantially the entire length in the left-right direction or both left and right ends, and the lower surface of the decoration member 310 including the front protrusions 647. Is substantially the second support portion 646.

  Also in this case, the lower horizontal frame member 344 is formed by making the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 including the front protrusion 647 substantially the same height as the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, or slightly higher or lower. Since the first support portion 645 and the second support portion 646 on the lower surface 310d on the decorative member 310 side including the front projecting portion 647 are grounded, the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 can be made independent with good stability. .

  115 (b) is provided with a second support portion 646 so as to protrude downward from the front protruding portion 647 of the decorative member 310. When the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 is higher than the first support portion 645 on the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344, the lower side from the front projecting portion 647 of the decorative member 310, as shown in FIG. By providing the second support portion 646 so as to protrude to the outside, both the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are grounded, and the outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine The entire 300 can be made stable and independent.

  The front frame 302 is provided with a game board mounting portion 311 on the upper side and a lower mounting portion 312 on the lower side thereof, and the game board 313 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting portion 311, and the lower mounting portion 312 is equipped with a launching means 327, a lower speaker 325a, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the game board 313 is provided with a guide rail 387 that guides the game ball fired by the launching means 327 (see FIG. 110) to the upper side of the game area 323 in an annular shape. A liquid crystal type image display means 393 and a center case 388 corresponding to the front side of the image display means 393 are disposed on the front and rear sides of the game board 313 at the center of the area 323. In the game area 323, various game parts such as a normal symbol starting means 654, a special symbol starting means 655, a variable winning means 404, a normal winning means 405 and the like are arranged around the center case 388.

  The center case 388 is provided with a display window 656 corresponding to the display screen of the image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal display, and the normal symbol display means 657, the special symbol display means 658, Holding number display means 659 and the like are provided. The image display means 393 constitutes an effect symbol display means 660, a special reserved number display means 661, an operation guidance display means 662, and the like.

  The normal symbol display means 657 is for variably displaying the normal symbol, and is composed of, for example, two light emitters (for example, LEDs) corresponding to two types of normal symbols “◯” and “×”. Under the condition that the starting means 654 detects a game ball, the two light emitters flash alternately for a predetermined time, and the hit determination random number value acquired when the normal symbol starting means 654 detects the game ball is predetermined. When the value matches the hit determination value, the “○” side illuminant corresponding to the hit state emits light, and in other cases, the “×” side illuminant corresponding to the disengagement state emits light. , Each blinking ends.

  When the normal symbol starting means 654 detects a game ball during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display means 657 or the normal profit state described later, the normal reserved number display means 659 is a hit determination random number value acquired at the time of detection. Is stored with a predetermined upper limit reserved number (for example, 4) as the limit, so the number of stored random number values (hereinafter referred to as the normal reserved number) is displayed based on the number of light emitting bodies equal to the upper limit reserved number Then, the player is notified of the number of normally reserved items at that time.

  The special symbol starting means 655 is for starting the symbol variation by the special symbol display means 658, and includes an upper start winning means 655a and a lower start winning means 655b. The upper start winning means 655a is a non-opening / closing type. The lower start winning means 655b is an openable and closable type that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (or difficult to enter) and an open state in which the game ball can enter (or easy to enter). When a normal profit state occurs when the stop symbol after the change of 657 is in a hit state, the closed state is opened for a predetermined time.

  The special symbol display means 658 is composed of one or a plurality of, for example, one segment display means capable of variably displaying one special symbol, and the special symbol starting means 655 is an upper start winning means 655a or lower. A special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the condition that a game ball wins the start winning means 655b, and the jackpot determination random number acquired when winning the start winning means 655a, 655b is a predetermined jackpot determination value. When they match, the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode (specific mode), and in other cases, it is stopped in a disengagement mode.

  When the special ball starting number 655 wins a game ball during the special symbol fluctuation display or special profit state, the special reserved number display means 661 has a predetermined jackpot determination random number value or the like acquired at the time of winning. Since the upper limit hold number (for example, 4 each) is stored as a limit, the stored number of jackpot determination random number values (hereinafter referred to as the special hold number) is displayed, and the special hold number at that time is notified to the player. It is like that.

  The effect symbol display means 660 displays the effect symbols variably in parallel with the special symbol variability display by the special symbol display means 658, and one or more (eg, three in the left-right direction) effect symbols 663a to 663c. Are displayed on the display screen of the image display means 393 together with various effect images. Then, when the game ball wins any of the start winning means 655a and 655b of the special symbol starting means 655, the effect symbol display means 660 produces according to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns simultaneously with the start of the variation of the special symbols. The design symbols 663a to 663c are started to change, and the effect symbols 663a to 663c are stopped in a predetermined order such as left, right, and middle so that the special symbols are stopped at the same time as the change stop. When the special symbol stops in the big win mode, the effect symbols 663a to 663c also stop in the big hit effect mode, and when the special symbol stops in the off mode, the effect symbols 663a to 663c also stop in the off effect mode.

  The variable winning means 404 is an opening / closing type provided with an open / close plate 404a that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball can be won and a closed state in which a prize cannot be won, and the special symbol after the special symbol display means 658 changes is displayed. When a special profit state occurs in a big win mode, the opening / closing plate 404a is opened to the front side according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game ball dropped thereon is awarded to the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 113, the front door 306 includes a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the front frame 302, and a game area 323 is provided in the door base 322. , An upper speaker 666a, 666b and a lower speaker 667a, 667b disposed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the viewing window 665, and a pair of first left and right first disposed on the left and right sides of the viewing window 665. A side unit 668a and a second side unit 668b, and a front projecting unit (front lower unit) 669 projecting to the front side below the viewing window 665 are provided. The rear sides of the lower speakers 667a and 667b are covered with protective covers 670a and 670b for preventing the insertion of unauthorized members such as piano wires from the front side of the lower speakers 667a and 667b.

  The viewing window 665 is provided in the door base 322 corresponding to the game area 323, and is closed by a glass unit 340 that is detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 322 as shown in FIGS. 109, 112, and 113. It is peeling off. The glass unit 340 includes two front and rear glass plates 671a through which the game area 323 can be seen through and a holding frame 671b that holds the outside of the two front and rear glass plates 671a. The upper side is detachably fixed to the back side of the door base 322 by a pair of right and left fixing means 674. Note that the glass plate 671a constitutes a visual recognition plate and is generally colorless and transparent. However, if the game area 323 can be seen through, the glass plate 671a does not need to be colorless and transparent, and is colored and transparent. A synthetic resin plate or the like may be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, the front overhanging unit 669 has a substantially triangular shape with a central portion protruding forward, and the front overhanging unit 669 includes Is provided with an operation effect means 678 for operation effects, an upper plate (launch ball storage unit) 328 for storing game balls for launch, and a lower plate (excess ball storage unit) 329 for storing surplus balls, In addition, a firing handle 330 for launching operation is provided on the side opposite to the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 with respect to the operation effect means 678.

  The front door 306 includes an upper glass door provided with a viewing window 665, a glass unit 340, and the like, and a lower opening / closing door provided with an upper plate 328, a lower plate 329, an operation effect means 678, a firing handle 330, and the like. The glass door and the open / close door can be configured to be opened and closed separately.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the door base 322 includes an upper base portion 681 disposed in the left and right direction above the window hole 324, and vertical base portions 682a and 682b disposed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the viewing window 665. A lower base portion 683 arranged in the left-right direction below the visual recognition window 665, and the lower base portion 683 is formed in a wide shape vertically corresponding to the front side of the lower mounting portion 312 of the front frame 302. Yes.

  On the back side of the door base 322, a horizontal reinforcing member 684 in the left-right direction is provided on the upper end side of the upper base portion 681, and vertical reinforcing members 685a, 685b in the vertical direction are provided outside the left and right vertical base portions 682a, 682b. Lower reinforcing members 686 are attached to 683, respectively. The lower reinforcing member 686 has a wide shape corresponding to substantially the entire lower base portion 683, and the lower end sides of the vertical reinforcing members 685a and 685b are overlapped in the front and rear at both left and right ends and connected by screws or the like, and on the upper end side. A receiving frame 673 that is bent rearward is provided. Each reinforcing member 684, 685a, 685b, 686 is made of sheet metal.

  The joint portion between the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322 and the left and right vertical base portions 682a and 682b, and the joint portion between the lower base portion 683 and the left and right vertical base portions 682a and 682b correspond to the window holes 324 on the inner peripheral side. The upper speakers 666a and 666b and the lower speakers 667a and 667b are respectively attached to the respective joint portions through the speaker attachment portions so as to face forward.

  108, 113, 114, and 118 to 120, the locking means 304 includes a front frame locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the front frame 302 to the outer frame 301 in a closed state, A front door locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the door 306 to the front frame 302 in a closed state, a cylinder-type release operation means 688 provided on the front door 306 side so that the door 306 can be released by a key operation, and a release operation An interlocking mechanism 689 that interlocks the means 688 with the front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism is provided.

  In the front frame locking mechanism, when the front frame 302 is closed to the outer frame 301 side around the first hinge 303, a pair of upper and lower front frame engaging claws (not shown) on the front frame 302 side It engages and locks with a pair of upper and lower engaging portions (not shown). When the front door 306 is closed around the second hinge 307 to the front frame 302 side, the front door locking mechanism has a pair of upper and lower front door engaging claws (not shown) on the front door 306 side. It engages and locks with a pair of upper and lower engaging portions (not shown). The front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism can be interlocked with the release operation means 688 via the interlocking mechanism 689.

  The interlocking mechanism 689 includes an interlocking member 691 supported by a support plate 690 bent backward from the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686. The interlocking member 691 is moved forward by one of the vertical movements of the interlocking member 691. The front door locking mechanism is released by the other operation of the frame locking mechanism. The interlocking member 691 is supported by a support plate 690 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction via a pair of upper and lower guide pins 692 and the like.

  The release operation means 688 includes a key insertion cylinder portion 693 that passes through the front door 306 in the front-rear direction, and a rotating claw 695 that is detachably fixed to the distal end side of the operation shaft 694 of the cylinder portion 693 with a screw or the like. The rotation claw 695 slides the interlocking member 691 in the vertical direction when the key inserted in the cylinder portion 693 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions around the operation shaft 694.

  The cylinder portion 693 has a rear end mounting portion 696 fixed directly or indirectly to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686, and a rotation of the cylinder portion 693 fixed to the operation shaft 694 in the front-rear direction. A moving claw 695 is provided.

  In the locking means 304, when the front frame 302 is closed around the first hinge 303, the front frame locking mechanism locks the front frame 302 in the closed state, and when the front door 306 is closed around the second hinge 307, the front frame 302 is moved forward. The door locking mechanism locks the front door 306 in the closed state. Then, when unlocking the front frame 302 and / or the front door 306, a key is inserted into the cylinder portion 693 and rotated around the operation shaft 694 in the forward direction or the reverse direction, via the rotation claw 695. Thus, the interlocking member 691 is actuated upward or downward. Then, the interlocking member 691 operates upward or downward, and the corresponding front frame locking mechanism or front door locking mechanism releases the locked state, so that the front frame 302 and / or the front door 306 are hinged 303, 307. It can be opened around.

  On the back side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, a fraud prevention member 697 made of sheet metal is provided outside the release operation means 688 in the left-right direction. That is, on the back side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, a contact wall 698 that contacts the front end of the front frame 302 on the outer end side, and protrudes rearward from the inside of the contact wall 698, and the inner periphery of the front frame 302 The fraud prevention edge part 699 located in is integrally formed. However, the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 has a protruding portion 685c that protrudes outward in order to secure an arrangement space for the mounting portion 696, the rotating claw 695, and the like of the cylinder portion 693 of the release operation means 688. Is formed. Therefore, the door base 322 is provided with a notch portion 699a in which a fraud prevention edge portion 699 is notched in a portion corresponding to the protrusion 685c.

  Therefore, the fraud prevention member 697 is provided so as to close the notch 699a. The fraud prevention member 697 is disposed on the extension along the fraud prevention edge portion 699, and a mounting portion 697a bent inward from the front end side is fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 with a screw or the like. Yes. Therefore, it is impossible to illegally open the front frame 302 or the front door 306 by inserting an unauthorized member between the front frame 302 and the front door 306 and operating the release operation means 688 illegally.

  The fraud prevention member 697 has a notch 697b on the side close to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 so as not to interfere with the mounting portion 696 and the rotating claw 695 of the cylinder portion 693. The notch 697 b is approximately the same height as the front end side of the abutting wall 698, and the abutting wall 698 prevents an unauthorized member from being inserted between the front frame 302 and the front door 306. A tamper-proof member 697 protrudes from the front end to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 116 and 121 to 125, a pair of left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702 a and 702 b projecting forward from the door base 322 are integrally formed on the upper portion of the door base 322. The speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b are substantially square when viewed from the front with openings 703 and 704 formed on both front and rear sides, and the upper speakers 666a and 666b are detachably inserted from the rear opening 704 side. Is contained.

  The speaker mounting protrusion 702a is provided with receiving portions 705b and 705c for the side units 668a and 668b. That is, the speaker mounting protrusion 702a on the hinges 303 and 307 side is provided with receiving portions 705b and 705c for the side units 668a and 668b on the left and right sides of the flat portion 705a, and the receiving portions 705b and 705c are provided on the receiving portions 705b and 705c. The upper surfaces of the side units 668a and 668b are substantially flush with the flat portion 705a. In addition, a receiving portion 705d for the second side unit 668b is provided on the upper side of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper speakers 666a and 666b include a magnet 707, a coil bobbin 708, a voice coil 709, a diaphragm 710, a center cap 711 and the like in a speaker frame 706, and a front cover 712 is provided on the front side of the speaker frame 706. It is installed. The front cover 712 is fitted in the opening 704 on the front side of the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b.

  Each upper speaker 666a, 666b has a light guide 715 arranged in an inner space 713 on the inner periphery side such as a magnet 707, and an LED substrate on which an LED 716 is mounted in the vicinity of the rear end side of the light guide 715. 717, and when the LED 716 of the LED substrate 717 emits light, the light is emitted from the light guide 715 to the front side through the center cap 711 and the front cover 712.

  The light guide 715 and the center cap 711 are made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover 712 has a large number of small holes 712a so that sound and light come out to the front side. The light guide 715 is inserted into the through hole 706b of the rear wall portion 706a of the speaker frame 706 and is detachably supported. In addition, an LED substrate 717 is detachably fixed to the back side of the rear wall portion 706a with a screw or the like so that the LED 716 faces the light guide 715 in the front-rear direction. The front cover 712 may be colorless and transparent, colored and transparent, or opaque. In the case where the front cover 712 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, an irregular diffused portion having an irregular shape is formed on the back side thereof so that the front cover 712 itself emits light by the light from the LED 716. Good.

  In this way, by assembling light emitting means such as the light guide 715 and the LED board 717 to the upper speakers 666a and 666b, the light from the LED 716 on the LED board 717 is forwarded from the light guide 715 through the center cap 711 and the front cover 712. Can be irradiated. Therefore, the upper speakers 666a and 666b can be used for the light emission effect in addition to the generation of the sound effect, and an unprecedented effect can be expected.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the first side unit 668a is a common part used in common for a plurality of types of pachinko machines 300, whereas the second side unit 668b is a common part used in the plurality of types of pachinko machines 300. As shown in FIG. 128, a design peculiar to a specific model of the pachinko machine 300 is provided, such as an upper protrusion 730 described later.

  For example, when manufacturing a plurality of types of pachinko machines 300, the first side unit 668a is commonly used, and the second side unit 668b having a specific configuration is combined to visually recognize the front door 306. A peripheral portion of the window 665 is formed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily manufacture different types of pachinko machines 300 by changing the design of the second side unit 668b and other configurations while commonly using the first side unit 668a. Can do.

  Depending on the model of the pachinko machine 300, the design of the first side unit 668a and other configurations can be changed. In that case, the door base 322 side is common to a plurality of models. Therefore, in any of the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, electronic components necessary for each model such as upper speakers 666a and 666b for generating sound effects, lower speakers 667a and 667b, etc. Is mounted on the door base 322 side, and electronic components specific to a specific model are incorporated in the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, or the second side unit 668b.

  The first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b are configured in substantially the same manner in the lower front part from the upper speakers 666a and 666b, and are arranged on the front surface of the door base 322, and a large number of LEDs 720 are mounted on the front surface. LED substrate 721, a light emitting decorative cover 722 having a diffuse reflection portion 722 a formed therein and covering LED substrate 721 from the front side, and an internal lens 723 disposed on the front side of LED substrate 721, and LED 720 of LED substrate 721. The light emitting decoration cover 722 is caused to emit light by the light from.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 and 126 to 128, the LED substrate 721 is divided into a plurality of parts, and the two are connected by a connector 724 or the like. The light emitting decorative cover 722 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and has an irregular reflection part 722a having an uneven shape on the inner surface on the back side.

  The light emitting decorative cover 722 has an upper side 724a protruding forward from the lower side 724b, and the upper side 724a overlaps the receiving portions 705b and 705c of the speaker mounting projection 702a. The space between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decorative cover 722 is large on the upper side and small on the lower side.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 to 132, the inner lens 723 has through holes 725 corresponding to the LEDs 720 on the upper side 724 a where the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decoration cover 722 is large, Concave and spherical concave lens portions 726 are formed on the front side or the back side corresponding to the LEDs 720 on the lower side 724b where the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decoration cover 722 is small.

  Therefore, when each LED 720 of the LED substrate 721 emits light, the light from the LED 720 directly irradiates the diffuse reflection portion 722a of the light emitting decorative cover 722 through the through hole 725 on the upper side 724a of the light emitting decorative cover 722. Since the distance between 721 and the light emitting decoration cover 722 is large, the light from the LED 720 irradiates the irregular reflection portion 722a while appropriately diffusing.

  On the other hand, on the lower side 724 b where the distance between the LED substrate 721 and the light emitting decoration cover 722 is small, the light from the LED 720 is diffused by the concave lens part 726 and irradiates the irregular reflection part 722 a of the light emitting decoration cover 722. Therefore, light emission unevenness between the upper side 724a and the lower side 724b on the light emitting decoration cover 722 side can be prevented as much as possible, or light emission unevenness can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the concave lens portion 726 includes a conical recess 726a formed on the front surface of the internal lens 723 and a spherical protrusion formed on the back surface of the internal lens 723 corresponding to the conical recess 726a. Part 726b. The concave lens portion 726 only needs to have a light diffusion function, and a specific cross-sectional shape is not a problem.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 116, an upper projecting portion 730 that projects forward is provided between the left and right upper speakers 666a and 666b on the upper portion of the second side unit 668b. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112, 116, and 126 to 128, the second side unit 668b is substantially L-shaped in front view across the upper speaker 666a, the upper speaker 666b, and the lower speaker 667b. A unit frame 731 made of synthetic resin, a unit reinforcing plate 732 made of sheet metal that reinforces the unit frame 731 from the back side, and an upper protruding portion 730 protruding from the upper side of the unit frame 731 to the front side. First and second positioning means 733 and 734 on both ends of the two-side unit 668b, first to third locking means 735 to 737 arranged in a distributed manner, screw type first arranged in a dispersed manner The first to third fixing means 738 to 740 are detachably mounted from the back side of the door base 322.

  The second side unit 668b is provided with an LED 720, a light emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, and the like on the front side of the vertical base portion 682a of the door base 322. However, since the second side unit 668b includes a unit frame 731 and a unit reinforcing plate 732, an LED 720, a light emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, and the like are provided on the front side of the unit frame 731.

  An upper protrusion 730 that protrudes forward is provided between the left and right upper speakers 666a and 666b at the upper part of the second side unit 668b. The space between the upper speaker 666b and the lower speaker 667b of the second side unit 668b is substantially the same as that of the front side of the first side unit 668a, and the LED 716 is mounted on the front side in the inside. A substrate 717 is disposed, and the light emitting decoration cover 722 is caused to emit light by light from the LED 716.

  116, 123, and 124, the second side unit 668b is provided with an opening 741 corresponding to the speaker mounting protrusion 702b for the upper speaker 666b, on the side opposite to the opening 741. The end portion overlaps the speaker mounting protrusion 702b for the upper speaker 666b from above. A speaker mounting protrusion 702b can be inserted into and removed from the opening 741, and the upper side wall 741a of the opening 741 can be placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 705d of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b.

  The speaker mounting protrusion 702a has a receiving portion 705c for the second side unit 668b, and the end of the second side unit 668b on the speaker mounting protrusion 702a side is as shown in FIG. An overlapping portion 742 that overlaps the portion 705c from above is provided.

  By adopting such a configuration, when the second side unit 668b is mounted on the front side of the door base 322, the speaker mounting protrusion 702b is used as a guide for the opening 741, and the speaker mounting protrusion 702a is overlapped. The second side unit 668b can be easily disposed at a predetermined mounting position on the door base 322 side while being used for guiding 742, respectively.

  After the opening 741 and the overlapping portion 742 of the second side unit 668b correspond to the left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b, the second side unit 668b is opened through the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b. Positioning or the like can be performed with the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b supporting substantially the entire load on the second side unit 668b side by depositing it on the base 322 side. Therefore, it is not necessary to always support the load of the second side unit 668b, and the burden on the worker at the time of mounting can be reduced.

  The upper protruding portion 730 has a flat shape that is thin in the vertical direction, and the upper surface is substantially flush with the upper surface of the front door 306, and the left and right center side protrudes in an arc shape or a triangular shape to the front side. At the end of the upper protrusion 730 on the hinge 303, 307 side, a bent portion 732a (see FIG. 121) that is bent in an L shape is provided on the front side of the unit reinforcing plate 732 so as not to interfere with the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, and 132 to 134, on the front surface side of the upper protrusion 730, a light emitting display board 744 having a blower port 743 formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, Wind guide means 745 for guiding the wind toward the player during the game is provided in the front and rear, and the light emitting display plate 744 and the light emitting display portions 744a are arranged on both the left and right sides of the wind guide means 745. The wind guide means 745 has a louver structure having a plurality of horizontal bars 745a in the vertical direction and a plurality of vertical bars 745b in the left-right direction.

  The wind guide means 745 guides the wind to an angle and a range where any player can feel the air blown from the upper center regardless of the height of the player. The wind guide means 745 may be configured so that the air blowing direction can be adjusted vertically and horizontally.

  In the upper protrusion 730, there are provided a blowing means 746 for sending wind to the blowing port 743, and an LED substrate 748 in which an LED 747 is mounted on the front surface and disposed in the vicinity of the back corresponding to each light emitting display plate 744. It has been. The air blowing means 746 is a sirocco fan or the like in which the impeller 746b is incorporated in the air blowing case 746a, and is incorporated in the attachment case 749, and sucks outside air from the lower suction port 746c and blows air from the discharge port 746d. The air is sent to the air blowing port 743 via the path 750.

  Note that the air blowing means 746 is configured so that the impeller 746b can rotate about the longitudinal axis and is flat in the vertical direction. The air blowing means 746 operates continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time and blows air to the player when the player enters a predetermined gaming state such as an operation of an effect button 813 described later. .

  The mounting case 749 on the front side of the LED substrate 748, the light emitting display plate 744, and the wind guide means 745 are light transmissive, and the light emitting display plate 744 emits light by the light from the LED 747.

  In the upper protruding portion 730, an LED substrate 754 provided with LEDs 753 on the front surface is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting display portion 744a. Each member on the front side of the LED substrate 754 has light transmittance, and the light emitting display portion 744a emits light by the light from the LED 753.

  As shown in FIGS. 116 and 122, the first positioning means 733 is disposed on the top end side of the second side unit 668b, and the second positioning means 734 is disposed on the side lower end side of the second side unit 668b. Has been. The first positioning means 733 includes a positioning recess 733a formed in the receiving portion 705c of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a, and a positioning protrusion 733b formed in the overlapping portion 742 at the end of the second side unit 668b. The positioning protrusion 733b and the positioning recess 733a position the upper tip side of the second side unit 668b in the front-rear and left-right directions.

  The positioning recess 733a and the positioning protrusion 733b are formed in an L-shape in plan view on the inner part of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. The first positioning means 733 may be provided with a positioning recess 733a in the overlapping portion 742 and a positioning protrusion 733b in the receiving portion 705c. Further, the first positioning means 733 may have another structure.

  As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the second positioning means 734 is bent at the positioning hole 734a formed in the door base 322 or its vertical reinforcing member 685b and the lower end side of the unit reinforcing plate 732. Positioning protrusions 734b, and the positioning hole 734a and the positioning protrusions 734b position the lower side of the side portion of the second side unit 668b in the left-right direction with respect to the door base 322.

  Between the positioning hole 734a and the positioning protrusion 734b, there is a margin in the vertical direction necessary for engaging and disengaging the locking means 735 to 737 as indicated by a two-dot chain line. The second positioning means 734 may be provided with a positioning hole 734 a in the unit reinforcing plate 732 and a positioning protrusion 734 b in the door base 322. Further, the second positioning means 734 may have another structure.

  Accordingly, when the second side unit 668b is mounted, the second side unit 668b is provided by the plurality of first to third locking means 735 to 737 and the first to third fixing means 738 to 740 arranged in the intermediate portion. The first and second positioning means 733 and 734 are provided on both end sides of the second side unit 668b, so that the right and left positions on the both end sides of the second side unit 668b can be ensured. Can be regulated. Therefore, there is an advantage that a position shift or the like on the lower end side of the second side unit 668b due to mischief or the like of the player can be prevented.

  As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are arranged at three locations of the upper tip side, the side upper end side, and the side middle portion of the second side unit 668 b. And a second locking means provided with locking claws 735a to 737a integrally provided downward on the unit reinforcing plate 732 and hole-shaped locking portions 735b to 737b provided on the vertical reinforcing member 685b. 736 is provided with clamping means 752.

  The protruding lengths of the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are the maximum for the third locking means 737, and the first locking means 735 and the second locking means 736 It becomes shorter in order. That is, the engagement lengths 735c to 737c between the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 and the locking portions 735b to 737b are as follows: engagement length 737c> engagement length 735c> The engagement length is 736c.

  The engagement lengths 735c to 737c of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are set such that the engagement length 737c> the engagement length 735c> the engagement length 736c, and the first to third engagements. When the locking claws 735a to 737a of the locking means 735 to 737 are engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b and the second side unit 668b is locked to the door base 322, the third locking means 737, the first locking means 737, The first to third locking means 735 to 737 can be sequentially engaged in the order of the locking means 735 and the second locking means 736. Accordingly, the locking claws 735a to 737a can be easily engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b as compared with the case where the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are simultaneously engaged.

  The engagement length 735c to 737c of any one of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 may be maximized, and the other two engagement lengths may be substantially the same. For example, the engagement length 737c of the third locking means 737 is maximized, and the engagement lengths 735c and 736c of the first and second locking means 735 and 736 are substantially the same length shorter than the engagement length 737c. It is also possible to do. In this case, when the second side unit 668b is mounted, the locking means 735 to 737 move from the lower third locking means 737 to the upper first and second locking means 735 and 736. Engage sequentially.

  As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), the second locking means 736 is compared with other locking means 735 and 737 by arranging a plurality of locking claws 736a and locking portions 736b on the left and right. Clamping means 752 is provided to tighten the locking claw 736a after engaging with the locking portion 736b toward the locking portion 736b.

  The clamp means 752 is a U-shaped bracket 752a in plan view fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b on the lower side of the locking portion 736b, and an inverted U-shape in plan view pivoted around the support shaft 752b by the bracket 752a. A clamp lever 752c, and a U-shaped clamp tool 752e that is coupled to the middle of the clamp lever 752c by a coupling shaft 752d and engages with an upper engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a from above. The clamp lever 752c is provided with an operation portion 752f on the free end side.

  When the second side unit 668b is mounted, the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are engaged with the locking parts 735b to 737b, and then the clamping tool 752e of the clamping means 752 is attached. Engage with the engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a. Then, the clamp lever 752c is pivoted downward around the support shaft 752b, and the vertical reinforcing member 685b side from the line connecting the engagement position of the clamp tool 752e with the locking claw 736a and the support shaft 752b. When it comes to contact with the vertical reinforcing member 685b beyond the distance, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is tightened toward the engaging portion 736b in the engaging direction. Therefore, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is stronger than the other first and third locking means 735 and 737.

  Therefore, mechanical vibration of the second side unit 668b can be prevented as compared with the case where the engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is merely engaged from the upper side. It is possible to reliably prevent loosening due to vibration of the screw-type first to third fixing means 738 to 740.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the first to third fixing means 738 to 740 are arranged at three locations, that is, the upper end side of the second side unit 668 b and the upper and lower ends of the side portion. The first to third fixing means 738 to 740 include screw holes 738 a to 740 a formed in the unit reinforcing plate 732, and fixing screws with operating portions 738 b to 740 b inserted into the door base 322 from the side reinforcing member 684 side. 738c to 740c, and by screwing the fixing screws 738c to 740c into the screw holes 738a to 740a, the unit reinforcing plate 732 is fastened and fixed to the door base 322 side from the back side.

  The speaker mounting protrusion 702a on the hinges 303 and 307 side is formed with a screw insertion portion 702c on the upper protrusion 730 side in the front-rear direction, and the fixing screw 738c is inserted into the screw insertion portion 702c from the unit reinforcing plate 732 side. Has been. The fixing screw 738c is screwed into a screw hole 738a formed at the tip of the bent portion 732a of the unit reinforcing plate 732 on the rear side of the screw insertion portion 702c.

  The first to third fixing screws 738c to 740c are inserted across the transverse reinforcing member 684 or the longitudinal reinforcing member 685b and the supporting members 738d to 740d fixed to the transverse reinforcing member 684 or the longitudinal reinforcing member 685b. Further, anti-separation members 738e to 740e such as snap rings are provided between the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b and the supporting members 738d to 740d. Note that the outer periphery of the fixing screws 738c to 740c is chamfered so as to be easily inserted into the screw holes 738a to 740a and to be injured by catching fingers.

  On the front frame 302 side, as shown in FIG. 140, stepped portions 302a corresponding to the operating portions 739b and 740b of the fixing screws 739c and 740c are inside the outer peripheral wall 302b. When the fixing screws 739c and 740c are tightened, the stepped portion 302a is provided with the fixing screws 739c and 740c even when the front door 306 is closed to the front frame 302 as shown in FIG. The front door 306 can be closed to the front frame 302 side without interfering with the operation portions 739b and 740b.

  However, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the front door 306 is to be closed to the front frame 302 without tightening the fixing screws 739c and 740c, the stepped portion 302a is fixed to the fixing screws 739c, It interferes with the operation parts 739b and 740b of 740c, and a gap is formed between the front frame 302 and the front door 306, and cannot be closed.

  Therefore, when the second side unit 668b is mounted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an error such as closing the front door 306 to the front frame 302 side without forgetting to tighten the fixing screws 739c and 740c of the second and third fixing means 739 and 740. can do. The unit reinforcing plate 732 is integrally formed by punching a sheet metal material into a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, but may be divided into a plurality of pieces.

  A harness (not shown) connected to the air blowing means 746, the LEDs 747, 753, and the like of the second side unit 668b is connected to the inner relay board 755 in the upper protruding portion 730, as shown in FIG. A board-side connector 757 is attached to the inner relay board 755 corresponding to the opening 756 of the unit frame 731 or the unit reinforcing plate 732. As shown in FIG. 141, the unit-side harness 758 detachably connected to the board-side connector 757 is connected to the rear side of the front door 306 from the opening 756 through the opening 759 of the door base 322 in a state where a plurality of the unit-side harnesses are combined. Has been pulled out.

  On the rear side of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322, an upper relay substrate 760 that is long in the left-right direction is provided adjacent to the opening 759 at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction. The upper relay substrate 760 is disposed in an accommodation recess 761 formed in a narrow portion of the upper base portion 681. Two board-side connectors 762 and 763 are mounted on the upper relay board 760 on the left and right sides, and the connector 758a of the unit-side harness 758 is detachably connected to one of the board-side connectors 762.

  The connector 764a of the unit relay harness 764 is detachably connected to the other board side connector 763. A plurality of unit relay harnesses 764 are also collected, and the end portion on the opposite side of the hinges 303 and 307 passes through the vicinity of the upper side of the upper speaker 666b along the rear upper end of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322. After being pulled out in the left-right direction, it is pulled out from the opening 766 on the end side to the front side of the door base 322.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the relay harness 764 for the unit on the front side of the door base 322 extends to the vicinity of the upper side of the lower speaker 667b along the edge of the vertical base portion 682b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 of the door base 322. It is arranged in the vertical direction and is connected to the lower relay board (not shown) side of the lower base portion 683 side through the speaker cover 765b of the lower speaker 667b. Speaker covers 765a and 765b are disposed around the front side of the lower speakers 667a and 667b.

  Thus, by arranging the unit relay harness 764 in the vertical direction on the front side of the door base 322, a part of the locking means 304 is provided on the back side of the vertical base portion 682 b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 of the door base 322. A vertical reinforcing member 685b that also serves as a member can be disposed. Since the second side unit 668b is detachably disposed on the front side of the unit relay harness 764, maintenance inspection and the like of the unit relay harness 764 can be easily performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 111 and 117, the unit relay harness 764 disposed in the vertical direction on the front side of the vertical base portion 682 b of the door base 322 is covered with a protective cover 767 substantially in the vertical direction. The protective cover 767 has an L-shaped cross section, is disposed along the outer peripheral wall 767a of the vertical base portion 682b, and is detachably fixed to the door base 322 with a fixing tool such as a screw.

  As shown in FIG. 141, two board-side connectors 769a and 769b are provided at the upper end of the LED board 721 in the first side unit 668a in the rearward direction corresponding to the opening 768 of the door base 322. The harnesses 770a and 770b detachably connected to the board-side connectors 769a and 769b are connected to the LED boards 717a and 717b on the upper speaker 666a and 666b via the rear side of the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322. Yes. The two board-side connectors 769a and 769b are connected to the lower relay board or the like from the lower end side through the wiring pattern of the LED board 721.

  A speaker relay board 772 is provided in the vicinity of the upper speaker 666a on the rear side of the vertical base portion 682a on the hinges 303 and 307 side of the door base 322, and speaker-side harnesses 773a and 773b from the upper speakers 666a and 666b are provided. The speaker driving harness side speaker harness 774 is connected via a speaker relay board 772.

  The speaker relay board 772 is provided with three board-side connectors 775a, 775b, and 776, and speaker-side harnesses 773a and 773b from the upper speakers 666a and 666b are connected to the two board-side connectors 775a and 775b, respectively. A speaker relay harness 774 is detachably connected to one board-side connector 776. As shown in FIG. 141, the speaker relay harness 774 is arranged in the vertical direction along the vertical reinforcing member 685 a attached to the vertical base portion 682 a on the hinges 303 and 307 side of the door base 322, and is backed by the protective cover 777. Protected from the side.

  The speaker relay harness 774 and the protective cover 777 are vertically arranged between the vicinity of the upper speaker 666a and the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 683. The protective cover 777 has an L-shaped or U-shaped cross-section covering the speaker relay harness 774, and is arranged vertically along the vertical reinforcing member 685a. The protective cover 777 is attached to the back side of the door base 322 with a fixing tool such as a screw. It is fixed freely.

  As described above, by providing the speaker relay harness 774 on the back side of the vertical base portion 682a on the hinges 303 and 307 side of the door base 322, the speaker relay is performed regardless of the first side unit 668a on the front side of the vertical base portion 682a. Maintenance inspection and the like of the harness 774 can be easily performed.

  On the rear side of the protective cover 777, as shown in FIG. 142, there is a rib-like shape in which an insertion preventing portion 777a for preventing the insertion of an unauthorized member from between the front door 306 and the front frame 302 to the inside protrudes backward. Is provided. That is, on the hinges 303 and 307 side of the front frame 302, as shown in FIG. 142, an outer protrusion 778c and an inner protrusion 778d are provided in the vertical direction on the front wall 778b of the main body frame 778a. A reinforcing member 778e made of sheet metal is provided along the outer side of the outer protrusion 778c from the back side of the front wall 778b. The reinforcing member 778e has an inner bent portion 778f that is bent inward from the front end.

  The vertical reinforcing member 685a on the hinges 303 and 307 side of the door base 322 includes a rear bent portion 685a1 bent rearward along the inner peripheral wall portion 779a of the door base 322, and a rear end of the rear bent portion 685a1. An outer bent portion 685a2 that bends outward is provided over substantially the entire length in the vertical direction.

  Between the front door 306 and the front frame 302, when the front door 306 is closed to the front frame 302 around the hinges 303 and 307, the outer bent portion 685a2 of the front door 306 and the inner peripheral wall portion 779a The bending portion 778f of the reinforcing member 778e is inserted therebetween, so that a bending labyrinth 780 that prevents insertion of an unauthorized member is formed. An outer peripheral wall portion 779c is provided outside the inner peripheral wall portion 779a via an inclined wall portion 779b at the rear end, and the rear end of the light emitting decoration cover 722 is in contact with the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 779c.

  The rear wall portion 777b of the protective cover 777 is equivalent to the outer bent portion 685a2 of the vertical reinforcing member 685a or protrudes rearward from the outer bent portion 685a2, and an insertion blocking portion 777a protruding rearward from the rear wall portion 777b is provided. It is arranged in the vertical direction over the entire range from the vicinity of the upper speakers 666a and 666b to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base 683. The insertion preventing portion 777a is rib-shaped, and comes close to the inside of the inner protrusion 778d of the front frame 302 when the front door 306 is closed to the front frame 302 side. The protective cover 777 has an attachment portion 777c attached to the door base 322 with a fixing tool such as a screw.

  In this way, by providing the rib-shaped insertion blocking portion 777a protruding rearward from the rear wall portion 777b of the protective cover 777 along the longitudinal reinforcing member 685a, the illegal member is temporarily inserted through the bending maze 780. Even if this occurs, the insertion preventing portion 777a and the inner protrusion 778d can prevent further unauthorized members from entering. Further, since the insertion preventing portion 777a is provided in the protective cover 777, it is possible to easily carry out without the necessity of greatly changing the structure on the front door 306 side.

  In the upper base portion 681 of the door base 322, as shown in FIGS. 113, 121, 124, etc., a part or all of the upper speakers 666a, 666b, harnesses 764, 770a, 770b, 773a, 773b and the relay board 772 are provided. A pair of left and right upper back covers 781a and 781b are provided to be detachable. The upper back cover 781a on the hinge 303, 307 side is provided with a notch 781a1 corresponding to the first fixing means 738 so that the operation part 738b of the fixing screw 738c of the first fixing means 738 can be operated from the back side. Yes. The upper back cover 781b opposite to the hinges 303 and 307 is provided between the board-side connector 763 of the upper relay board 760 and the clamp means 752 so that the clamp means 752 can be operated.

  By providing the upper back covers 781a and 781b as described above, the door base 322 of the front door 306 is compared with the case where the upper speakers 666a and 666b, the harnesses 764, 770a, 770b, 773a, and 773b and the relay board 772 are exposed. The appearance of the upper back side of the can be improved.

  On the other hand, the substantially central portion of the upper base portion 681 in the left-right direction, that is, the opening 759 formed in the upper base portion 681 and the upper relay board 760 side to which the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 drawn from the opening 759 is connected. Upper back covers 781a and 781b are not provided at portions corresponding to the board-side connector 762. Therefore, the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 can be easily attached to and detached from the board side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760. At the same time, the fixing screw 738c and the clamping means 752 of the first fixing means 738 can be operated regardless of the upper back covers 781a and 781b. Therefore, the troublesomeness of attaching and detaching the upper back cover 781a and 781b each time the second side unit 668b is attached and detached can be eliminated.

  The upper back covers 781a and 781b can be attached and detached separately on the left and right, but the left and right upper back covers 781a and 781b can be connected and integrated. However, in this case, when attaching / detaching the second side unit 668b, the unit side harness 758 with respect to the board side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760 is used in order to attach / detach the left and right upper back covers 781a, 781b. It is necessary to attach and detach.

  As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, a front overhang unit 669 that projects from the door base 322 to the front side in a substantially triangular shape in a plan view is provided on the lower front side of the front door 306. Is provided. In the front projecting unit 669, an operation effect means 678 is arranged in the vertical direction on the center front end side, and the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 extend from the rear side of the operation effect means 678 to the hinges 303 and 307. Are arranged on the top and bottom, and a small hole group 679 is provided on the side opposite to the upper plate 328 and the lower plate 329 with respect to the operation effect means 678 for outputting the sound of the firing handle 330 and the lower speaker 325a to the front side.

  In addition, on the rear side of the lower part of the front door 306, as shown in FIG. 112, the game balls in the upper plate 328 are moved one by one to the launching means 327 in synchronization with the launching operation of the game balls of the launching means 327. A ball feeding means 680 for feeding is provided.

  The outer shape of the front overhanging unit 669 is formed by the lower decorative cover 331 and the like, and an operation means arrangement portion 785 for arranging the operation effect means 678 is located on the front side. The left and right front upper edge portions 786a and 786b are arranged so as to extend rearward from the operation means arrangement portion 785, and the lower plate recess portion 787a is recessed rearward under the front upper edge portions 786a and 786b. And a recess 787b for a handle.

  The lower dish recess 787a is provided with a lower dish opening 329a that opens to the front, and the rear side of the lower dish opening 329a is a lower dish 329. As shown in FIG. 143, the lower plate 329 extends from the vicinity of the hinges 303 and 307 to the rear side of the operation effect means 678 in the front overhanging unit 669. On the rear wall side of the lower plate 329, an inflow port 329b into which a game ball from the upper plate 328 flows is formed facing forward. The inflow port 329b is displaced from the lower plate opening 329a on the rear side of the operation effect means 678.

  In the lower plate 329 having such a configuration, it is possible to store surplus spheres in the back side portion of the operation effect means 678 as compared with the conventional one up to the left side of the operation effect means 678. Sufficient storage can be secured. Further, since the inflow port 329b of the upper plate 328 is deviated to the rear side of the operation effecting means 678, the game balls flowing into the lower plate 329 from the inflow port 329b are efficiently sent from the back of the lower plate 329. Can be stored.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the upper plate 328 is open on the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669 and extends from the vicinity of the hinges 303 and 307 to the back side of the operation effect means 678. A game ball is supplied to the ball feeding means 680 through the rear supply passage 328a.

  The handle recess 787b is provided with a holding cylinder portion 330a for holding the firing handle 330 in a rotatable manner. The firing handle 330 protruding to the front side of the handle recess 787b can be rotated in the holding cylinder portion 330a. Is attached. The firing handle 330 is disposed at a position higher than the lower surface of the front overhang unit 669.

  On the upper surface side of the front projecting unit 669, as shown in FIG. 117, a flat first operation panel portion 782 is provided between the operation means arranging portion 785, the upper plate 328, and the front upper edge portion 786a. A flat second operation panel portion 783 is provided between the reference numeral 785 and the lower speaker 667b. In the first operation panel 782, a cross operation means 789, a volume adjustment means 790, and a light amount adjustment means 791 are arranged.

  The cross operation means 789 includes an upper operation key 789a, a lower operation key 789b, a left operation key 789c, and a right operation key 789d arranged on the lower switch board 792 on the lower side of the first operation panel section 782. .

  The cross operation means 789 displays the menu image on the image display means 393 if the player presses the operation effect means 678 during the menu operation possible period in the waiting state for the customer. This is used when any of the selection items of the menu image is selected and executed by appropriately operating any one of the lower operation key 789b, the left operation key 789c, and the right operation key 789d.

  The volume adjusting means 790 is for adjusting the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b, and includes an upper operation key 790a and a lower operation key 790b arranged in the front and rear, and during the volume adjustment period. If the upper operation key 790a is pressed, the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b is increased, and if the lower operation key 790b is pressed, the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b is decreased. .

  The light amount adjusting means 791 is for adjusting the light amount of each LED 716, 720, 747, 753, and includes an upper operation key 791a and a lower operation key 791b arranged in front and rear, and the upper operation key during the light amount adjustable period. Pressing 791a increases the light intensity of each LED 716, 720, 747, 753, and pressing the lower operation key 791b decreases the light intensity of each LED 716, 720, 747, 753.

  The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operation means 789, the two operation keys 790a and 790b of the volume adjustment means 790, and the two operation keys 791a and 791b of the light quantity adjustment means 791 are a wiring pattern on the switch board 792. Are connected in parallel, and are configured to transmit in parallel by 1 byte from the connector on the lower surface side of the switch board 792 via the harness to the receiving side of each signal.

  The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operation means 789, the two operation keys 790a and 790b of the volume adjustment means 790, and the two operation keys 791a and 791b of the light amount adjustment means 791 are individually signaled. May be transmitted. The switch board 792 is fixed to a board case (not shown), and the board case is detachably fixed to the lower side of the first operation panel portion 782 with screws or the like.

  The second operation panel 783 has a ball lending operation means 788a for issuing a ball lending command to the ball lending machine, and a return operation for issuing a return command for returning the valuable card inserted into the ball lending machine. A means 788b and a ball removing operation means 788c for extracting the game ball of the lower plate 329 downward are arranged. The ball removal operation means 788c opens the ball removal hole of the upper plate 328 when pressed, and draws the game ball of the upper plate 328 into the lower plate 329.

  When the front door 306 is closed to the front frame 302 side, the contact wall 698 on the outer periphery of the rear end contacts the outer periphery of the front end of the front frame 302 as shown in FIG. The bottom wall 793 of the front overhanging unit 669 is configured by a lower portion of the lower decorative cover 331, and a horizontal portion 793a continuous to the lower end surface of the front door 306, and an inclination inclined upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 793a. Part 793b.

  A lower portion on the front end side of the inclined portion 793b of the front overhanging unit 669 is a front support portion 794 that contacts the ground when the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed on the floor F in a standing state. In cooperation with the support portion 795, the pachinko machine 300 on the floor surface F can be erected in a forward inclined state.

  The main body side support portion 795 corresponds to the substantially left and right width of the lower front end portion of the outer frame 301, and the front side support portion 794 is substantially in the left and right direction of the front overhang unit 669 in front of the main body side support portion 795 in plan view. It is located at the center and is provided substantially corresponding to the lower side of the operation effect means 678.

  When the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed on the floor surface F or the like in a standing state, generally, the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 of the outer frame 301 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are placed on the floor surface. Ground to F etc. and make it stand upright. However, when the pachinko machine 300 is tilted forward with the front end side of the main body side support portion 795 as a fulcrum, as shown in FIG. 144, the front side support portion 794 at the lower end of the front end side of the inclined portion 793b is grounded. The main body side support portion 795 and the front side support portion 794 can cooperate to support the pachinko machine 300 in a forward inclined posture.

  Therefore, the center of gravity position of the pachinko machine 300 is in front of the main body side support portion 795, and may be within the range of a triangle in plan view of a line segment connecting the left and right ends of the main body side support portion 795 and the front side support portion 794. The maximum range can be secured sufficiently large. Therefore, compared with the case where the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the decoration member 310 are grounded and held in an upright state, the stability of the pachinko machine 300 is improved and the horizontal direction is increased. There is no such thing as falling over in the front-rear direction.

  In the recent pachinko machine 300, the image display means 393 mounted on the back side of the game board 313, the back mechanism such as the substrate case, etc. tend to be large and heavy. However, even in such a case, the front support portion 794 on the front end side of the inclined portion 793b is positioned sufficiently higher than the horizontal portion 793a, so that the pachinko machine 300 has a forward inclined posture in which the pachinko machine 300 is sufficiently inclined to the front side. As a result, the stability of the pachinko machine 300 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the front support portion 794 is a launcher disposed on the lower plate 329 on the lower side of the front overhanging unit 669 or on the lower side in the vicinity when the pachinko machine 300 is erected in the forward tilted state. The other components such as the handle 330 are provided at a height that does not come into contact with the ground surface or the floor surface F.

  The horizontal portion 793a is provided with an extraction port 675 for extracting the game ball of the lower plate 329 downward. The extraction port 675 communicates with the extraction portion of the lower plate 329, and is opened when the ball extraction operation means 676 on the front side of the lower plate 329 is operated in the extraction direction, so that the game balls in the lower plate 329 are supplied to the island facility 796a. Can be extracted to a receiving box 796d on the receiving stand 796c.

  The horizontal portion 793a is approximately half of the total protruding amount from the front door 306 to the front end of the operation means arranging portion 785, and is substantially flush with the lower surface of the front door 306. The inclined portion 793b is provided so as to be inclined upward from the front side of the horizontal portion 793a, and as shown in FIG. 109, the receiving box 796d can be easily put in and out of the front overhanging unit 669. It is like that.

  That is, when the receiving box 796d is put in and out of the receiving stand 796c, if there is no inclined portion 793b on the lower side of the front overhanging unit 669, the gap between the front overhanging unit 669 and the receiving stand 796c becomes narrower, and the front overhanging unit It becomes very complicated to put the receiving box 796d in and out of the lower side of 669. However, since the front lower side of the front overhanging unit 669 is opened by providing an inclined portion 793b that is inclined forwardly upward on the front side of the bottom wall 793 of the front overhanging unit 669, the receiving box 796d on the receiving stand 796c is opened. There is an advantage that loading and unloading and other handling become easy.

  The front support portion 794 of the front overhang unit 669 only needs to be higher on the front side than the rear end horizontal portion 793a continuous with the lower end surface of the front door 306, and need not be the front end of the inclined portion 793b. For example, as long as the front lower portion of the front overhanging unit 669 is a front support portion 794, the rear side of the front support portion 794 may have a stepped shape or a lower shape while exhibiting other shapes.

  The upper plate 328 and the lower decorative cover 331 constituting the upper surface side of the front overhanging unit 669 are entirely made of a synthetic resin material having a light shielding property. The lower decorative cover 331 is formed with an opening 797 around the operation means placement portion 785 extending from the upper surface side to the front center portion, and a peripheral cover 798 covering the opening 797 from the upper side and the front side. Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 108, 109, 111, 116, 117, 145, etc., the peripheral cover 798 is a front cover portion (front see-through portion) that is disposed on the front side so that the operation effect means 678 can be seen through. 799, and an upper cover portion 800 provided on the rear side from the left and right sides of the operation effect means 678.

  109, 116, 117, 145 to 147, etc., the peripheral cover 798 has a circular opening 801 from which the operation portion 738b of the operation effect means 678 protrudes upward and the front cover portion 799. A reflection preventing means 804 is provided on the upper cover portion 800 so as to prevent the light from the operation effect means 678 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a side of the glass unit 340. .

  The front cover portion 799 is made of a transparent synthetic resin having light transmittance, and protrudes in a substantially arc shape from the vicinity of the front side of the operation effect means 678 to the front lower side, and is formed in a substantially U shape in front view. An irregular reflection portion 799b is formed on the back side of the outer peripheral edge 799a having a substantially U-shape. On the other hand, the front wall portion of the lower decorative cover 331 is provided with a substantially U-shaped recess 802 in front view in which the front cover portion 799 is accommodated, and the irregular reflection portion 802b overlaps the step 802a on the rear inner peripheral side of the recess 802. ing. The front cover portion 799 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and is a see-through portion 799c through which the operation effect means 678 can be seen through from the front side.

  The upper cover portion 800 is made of an opaque synthetic resin that does not transmit light, and has a peripheral wall portion 800a formed in a range from the rear side of the operation effect means 678 to the left and right upper sides of the front cover portion 799 through the left and right sides. And a pair of left and right projecting portions 800b projecting left and right from the front side of the peripheral wall portion 800a. The peripheral wall portion 800a swells from the vicinity of the front edge of the upper plate 328 along the operation portion 738b side of the operation effect means 678. The left and right projecting portions 800b are integral with or separate from the peripheral wall portion 800a, and one projecting portion 800b is provided with a first operation panel portion 782, and the other projecting portion 800b is described later. It is a cover that covers the rotational drive means 810 and the like. The lower part of the rear end of the upper cover portion 800 is in the front edge side recess of the upper plate 328.

  The operation effect means 678 is constituted by a push-down operation means capable of emitting a light effect and a movable effect, and is arranged substantially vertically (substantially vertical) in the vertical direction on the operation means arrangement portion 785 at the center front end of the lower decorative cover 331. , And is detachably fixed on a sheet metal cradle 803 projecting forward from the door base 322.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 155, the operation effect means 678 includes a fixed support frame 805 fixed on the cradle 803, a fixed support member 824 fixed at both ends to the fixed support frame 805, and the fixed support. A first rotating body (inner rotating body) 807 that is rotatably supported around the horizontal axis via first rotation support means 806 on both the left and right sides on the member 824, and substantially concentric with the first rotation support means 806. A second rotating body (outer rotating body) 809 that is rotatably supported around the horizontal axis through second rotating support means 808 on both the left and right sides, and one first rotating support means 806 and second rotating support means 808. Rotation drive means 810 for rotating the first rotator 807 and the second rotator 809 in the opposite directions via the first rotation support means 806 and fixed to the fixed support frame 805 through the first rotation support means 806 and the first rotation. Emits upward light in the body 807 The light emitting means 811, the reflecting means 812 fixed upward on the fixed support frame 805 below the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809, and the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 inside An effect button (push-down operation body) 813 that covers the rotation state and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting means 811 so as to be visible and is supported by the fixed support frame 805 so as to be pressed down, and is mounted on the fixed support frame 805 via the buffer means 814. In addition, vibration generating means 815 for vibrating the effect button 813 and reflecting means 812 for reflecting light from the light emitting means 811 upward are provided.

  The operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 protrudes upward from the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798, and is disposed so as to overlap the lower side of the game area 323 of the game board 313 in the front view. The first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 constitute a rotation effect means or a movable effect means. Further, only one of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 may be used.

  The fixed support frame 805 is configured by vertically coupling a sheet metal upper support frame 816 and a lower support frame 817, and the lower support frame 817 is fixed on the receiving base 803 with screws or the like. The upper support frame 816 includes a pair of left and right vertical support portions 816a disposed opposite to the left and right sides of the effect button 813, and a connecting portion 816b that connects the lower end side of the vertical support portion 816a to the left and right. .

  The lower support frame 817 includes a coupling portion 817a coupled to the lower side of the coupling portion 816b of the upper support frame 816, and left and right sides bent downward from the left and right sides of the coupling portion 817a and fixed at the lower end on the cradle 803. A pair of fixed leg portions 817b, a pair of front and rear lower support portions 817c bent to an intermediate height from both front and rear sides of the coupling portion 817a, and bent downward from each lower support portion 817c onto the receiving base 803 Abutting leg 817d that abuts.

  The production button 813 is a push-button type made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin having light transmittance, and has a body portion 813b configured in a substantially cylindrical shape in the vertical direction, and upwards toward the upper end side of the body portion 813b. Are integrally provided with a circumferential groove portion 813c formed on the upper surface and an operation portion 813a protruding upward from the circumferential groove portion 813c and curved in a spherical shape. The lower end of the body portion 813b is an elevating body 813d, and a reinforcing plate 813e below the It is detachably fixed to.

  The effect button 813 includes a standby position (ascending position) U where the elevating body 813d contacts the lower surface of the reflecting plate 812a of the reflecting means 812, and a reinforcing plate 813e as a buffer means on the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817. It can be moved up and down between the push-in position D abutting on or close to 814, and a standby position by a plurality of urging means 822 interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817. Supported on the U side.

  The operation unit 813a is formed in a substantially spherical shape or a substantially dome shape so that the effect button 813 as a whole can secure sufficient strength. Note that the central portion of the operation portion 813a on the top side is a pressing portion 813f, and a display portion 813g for displaying “PUSH” or the like is formed on the inner surface of the pressing portion 813f by embossing or the like.

  This is because, when the pressing portion 813f of the operation unit 813a is pressed, distortion generated in the peripheral portion of the display unit 813g due to the load applied to the operation unit 813a itself is reduced as much as possible, which is substantially spherical. This is to improve the durability of the operation unit 813a. The pressing portion 813f of the operation portion 813a may be substantially flat.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, 149, and 150, an insertion blocking unit 818 for blocking the insertion of unauthorized members is provided on the outer peripheral side of the operation unit 813 a of the effect button 813. The insertion blocking means 818 includes a circumferential groove portion 813c formed on the outer peripheral side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813, and an outer periphery of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 disposed inside the peripheral cover 798 and above the peripheral groove portion 813c. And an insertion prevention cover 818a fitted to the side.

  The insertion prevention cover 818a is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and has a body 818b disposed on the outer periphery of the body 813b, and is bent in a ring shape inward from the upper end side of the body 818b, and the operation unit 813a. And a blocking edge 818c that closes the peripheral groove 813c from above. The body portion 818b is attached to the fixed support frame 805 side via left and right attachment portions 818d.

  The inner periphery of the blocking edge 818c is disposed close to the outer periphery of the lower portion of the spherical operation portion 813a of the effect button 813. When the production button 813 is located at the standby position U, the insertion preventing means 818 is configured such that the outer peripheral portion of the circumferential groove portion 813c approaches or abuts the lower surface of the blocking edge 818c, and the front portion of the body portion 818b is the circumferential groove portion 813c. It is possible to approach or abut from the lower side, and it is configured as a labyrinth as a whole.

  Therefore, when the production button 813 is located at the standby position U, an unauthorized member such as a piano wire is inserted through a slight gap between the operation portion 813a of the production button 813 and the prevention edge 818c of the insertion prevention cover 818a. However, the maze between the circumferential groove 813c and the insertion prevention cover 818a prevents the unauthorized member from entering, and the unauthorized member is inserted into the operation effecting means 678 through the insertion prevention means 818. I can't.

  Between the effect button 813 and the peripheral cover 798, as shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 and 149, a front insertion preventing means 820 and a rear insertion preventing means 821 for preventing the insertion of unauthorized members are provided for the effect button 813. It is provided on both the front and rear sides. The front insertion preventing means 820 includes a receiving groove portion 820a formed substantially horizontally in the circumferential direction on the front upper portion of the body portion 813b of the effect button 813, and an insertion blocking cover 818a that fits in the receiving groove portion 820a so as to be freely retractable from above. And is arranged in the left-right direction corresponding to the upper part of the front cover part 799.

  The receiving groove 820a has a front upright portion 820b formed in a left and right band shape on the front side thereof, and the front upright portion 820b covers the lower end side of the body portion 818b of the insertion prevention cover 818a from the front side. ing. Therefore, the front insertion preventing means 820 constitutes a kind of decorative frame on the upper inner peripheral side of the front cover portion 799.

  The rear insertion preventing means 821 includes a blocking groove portion 821a formed in a forward and downward arc shape from the rear upper side of the operation portion 813a to the left and right sides of the circumferential groove portion 813c, and formed on the inner side of the peripheral cover 798 and to the blocking groove portion 821a from above. It is comprised by the blocking wall part 821b which fits removably. The blocking wall portion 821 b protrudes downward from the inner periphery of the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798.

  Thus, by providing the front insertion preventing means 820 and the rear insertion preventing means 821 on both front and rear sides of the effect button 813, when the effect button 813 is located at the standby position U, the opening 801 side of the peripheral cover 798 is also viewed. Unauthorized members cannot be inserted.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 150, the body portion 813 b of the effect button 813 has cut portions 813 h formed corresponding to the pair of left and right first rotation support means 806 and second rotation support means 808, and each cut. There are provided rib-shaped guided portions 813 i in the vertical direction protruding from the front and rear sides of the portion 813 h to the outside in the horizontal direction. The cut portion 813h is provided so as not to interfere with the first rotation support means 806 and the second rotation support means 808 when the effect button 813 is operated. The guided portion 813i is located on both sides of the notch 813h, and is slidably disposed between the guide portion 823a on the support 823 side on the fixed support frame 805 side, and operates the effect button 813 with the guide portion 823a. It is designed to guide you in the direction.

  The support body 823 is fixed to the vertical support portions 816 a on the left and right sides of the fixed support frame 805. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 149, the support 823 is provided with a guided portion 823 b protruding in the vertical direction in addition to the guiding portion 823 a.

  In addition, a substantially U-shaped inner see-through part 813j is formed on the body part 813b of the effect button 813 corresponding to the see-through part 799c of the front cover part 799, and is irregularly reflected on the inner periphery or outer periphery other than the inner see-through part 813j. A portion 813k is provided. The irregular reflection portion 813k is formed in a vertical streak shape, and constitutes an inhibition portion that impairs the transparency due to the irregular reflection.

  The effect button 813 is detachably fixed by a fixing means such as a screw to a lifting / lowering body 813d having a disk-like lower end of the body portion 813b and a reinforcing plate 813e made of a sheet metal that reinforces the lifting / lowering body 813d from below. . The reinforcing plate 813e has a U-shape in which a notch portion 8131 corresponding to the coupling portion 817a of the lower support frame 817 is formed. A fixing pin 822a protruding downward is fixed to the reinforcing plate 813e in the front, rear, left, and right directions. The fixing pins 822a are inserted into the through holes 817e of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817 in a loose fit.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the urging means 822 includes a coil spring 822b, and the coil spring 822b is fitted on the fixing pin 822a so as to be interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c. On the lower support portion 817c, a restricting portion 817f made of rubber or the like is provided on the left and right sides between the front and rear fixing pins 822a. When the effect button 813 is pushed down to the push-in position D, the effect button is provided via the reinforcing plate 813e. 813 has been received.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 148, the light emitting means 811 is disposed inside the spherical first rotating body 807, and is a disc whose both ends are fixed to the fixed support frame 805 via the fixed support members 824. Substrate support 811a, an LED substrate 811b mounted on the upper side of the substrate support 811a, a number of LEDs (light emitters) 811c mounted upward on the upper surface of the LED substrate 811b, and the LED 811c A diffusion plate 811d for diffusing light by irregular reflection and a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) 811e mounted downward on the lower surface of the front side of the LED substrate 811b. LED 811c emits light upward and downward LED 811e emits light downward to irradiate the inner peripheral surface of the first rotating body 807. .

  The substrate support 811a is made of a non-light-transmitting synthetic resin, and cylindrical fixed support members 824 are integrally provided on both the left and right sides, and the distal end side of the fixed support member 824 serves as the support 823 of the fixed support frame 805. It is detachably fixed with a fixing tool such as a screw.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 154, each fixed support member 824 includes a tubular portion 824 a in the left-right direction, and a mounting portion 824 b having a U-shaped cross section provided on the outer end side of the tubular portion 824 a. Each mounting portion 824b is detachably fixed on the support 823 by a fixing tool 827d such as a screw. Since the attaching portion 824b has a U-shaped cross section and the upper side is open, the fixture 827d can be attached and detached from the open side.

  An LED substrate 811b and a diffusion plate 811d are stacked on the substrate support 811a and fixed detachably. The upward LEDs 811c are arranged to be distributed over substantially the entire LED board 811b, and a diffusion plate 811d is arranged to face the upper side of the LED board 811b. The diffuser plate 811d has a spherical shape with a gentle outer peripheral surface, and is provided with an irregular reflection portion 811f that diffuses light from the upward LED 811c by irregular reflection. The irregular reflection portion 811f has a fine reflection surface formed in a mosaic shape, and irregularly reflects the light from the LED 811c so that substantially the entire surface emits light.

  The downward LEDs 811e are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the front peripheral portion of the LED substrate 811b, and emit light downward through the through-holes 811g formed in the substrate support 811a. . The substrate support 811a is provided with a semicircular partition plate 811k protruding downward at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction so that light from the downward LED 811e does not diffuse backward in the first rotating body 807. ing.

  A connector 811h connected to each LED 811c, 811e via a circuit pattern is provided on the lower side of the LED substrate 811b, and a harness 811i for the LED 811c, 811e from the outside is provided from one cylindrical fixed support member 824. It is connected to the connector 811h through the insertion hole 811j of the substrate support 811a.

  A harness 811i for the LEDs 811c and 811e is inserted into the fixed support member 824, and a harness (not shown) for the second position detecting means 829 described later is inserted across the left and right fixed support members 824. ing.

  The reflecting means 812 includes a reflecting plate 812a detachably fixed on the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816 on the upper side of the elevating body 813d, and a reflecting portion (mirror surface portion) provided on the upper side of the reflecting plate 812a. 812b. On the outer peripheral side of the reflecting means 812, gaps between the rotary members 807 and 809 and the reflecting means 812 are provided outside the reflecting portion 812b so that the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799 cannot be seen from the outer peripheral side of the reflecting means 812. A surrounding wall 812c is provided. The surrounding wall 812c is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is provided so as to spread upward from the left and right sides of the reflecting portion 812b to the rear side. The surrounding wall 812c is formed in a wave shape in the circumferential direction. The reflective portion 812b may be coated in a thin film shape, or a sheet-like material may be attached.

  The elevating body 813d has a notch portion 813m so as not to be buffered with the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816, and the connecting portion 816b is positioned in the notch portion 813m, so that the reflecting plate 812a of the reflecting means 812 It is possible to contact the lower side.

  The first rotating body 807 has a substantially spherical shape, and as shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 151, the first hemisphere 807a and the second hemisphere 807b that are divided into two in the rotation direction are combined. Has been. The first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b are provided with mosaic irregular reflection portions 807c and 807d on substantially the entire inner peripheral surface, the first hemisphere 807a is colorless and transparent, and the second hemisphere 807b is red. It is comprised so that there may exist different production | presentation aspects, such as being colored and transparent.

  Therefore, if the first rotating body 807 rotates around the left-right axis of the first rotation support means 806 and the internal light emitting means 811 emits light, the light from the light emitting means 811 diffuses through the diffusion plate 811d. However, since the irregular reflection portions 807c and 807d on the inner circumference of the first hemisphere 807a and the second hemisphere 807b are irregularly reflected, the first rotator 807 repeats colorless and transparent light emission and red light emission intermittently with the rotation. Can do. The first rotating body 807 may be divided into a plurality other than two.

  The first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b of the first rotating body 807 have attachment portions 807e and 807f on both sides in the left-right direction, and the attachment portions 807e and 807f are attached to the left and right first rotation support means 806. Yes. The first rotation support means 806 is provided integrally with a pair of left and right first cylinder shafts 806a rotatably fitted around the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 824a of the left and right fixed support members 824, and the first cylinder shaft 806a. And a first flange 806b.

  The first flange portion 806b is in contact with the outer surface of the attachment portions 807e and 807f of the first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b, and the attachment portions 807e and 807fd are attached to the first flange portion 806b with a fixing tool such as a screw. Is detachably fixed. Of the pair of left and right first tube shafts 806a, the first tube shaft 806a on the rotation drive means 810 side is longer in the axial direction than the first tube shaft 806a on the opposite side, and the first tube shaft 806a is first on the outer end side. A driven gear 819a is detachably fixed in the axial direction, and a first flange 806b is integrally provided on the other end side. The first cylindrical shaft 806a on the opposite side is short in the axial direction, and a first flange 806b is integrally provided on the outer end side thereof.

  The second rotating body 809 has an annular shape, and as shown in FIGS. 145 to 148 and 151, the first half ring 809 a and the second half ring 809 b which are divided into two in the rotation direction are combined. The second rotation support means 808 is supported on the outer periphery of the first rotating body 807 so as to be rotatable about the axis. The first and second semi-annular bodies 809a and 809b are provided at half boss-like attachment portions 809c and 809d provided at both left and right ends, and at an intermediate portion between the attachment portions 809c and 809d and around the axis. It has division parts 809e and 809f divided into a plurality in the direction. The second rotating body 809 has a light shielding property and is decorated with metal plating or the like. Further, the second rotating body 809 may be divided into a plurality of parts other than two parts.

  In the first and second semi-annular bodies 809a and 809b of the second rotating body 809, the mounting portions 809c and 809d on both sides in the left-right direction are supported by the second rotation support means 808 on both the left and right sides. The second rotation support means 808 has a pair of left and right second cylinder shafts 808a and a second flange 808b provided integrally with the second cylinder shaft 808a. The second flange portion 808b is in contact with the attachment portions 809c and 809d of the first and second semi-annular bodies 809a and 809b from the outside, and the attachment portions 809c and 809d are attached to the second flange portion 808b by a fastener such as a screw. It is detachably fixed.

  Of the pair of left and right second cylindrical shafts 808a, the second cylindrical shaft 808a on the rotational drive means 810 side is longer in the axial direction than the second cylindrical shaft 808a on the opposite side. The second cylindrical shaft 808a on the rotation driving means 810 side is integrally provided with a second flange 808b on the inner end side and a second driven gear 819b on the outer end side, and the first driven gear 819a and the first driven gear 819a are integrated with each other. Between the collar portion 806b, the first rotation support means 806 is rotatably fitted around the axis. A second collar portion 808b is integrally provided on the opposite second cylindrical shaft 808a side, and is fitted on the cylindrical portion 824a of the fixed support member 824 outside the first cylindrical shaft 806a so as to be rotatable about the axis. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 152, 154, and 155, the rotation driving unit 810 includes a drive motor 810a that is a drive source, and a first rotation support unit 806 and a second rotation support unit 808 driven by the drive motor 810a. And a gear train 819 that rotates the first rotator 807 and the second rotator 809 in opposite directions. The drive motor 810a is composed of a stepping motor and other motors, and is mounted on the outside of a mounting plate 826 on the lower side of the support 823 fixed to the vertical support portion 816a of the upper support frame 816.

  A drive shaft 810 b of the drive motor 810 a passes through the inside of the mounting plate 826 and is linked to a gear train 819 disposed inside the support 823. The gear train 819 includes a drive gear 819c fixed to the drive shaft 810b, a first driven gear 819a on the first rotation support means 806 side that meshes with the drive gear 819c, an intermediate gear 819d that meshes with the drive gear 819c, and an intermediate gear. 819d and a second driven gear 819b on the second rotation support means 808 side. The intermediate gear 819d is rotatably fitted to an intermediate shaft 819e integrated with the support 823. The support 823 is provided with a protective cover 819f that surrounds the outer periphery of the gear train 819.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the support 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side is provided with a support recess 823 c in which the mounting portion 824 b of the fixed support member 824 fits, and is disposed in the mounting portion 824 b. The attachment portion 824b is detachably fixed in the support recess 823c via the reinforcing means 827.

  The reinforcing means 827 reinforces the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 on the rotation drive means 810 side, and the rotation support means 810 drives the rotary members 807 and 809 via the gear train 819 to thereby fix the fixed support member 824. Even when an external force is applied to the mounting portion 824b, the mounting portion 824b can sufficiently resist the external force.

  Therefore, by reinforcing the attachment portion 824b by the reinforcing means 827, the attachment portion 824b can be prevented from being distorted or deformed when the rotating bodies 807 and 809 are rotated by the rotation driving means 810, and the gear train 819 is disengaged or engaged. Can be prevented from happening.

  The reinforcing means 827 is a sheet metal reinforcing member 827a bent along the inner surface shape of the mounting portion 824b, and is provided to protrude from the upper end of the reinforcing member 827a to both the front and rear sides and front and rear of the mounting portion 824b having a U-shaped cross section. A fixing part 827d such as a screw that includes a pressing part 827b that holds both sides from above and a pressing member 827c that is disposed in the reinforcing member 827a, and that passes through the pressing member 827c and is screwed into the fixing part 823d of the support 823. The attachment portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 is pressed against the support recess 823c side of the support body 823 for reinforcement.

  The reinforcing member 827 a and the pressing member 827 c are larger than the length in the left-right direction of the U-shaped attachment portion 824 b of the fixed support member 824, and the distal ends thereof are inserted into the cylindrical portion 824 a of the fixed support member 824. Yes. The holding member 827c is chamfered with an insertion portion 827e for forming a harness insertion portion between the end portion of the cylindrical portion 824a so as not to damage the harness 811i in the cylindrical portion 824a of the fixed support member 824. It is provided in the shape. The lengths of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be approximately the same as or slightly longer than the length in the left-right direction of the attachment portion 824b. Of course, the lengths of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be slightly shorter than the length of the attachment portion 824b.

  Two first position detections for detecting the position of the first rotating body 807 on both the front and rear sides of the fixed supporting member 824 between the supporting body 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side and the first rotating support means 806. Means 828a, 828b are provided.

  The first position detecting means 828a and 828b are contactless first detection switches 828c and 828d such as a photosensor fixed to the support 823, and first and second detection switches 828c and 828d corresponding to the first detection switches 828c and 828d. 2 and first driven parts 828e and 828f fixed to the driven gears 819a and 819b. When the first rotating body 807 makes a 1/2 rotation, the first detected body 828e and 828f are rotated every half rotation. The rotation position is detected by the one-position means 828a and 828b. The first rotating body 807 normally stops with the colorless and transparent first hemisphere 807a facing upward.

  Between the support body 823 opposite to the rotation driving means 810 and the second rotation support means 808, second position detection means 829 for detecting the position of the second rotation body 809 is provided. The second position detection means 829 is fixed to the second rotation support means 808 corresponding to the second detection switch 829a and a contactless second detection switch 829a such as a photosensor fixed to the support 823. The second detected body 829b is provided, and the second rotating body 809 is detected every rotation when the second rotating body 809 is rotated to produce a movable effect. The second rotating body 809 is stopped in a state where the first and second semi-annular bodies 809a and 809b are substantially horizontal and are positioned on both front and rear sides of the first hemispherical body 807a.

  Thus, by configuring the left and right attachment portions 824b of the fixed support member 824 to have a U-shaped cross section, the fixture 827d is inserted into the attachment portion 824b from the upper side, and the fixture 827d is operated from the upper side with a tool or the like. Therefore, the left and right ends of the fixed support member 824 can be easily fixed to the respective supports 823. Further, on the rotation driving means 810 side, by providing reinforcing means 827 that reinforces the attaching part 824b having a U-shaped cross section from the inside and fixes it to the support body 823, the attaching part is rotated during the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 807 and 809. Even if an abnormal external force is applied to 824b, buckling of the U-shaped attachment portion 824b, distortion due to others, deformation, and the like can be prevented.

  Accordingly, if buckling or the like occurs on the mounting portion 824b side of the fixed support member 824 on the rotation driving means 810 side, the synchronized state of the rotating bodies 807 and 809 is out of order due to a step-out or the like that disturbs the meshing state of the gear train 819. However, the occurrence of such a problem can be reliably prevented even though the attachment portion 824b has a U-shaped cross section.

  A relay board mounting base 830a is provided across the mounting plate 826 of the support 823 on the rotation driving means 810 side and the contact leg portion 817d of the lower support frame 817, and the relay board mounting base 830a is provided with the relay board 830b. Is attached. In addition to the external circuit connector, the relay board 830b includes a connector for the drive motor 810a, a connector for the first position detection means 828a and 828b, a connector for the LED, a connector for the second position detection means 829, and vibration generation. A connector for the means 815 is provided, and the drive motor 810a on the operation effect means 678 side, the position detection means 828a, 828b, 829, the LED, the vibration generation means 815, and the like are external effects via the relay board 830b. Connected to the control means.

  The vibration generating means 815 is for vibrating the effect button 813 in the front-rear and left-right directions, and is a synthetic resin vibrator attached to the lower side of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817 via the buffer means 814. 815a, a vibration motor 815b accommodated in the vibration body 815a, and an eccentric weight 815d fixed to the rotation shaft 815c of the vibration motor 815b, and the effect button 813 transmits the vibration of the vibration body 815a via the vibration transmission means 831. To communicate. The vibration motor 815b is mounted on the vibrating body 815a from below via a mounting base 815e.

  The vibrating body 815a is attached to the lower side of the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817 via a buffer body 814c so that the vibration of the vibrating body 815a is absorbed as much as possible and is not transmitted to the lower support frame 817 side. Buffer means 814 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the buffering means 814 is disposed at both ends of the vibrating body 815a, and gripping edges 814b formed in the notches 814a of the vibrating body 815a and both upper and lower sides of the gripping edge 814b. A shock absorber 814c such as rubber, a support pin 814d that protrudes downward from the lower support portion 817c and passes through the upper and lower shock absorbers 814c without contacting the gripping edge 814b, and is fixed to the lower end of the support pin 814d with a screw 814g or the like And a receiving plate 814e that receives the buffer 814c from below, and the buffer 814c is interposed between the pressing portion 814f of the support pin 814d and the receiving plate 814e.

  The buffer body 814c has a circumferential groove 814h in the middle in the vertical direction, and a gripping edge 814b is engaged with the circumferential groove 814h. Note that the buffer body 814c may be divided into two in the vertical direction, and the gripping edge 814b may be gripped by the upper and lower buffer bodies 814c.

  Regardless of the structure of the buffer body 814c, vibrations transmitted to the lower support frame 817 side of the vibration body 815a can be absorbed by the buffer body 814c by appropriately selecting the material of the buffer body 814c. . Therefore, in order to absorb vibration as much as possible, it is desirable to make the material of the buffer body 814c soft as long as the stability of the support of the vibration body 815a is not hindered.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the vibration transmitting means 831 is formed on the vibrating body 815a side corresponding to each of the front and rear, left and right fixing pins 822a and the fixing pins 822a, which protrude downward from the reinforcing plate 813e and are fixed. The fixing pin 822a includes a transmission hole 831a through which a predetermined gap is inserted. The four transmission holes 831a of the vibrating body 815a are each a long hole having a large gap in a specific direction with respect to the fixing pin 822a, or a different gap between the fixing pin 822a and the transmission hole 831a. The conditions of 822a and the transmission hole 831a corresponding thereto are different, and the vibration in the horizontal plane direction of the vibrating body 815a is transmitted to the effect button 813 under different conditions for each fixing pin 822a.

  Between the elevating body 813d and the lower support frame 817, operation detection means 833 for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 813 is provided. The operation detecting means 833 includes a non-contact type detection switch 833b such as a photo sensor fixed to the lower support frame 817 via a mounting frame 833a, and a cover projecting downward from the lifting body 813d corresponding to the detection switch 833b. A detection unit 833c, and detects the operation of the effect button 813 when the detected unit 833c comes close to the detection switch 833b.

  Positioning means 834 for positioning the operation effect means 678 at the attachment position is provided between the operation effect means 678 and the operation means arrangement portion 785. The positioning means 834 is disposed in the vicinity of the positioning hole 834a formed on the lower side of the bottom wall 793 of the cradle 803 or the front projecting unit 669 and the fixed leg portions 817b on the front and rear of the lower support frame 817 and is inserted into the positioning hole 834a. Positioning protrusions 834b. The fixed leg portion 817b is detachably fixed to the cradle 803 from the lower side by a fixing tool such as a screw.

  The operation means placement unit 785 covers and shields the operation effect means 678 from the rear side so that the internal mechanism behind the operation effect means 678 is not visible when the inside is seen through the see-through part 799c of the front cover part 799. A shielding plate 840 is provided, and when the operation effect means 678 is inserted from above into the operation means placement portion 785, a front guide means 838 for guiding the front side of the operation effect means 678 and a rear side of the operation effect means 678 Are provided on both the front and rear sides.

  As shown in FIGS. 143, 146, and 156, the shielding plate 840 has an arc shape in a plan view formed in an arc shape with a predetermined interval from the body portion 813 b, and is provided behind the effect button 813. On the side, it is arranged vertically between the cradle 803 and the vicinity of the front side of the upper plate 328 and is fixed to the front surface of the door base 322. Note that the shielding plate 840 corresponds to at least a range that can be seen through from the see-through portion 799c when the inside is seen through the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, such as being provided corresponding to the upper portion from the lifting body 813d of the effect button 813. Just do.

  Accordingly, even when the body portion 813b of the effect button 813 is seen through from the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, the internal mechanism on the rear side is not seen, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, on the front side of the body portion 813b of the effect button 813, there is a substantially U-shaped internal see-through portion 813j corresponding to the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, but a portion other than the inside see-through portion 813j in the torso portion 813b. Since the irregular reflection portion 813k is provided, the shielding plate 840 is hardly seen through by the irregular reflection portion 813k.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the front guide means 838 is provided in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the front cover portion 799 on the front side of the operation means arrangement portion 785, and is guided to the guided portion 823b protruding from the support 823 to the front side. And a groove-shaped guide portion 838a that is provided inside the lower decorative cover 331 and guides the guided portion 823b in the vertical direction. The front guide means 838 has a sufficient margin so as not to hinder positioning by the positioning means 834.

  The rear guiding means 839 includes a shielding plate 840 on the rear side of the operation means arranging portion 785, a bent edge 839a bent downward from the rear side of the lifting body 813d, and a pair of left and right protruding rearward from both left and right sides of the bent edge 839a. And a guide part 839b in the vertical direction, and when the operation effect means 678 is inserted into the operation means placement part 785, the bent edge 839a or the guide part 839b is guided downward along the shielding plate 840. It has become.

  When the operation effect means 678 is assembled to the operation means arrangement portion 785, the operation effect means 678 is inserted into the operation means arrangement portion 785 from the upper side with the peripheral cover 798 removed and the upper side of the operation means arrangement portion 785 opened. To do. At this time, the operation effect means 678 is set to a substantially vertical state or a forward inclined state in which the upper side is slightly inclined forward, and after the guide portion 838a and the guided portion 823b of the front guide means 838 are combined, the rear guide means 839 is bent. The edge 839 a or the guide portion 839 b is inserted while sliding along the shielding plate 840.

  The fixed leg 817b of the operation effect means 678 is brought into contact with the receiving base 803 while positioning the operation effect means 678 to a predetermined mounting position of the positioning means 834. When the fixed leg portion 817b comes into contact with the receiving base 803, a fixing tool such as a screw is inserted from the lower side of the receiving base 803 to fix the fixed leg portion 817b on the receiving base 803.

  Note that the peripheral cover 798 may be attached after the operation effect means 678 is fixed on the receiving base 803. In addition, an opening for operating the fixture may be provided in the bottom wall 793 so that the opening is closed after the fixture is operated.

  Thus, by providing the pair of left and right front guide means 838 on the front side of the operation effect means 678 and the rear guide means 839 on the rear side, even if the operation effect means 678 is enlarged, the operation effect means 678 can be easily operated. Therefore, it can be inserted into the operation means arranging portion 785 without difficulty. Moreover, the operation | work at the time of removing the operation presentation means 678 from the operation means arrangement | positioning part 785 can also be performed easily.

  The operation effect means 678 having such a configuration is used for an operation effect or the like that is executed with a predetermined probability for each variation period of the special symbol. For example, when the operation effect determining means determines the operation effect, the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 rotate in the reverse direction according to the operation effect pattern and stop at the predetermined operation effect position, so that the image display means 393 If the player operates the effect button 813 in the designated operation mode within the operation effective period in which the operation instruction image is displayed, the effect at the time of the predetermined operation is executed according to the special symbol stop result after the change.

  This operation effect includes three types of operation effect patterns: a first operation effect, a second operation effect, and a third operation effect. An effect using rotation stop patterns of the first rotator 807 and the second rotator 809; It has become. The first operation effect is an operation effect that is executed when the first rotator 807 and the second rotator 809 in the effect button 813 are stopped at the first operation effect position, and the operation is effective during the first operation effect. When the player operates the effect button 813 in a designated operation mode (for example, by pressing once) within the period, “blue background effect” for changing the background color of the image display means 393 to blue and “red for changing to red” In addition to changing the background color of the image display means 393, the LEDs 100a and 100b are made to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern.

  The second operation effect is an operation effect that is executed when the first hemisphere 807a of the first rotating body 807 in the effect button 813 faces upward but stops at the second effect operation position, and this second operation effect. When the player operates the effect button 813 in a specified operation mode (for example, once pressed) within the operation valid period, the LEDs in the first rotating body 807 are blinked with the timing sequentially shifted in the circumferential direction. It has become.

  The third operation effect is an operation effect that is executed when the second hemisphere 807b of the first rotating body 807 in the effect button 813 stops at the third operation effect position facing upward, and during the third operation effect When the player operates the effect button 813 in a designated operation mode (for example, once pressed) within the operation effective period of, the button vibration effect that causes the vibration generating means 815 to vibrate the effect button 813 is the result of the change in the special symbol and It is executed with a predetermined probability according to the type of profit state.

  Note that the first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect are set such that the expectation that the special symbol after the change becomes a specific mode (big hit) in that order increases. The effect mode at the time of the operation effect performed using this operation effect means 678 is arbitrary, and is not limited to the first operation effect, the second operation effect, and the third operation effect. As for the operation of the effect button 813, in addition to “press once” that is operated only once, “continuous hit” in which the effect button 813 is continuously operated a plurality of times, and “long press that maintains the operation state of the effect button 813 for a predetermined time or more” And the like.

  The reflection preventing means 804 is for preventing reflection of light from the operation effecting means 678 having light emission onto the glass plate 671a, as shown in FIGS. 109, 117, 145, and 147. , Which is disposed between the glass plate 671a and the effect button 813 of the operation effect means 678, and includes an anti-reflection wall 804a configured by using all or part of the peripheral wall portion 800a, and the operation effect means 678. It is provided across the rear side from the left and right sides.

  In the case of the operation effect means 678 illustrated in this embodiment, the irregular reflection portions 807c and 807d of the first rotating body 807 emit light by irregularly reflecting the light from the light emitting means 811. The light emitting unit is configured. Therefore, the reflection prevention means 804 assumes that the height of the eye I of the player sitting on the chair in front of the pachinko machine 300 is the position shown in FIG. Even when the operation effect means 678 side is viewed through the glass plate 671a, the player's view reaching the first rotating body 807 is blocked between the glass plate 671a and the first rotating body 807, and the light emitting unit The first rotating body 807 is prevented from entering the player's field of view.

  The peripheral wall portion 800a of the upper cover portion 800 extends to the front cover portion 799 from both ends of the rear cover portion 800c and the rear cover portion 800c inclined to the front side corresponding to the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813. The left and right cover portions 800d are provided, and the upper end side is formed in an inclined shape so as to be lowered from the rear side of the operation effect means 678 to the left and right sides so that the height of the rear cover portion 800c is higher than that of the left and right cover portions 800d. .

  The required range corresponding to the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 in the peripheral wall portion 800a including the rear cover portion 800c and the left and right cover portions 800d reflects the first rotating body 807 on the glass plate 671a. The reflection preventing wall 804a is prevented, and the reflection preventing means 804 is constituted by the reflection preventing wall 804a.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, the height relationship between the vertex of the first rotating body 807 and the vertex of the rear cover portion 800c of the peripheral wall portion 800a is the same as the vertex of the first rotating body 807 and the vertex of the rear cover portion 800c. When an intersecting line 671aa where the line segment X1 passing through intersects with the front surface of the glass plate 671a, when considering the line segment X1 and the line segment X2 pointed up and down with respect to the vertical line Y perpendicular to the front surface of the glass plate 671a, the line It is set so that the player's line of sight is located in the region X below the extension of the minute X2.

  Therefore, even when the player who is playing the game looks down on the operation effect means 678 through the glass plate 671a in the light emitting state of the first rotation body 807, the first rotation body 807 in the operation effect means 678 is also displayed. The light is blocked by the reflection preventing means 804 in the vicinity of the rear side, and the light of the first rotating body 807 can be prevented from being reflected on the glass plate 671a.

  Therefore, the player who is playing the game can easily and reliably grasp the display image displayed on the lower side of the display screen of the image display means 393 of the game board 313. In addition, even when there is a variable winning means 404 or other important winning means in the vicinity of the reflection area below the game area 323, the situation of the important winning means and the like should be easily and reliably grasped. There is an advantage that can be.

  Further, the reflection preventing wall 804a is configured by the peripheral wall portion 800a on the outer peripheral side of the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678, and the upper edge thereof is located on the left and right sides from the rear cover portion 800c on the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678. In this way, the operability of the operation portion 813a is not impaired.

  The reflection preventing means 804 may be only the rear cover portion 800c as long as the reflection of the operation effecting means 678 on the glass unit 340 side can be prevented. Further, the reflection preventing means 804 may be made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin and provided with a coating or other light shielding portion on the surface thereof.

  In this embodiment, the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678 protrudes upward from the upper surface side of the lower decorative cover 331, and is disposed at a position where the operation portion 813a overlaps with the game area 323 in a front view. A reflection preventing wall 804a is disposed on the glass plate 671a side of the operation unit 813a at a position overlapping the game area 323 when viewed from the front, and is inclined forward along the spherical operation unit 813a.

  The reflection preventing wall 804a is higher than the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678 and the light emitting means 811 on the game board 313 side and the light emitting part such as the first rotating body 807 that emits light by irregularly reflecting the light of the light emitting means 811. The upper end is located at the position. The upper end of the reflection preventing wall 804a only needs to be located at a position higher than the light emitting portion such as the light emitting means 811 on the game board 313 side than the operation portion 813a of the operation effect means 678 and lower than the operation portion 813a. However, when the operation unit 813a emits light by irregular reflection or the like, it is necessary to dispose the reflection preventing wall 804a at a position higher than the operation unit 813a.

  Even when there is a wall for preventing reflection, important game parts such as variable winning means 404 and special symbol starting means 655 are located at positions corresponding to the operation part 813a in the front view of the game board 313. It is desirable not to place.

  Further, in the embodiment, the operation effect unit 678 having the LED light emitting unit 811 is illustrated as an object in which reflection is a problem, but other than the operation effect unit 678 may be used.

  FIG. 159 illustrates a sixth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 159, the pachinko machine 300 includes effect operation means 835 for effect operation that is disposed in a forwardly inclined state in the upper center portion of the front overhang unit 669. The production operation means 835 includes a light emission operation member 836 that can be pressed in the tilt direction, and an outer cover 837 that presses the outer periphery of the light emission operation member 836 on the front projecting unit 669, and the game board 313 side through the glass unit 340. The game area 323 is arranged so as to overlap the lower side of the game area 323.

  The light emitting operation member 836 has a light-transmitting flat operation portion 836a formed at the upper end, and an irregular reflection portion 836b formed on the inner surface of the operation portion 836a. An LED substrate 836d having an LED 836c on the upper surface is provided below the operation unit 836a. When the LED 836c emits light, the light from the LED 836c is irregularly reflected by the irregular reflection unit 836b so that the operation unit 836a emits light. It has become.

  The outer peripheral cover 837 has a peripheral wall portion 837a that surrounds the operation portion 836a. The peripheral wall portion 837a has a low front wall portion 837b that is the front side of the operation portion 836a, and the operation portion 836a and the glass unit 340 on the rear side of the operation portion 836a. The rear wall 837c side located between the two is higher.

  The reason why the front wall portion 837b of the peripheral wall portion 837a is low is to facilitate the operation from the front side of the operation portion 836a. Of the front wall portion 837b and the rear wall portion 837c, at least the rear wall portion 837c side disposed on the rear side of the operation portion 836a is spherical toward the front side along the shape of the operation portion 836a of the light emission operation member 836. It is inclined to.

  The operation portion 836a of the light emission operation member 836 overlaps with the lower side of the game area 323 on the game board 313 side in the front and rear direction. In addition, an out ball port 842 for guiding the out ball to the back side of the game board 313 is arranged in a portion corresponding to the rear side of the operation unit 836a in the lower side of the game area 323 of the game board 313. Non-critical game parts are arranged, and no important game parts such as winning means are arranged. In addition, a winning means having a small number of winning balls at the time of winning, such as a normal winning means 405, may be arranged.

  Of the light from the operation unit 836a when emitting light by irregularly reflecting the light from the LED 836c or the light from the LED 836c, the light from the LED 836c when the LED 836c emits is reflected on the glass plate 671a on the rear wall 837c side. The reflection preventing means 804 for preventing the reflection is configured to prevent the reflection.

  The upper end of the reflection preventing means 804 is disposed at a position higher than the LED board 836d and lower than the operation unit 836a on the game board 313 side than the operation unit 836a. Note that the upper end of the reflection preventing means 804 may be disposed at a position higher than the LED board 836d and higher than the operation unit 836a on the game board 313 side than the operation unit 836a.

  As illustrated in this embodiment, the effect operating means 835 can be disposed in a forward inclined state on the upper side of the front overhanging unit 669. Also in this case, if the operation unit 836a on the upper end side of the light emission operation member 836 emits light, reflection on the glass plate 671a is a problem depending on the light diffusion direction and diffusion region of the operation unit 836a. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a reflection preventing means 804 as a countermeasure.

  The reflection preventing means 804 may have various structures, but by using the outer peripheral cover 837 that holds the light emitting operation member 836, the structure can be simplified and the cost can be reduced. In addition, it is desirable that the reflection preventing means 804 be disposed with its upper end side approaching the problematic light emitting portion side, such as by providing the rear wall portion 837c in a forward inclined state on the operation portion 836a side, thereby increasing the size. Can be prevented.

  The light emitting means 811 may be other than the LED 836c, such as a 7-segment light emitting display means. Further, the operation unit 836a may be arranged lower than the lower side of the game area 323 so as not to overlap the game area 323 of the game board 313 in the front-rear direction. Further, the reflection preventing means 804 may be provided separately from the outer peripheral cover 837.

  FIG. 160 illustrates a seventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 160, the pachinko machine 300 includes a rendering operation means 835 for rendering operation that is disposed in the center of the upper side of the front projecting unit 669 so as to be tilted forward. The effect operation means 835 includes a light emission operation member 836 that can be pressed in an inclined direction, and an outer peripheral cover 837 that presses the outer periphery of the light emission operation member 836 on the front projecting unit 669, and a game area 323 of the game board 313 and its It is arranged below the front glass unit 340.

  The light emitting operation member 836 includes a light emitter 836e inside the operation portion 836a, and a reflection preventing means 804 for preventing the light from the light emitter 836e from being reflected on the glass plate 671a of the front projecting unit 669. It is provided on the upper surface side. The front projecting unit 669 is provided with a projecting portion 669a between the light emitting operation member 836 and the glass unit 340 that projects upward and blocks light from the light emitter 836e to the lower side of the glass unit 340. The projection 669a constitutes a reflection preventing means 804.

  In this way, it is possible to provide the reflection preventing means 804 separately from the effect operating means 835 by using a part of the front projecting unit 669. Therefore, whether to provide the reflection preventing means 804 in a part of the production operation means 835 or whether to provide the reflection prevention means 804 separately from the production operation means 835 depends on the structure of the front projecting unit 669, the production operation means 835, and others. What is necessary is just to determine suitably according to.

  Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the fifth to seventh embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible. When the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, the gaming machine main body may be configured by the outer frame 301 or may be configured by the outer frame 301 and the front frame 302. Of course, you may comprise in things other than these.

  The fifth to seventh embodiments exemplify the anti-reflection measures for the pachinko machine 300, but the anti-reflection measures include various ball machines such as the pachinko machine 300 as well as various slot machines and the like. The same can be applied to a gaming machine.

  For example, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, as illustrated in the fifth to seventh embodiments, the gaming area 323 is for the front side of the gaming board 313 mounted on the gaming machine main body side such as a front frame. The reflection on the visual recognition plate 671a such as a glass plate disposed on the front side of the game board 313 becomes a problem. In the case of a rotary reel type slot machine, a liquid crystal display type slot machine, and the like, the game area 323 corresponds to the front side of the rotary reel, a liquid crystal display screen, and the like, and a viewing plate 671a such as a glass plate disposed on the front side thereof. Reflection is a problem.

  Further, the object to be prevented from being reflected on the visual recognition plate 671a is generally light from the light emitting means 811 (light emitting portion) disposed at the lower front side of the visual recognition plate 671a. In addition to light from the inside, light on the surface side may be used. For example, when there is a glass or other mirror-like reflective part at the lower part of the front side of the visual recognition plate 671a, it is conceivable that light from the external light source is reflected by the reflective part toward the visual recognition plate 671a. The reflection of light may also be prevented.

  Further, as a reflection preventing means 804 for preventing the light from the light emitting means 811 from appearing on the visual recognition plate 671a, a blocking wall for blocking the light reaching the player's visual field between the light emitting means 811 and the visual recognition plate 671a. However, the reflection preventing means 804 may use a part of a member attached to the light emitting means 811 or use another member on the upper surface side of the front projecting unit 669. Also good.

  The reflection preventing means 804 may not only completely block the light from the light emitting means 811 like a blocking wall, but may also employ a dimming means that dims to a weak light that does not hinder the player's game. Good. In this case, the light that has passed through the dimming means is reflected on the visual recognition plate 671a. However, since the light does not interfere with the player's game, there is no problem. As the dimming means, one that diffuses the light from the light source, one that polarizes the light from the light source, and the like can be considered. Therefore, the reflection preventing means 804 weakens strong light that would impede the player's game, but may allow light reflection that is weak enough not to interfere with the player's game. It is.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, a case where reflection of light from the light emitting unit 811 below the operation unit 813a is prevented by the reflection preventing unit 804 is illustrated. However, when the uppermost operation unit 813a emits light due to irregular reflection or the like, the light from the uppermost operation unit 813a is also a target for preventing reflection. However, even when the uppermost operation unit 813a emits light by light from the inside, it is not always necessary to prevent the reflection if the light is weak.

  The reflection preventing wall 804a is preferably inclined on the upper side toward the light emitting means 811 from the viewpoint of blocking the light from the light emitting means 811, but is not necessarily inclined toward the light emitting means 811, and is inclined in the opposite direction. You may make it do. In the case where the operation portion 813a is spherical as in the fifth embodiment, it is desirable that the operation portion 813a be shaped so as to embrace the structure. The reflection preventing wall 804a is sufficient if it is within a narrow range just behind the operation unit 813a. However, considering that the player's posture moves to the left and right, the right and left sides from the rear part of the operation unit 813a are sufficient. It is desirable to arrange in the predetermined range.

  In a gaming machine provided with a projecting unit such as the front overhanging unit 669, when the front support part 794 is provided at the front lower part of the projecting unit, the front support part 794 cooperates with the main body support part 795 on the gaming machine main body side. Any device can be used as long as it can stand the machine body. In a projecting unit having a substantially triangular shape in plan view, such as the front projecting unit 669, the front support portion 794 has a narrow left-right width. However, when the left-right width on the front end side of the projecting unit is long, the projecting unit The front support portion 794 may be provided at a substantially central portion on the front end side of the unit, or may be provided on both the left and right sides. Further, the front support portion 794 may be provided in a strip shape that is long in the left-right direction. The front support portion 794 may be provided in the middle of the protruding unit in the front-rear direction.

  The front support portion 794 may be provided at substantially the same height as the main body side support portion 795. In the case where the bottom wall 793 of the protruding unit is inclined forwardly upward, the inclined portion 793b may be provided on the front side of the horizontal portion 793a, or may be configured to be inclined from the rear end side.

  161 to 177 illustrate an eighth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the second side unit 850 of this embodiment is arranged on the right side of the game area 323 and has a vertically long right side protruding part (left and right side protruding part) 851. A horizontally long upper projecting portion 852 that is arranged on the upper side of the game area 323 and projects forward is provided in a substantially L shape in front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 to 174, the right protruding portion 851 is provided with first to third light emitting display portions 866, 868, and 870 and a vibration-type rendering means 881, and the upper protruding portion 852 has a first protrusion. The second light emitting display portions 867 and 869 and the air blowing effect means 855 are provided.

  This second side unit 850 is shaped approximately half of a stone wall type well opening with a narrow frontage and a wide interior, depending on the form of the right side protruding part 851 and the upper side protruding part 852 on the front side. The kite also uses modeling effects to play games while looking into the dark well entrance.

  The right protrusion 851 and the upper protrusion 852 are made of a synthetic resin having a substantially light-shielding outer peripheral side, and the light-emitting display portions 866 to 870 arranged on the outer peripheral surface are dispersed as necessary. The light is emitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166 and FIGS. 172 to 174, the protrusions 851 and 852 are hollow with front walls 853 and 854, inner walls 856 and 857, and outer walls 858 and 859. The outer walls 858 and 859 arranged on the opposite sides of the game areas 323 of the respective protrusions 851 and 852 are substantially the main part excluding the connection part 8589 of the both protrusions 851 and 852, substantially from the right end and the upper end of the front door 306 in the front-rear direction. It is flat.

  In addition, the outer walls 858 and 859 of the connecting portion 8589 of the projecting portions 851 and 852 are formed in an arc shape on the front side. Further, inside the connection portion 8589 of both the projecting portions 851 and 852, a housing recess 860a for accommodating the upper speaker 666b mounted on the door base 322 side and an opening 860b for the upper speaker 666b are provided in the front and rear. Yes.

  On the other hand, the inner walls 856 and 857 arranged on the game area 323 side of the projecting portions 851 and 852 are positioned in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 323 and the front side projects inward of the game area 323. The right protrusion 851 has a front left / right width 851a larger than the rear left / right width 851b, and the upper protrusion 852 has a front vertical width 852a larger than the rear vertical width 852b.

  That is, the inner walls 856 and 857 of the projecting portions 851 and 852 are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery along the outer peripheral edge of the game area 323 so that the game area 323 is not limited, whereas the front side is the rear part. Inclined portions 856a and 857a that inwardly incline from the side to the front walls 853 and 854 and / or inflated portions 856b and 857b that swell inward are provided, and the front side is located on the inner side of the rear side, and the game area 323 It is arranged protruding inside.

  Thus, the second side unit 850 has a small rear side width and a large front side width of each of the projecting portions 851 and 852, so that each projecting portion 851, while securing a sufficient game area 323, is ensured. The width of the front side of 852 can be made sufficiently thick, and it is rich in change by appropriately selecting the concave and convex shapes of the inner walls 856, 857 and the front walls 853, 854 as compared with the conventional flat shape. A model can be used.

  In particular, each of the protrusions 851 and 852 has inclined portions 856a and 857a and / or bulging portions 856b and 857b that are inclined toward the front walls 853 and 854 on the inner walls 856 and 857 on the game area 323 side, As shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and 175 (b), the player P who is playing the game can easily visually recognize the shaped object on the inner wall 856 side of the right protruding portion 851 and the inner wall 857 side of the upper protruding portion 852.

  In addition, since the player P plays a game in a state surrounded by the right protruding portion 851 and the upper protruding portion 852, a modeled object that matches the effect image displayed on the game area 323 of the game board 313 is displayed on the inner wall. By providing them at 856 and 857, it is possible to produce a realistic production with a sense of presence, and it is possible to easily improve design and design compared to the conventional art.

  As shown in FIGS. 161 and 163, the second side unit 850 includes a reinforcing member 861 having an L-shape in a substantially front view on the rear end side, and a right protruding portion 851 on the front surface of the reinforcing member 861. The upper projecting portion 852 is mounted, and the positioning means 733, 734 and the locking means 735-737 as in the fifth embodiment. Further, the front door 306 is detachably fixed to the front side of the door base 322 via the fixing means 738 to 740. Further, the upper protruding portion 852 is structurally continuous with the upper side of the first side unit 668a.

  The protrusions 851 and 852 are longitudinally or horizontally long front supports 862, 863, rear supports 864, 865, and the front supports 862, 863 and the rear, which are arranged at predetermined intervals in the front-rear direction. Outer walls 858 and 859 arranged on the opposite side to the game area 323 with respect to the supports 864 and 865, and an inner wall 856 arranged on the game area 323 side with respect to the front supports 862 and 863 and the rear supports 864 and 865. , 857, and front walls 853, 854 having a substantially U-shaped cross section disposed on the front side of the front supports 862, 863 and fitted on the outer side of the outer walls 858, 859 and the inner walls 856, 857 on the rear side.

  The outer walls 858 and 859, the inner walls 856 and 857, and the front walls 853 and 854 are detachably fixed to the front support bodies 862 and 863 and the rear support bodies 864 and 865 with screws or the like. Further, boss portions 862c, 863c, 864c, and 865c that contact the front and rear are provided on the front support bodies 862 and 863 and the rear support bodies 864 and 865, respectively.

  Each of the protrusions 851 and 852 is provided with a plurality of first light emission display portions 866 and 867 on the front walls 853 and 854, and a plurality of second light emission display portions 868 and 869 on the inner walls 856 and 857, respectively. A third light emitting display portion 870 is provided on the outer wall 858 of 851. Inside each protrusion 851,852, the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 are mounted on both front and rear surfaces and disposed on the front end side of each internal space, and the rear side of the LED substrates 876 and 877 Second light guide plates (second light guide means) 878 and 879 arranged along the inner walls 856 and 857 corresponding to the second light emitting display portions 868 and 869, and a third light emitting display portion on the rear side of the LED substrate 876. A third light guide plate (third light guide means) 880 disposed along the outer wall 858 corresponding to 870 is provided.

  In addition, 3rd LED875 and the 3rd light-guide plate 880 are only the right side protrusion parts 851. FIG. In addition, vibration-type rendering means 881 is provided at the lower part of the right protruding portion 851 across the inner and outer sides of the inner wall 856.

  As described above, the LED boards 876 and 877 having the first LEDs 871 and 872 for the first light emitting display portions 866 and 867 on the front walls 853 and 854 are arranged on the front side, and the rear sides of the LED boards 876 and 877 are arranged. A second LED 873 and 874 for the second light emitting display portions 868 and 869 on the inner walls 856 and 857 side and a third LED 875 for the third light emitting display portion 870 on the outer wall 858 side are provided, and from these second and third LEDs 873 to 875, The light is guided to the second and third light emitting display portions 868, 869, and 870 through the second and third light guide plates 878, 879, and 880, whereby all of the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 are led to the LED substrate 876. , 877, it becomes structurally simple and can be implemented easily and inexpensively.

  The front surfaces of the front walls 853 and 854 are substantially flat, and first light emitting display portions 866 and 867 are provided on the front surface. The first light emitting display portions 866, 867 have front and rear through holes 866a, 867a formed in the front walls 853, 854, and light transmitting portions 866b, 867b fitted in the through holes 866a, 867a. The light transmission parts 866b and 867b emit light by the light from the first LEDs 871 and 872.

  The first light emitting display portion 866 of the right protruding portion 851 includes a main display portion 866A that displays the model name of the pachinko machine, and a streak-like or crack-like auxiliary display portion 866B that is arranged around the main display portion 866A. There is. A plurality of main display portions 866A are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the vertical direction for each character of the model name. Further, the sub display portion 866B is appropriately arranged in the peripheral portion of the main display portion 866A. The main display unit 866A may display the model name as a unit.

  The inner walls 856, 857 and the outer walls 858, 859 of the respective protrusions 851, 852 are shaped protrusions 856c exhibiting a decorative pattern such as a stone wall as illustrated in FIGS. 165 and 166, the inner wall 856 of the right protrusion 851; A modeling recess 856d formed between the modeling protrusions 856c. The modeling protrusion 856c and the modeling recess 856d are imitated stone walls inside and outside the well, and the unevenness of the modeling projection 856c and the modeling recess 856d is larger on the inner walls 856 and 857 side than the outer walls 858 and 859. is there.

  The inner walls 856, 857 and the outer walls 858, 859 are provided with a plurality of streak-like or crack-like second and third light emitting display portions 868 to 870 in the modeling recess 856d. Since the vibration effect means 881 is disposed at the lower portion of the inner wall 856, the second light emitting display unit 868 is distributed on the upper side and the rear side so as to avoid the vibration effect means 881.

  The second and third light emitting display portions 868 to 870 include through holes 868a to 870a formed in the inner walls 856, 857 and the outer wall 858 so as to penetrate therethrough, and light transmitting portions 868b to 870 fitted in the through holes 868a to 870a. And at least part of each of the light transmitting portions 868b to 870 is streaked, cracked, or the like by light guided from the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 through the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880. The light emission mode is appropriately adapted to emit light.

  The front supports 862 and 863 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and have front wall portions 862a and 863a disposed close to the rear side of the front walls 853 and 854, and the front wall portions 862a and 863a. Peripheral wall portions 862b and 863b protruding from the outer periphery to the rear side are integrally provided, and light transmitting portions 866b and 867b protruding frontward are integrally provided on the front surfaces of the front wall portions 862a and 863a.

  The light transmitting portion 866b of the main display portion 866A is a hollow shape having a recess formed on the rear side, and an irregular reflection portion is provided on the front surface of the recess. Corresponding to the light transmission part 866b of the sub display part 866B, a irregular reflection part and a ridge wall surrounding the irregular reflection part are provided. Note that the light transmitting portions of the main display portion 866A and the sub display portion 866B may be solid, or may be hollow with a recess on the back side.

  The LED substrates 876 and 877 are in contact with the rear ends of the peripheral wall portions 862b and 863b and are detachably fixed to the front supports 862 and 863. A plurality of first LEDs 871 and 872 are mounted on the front surfaces of the LED substrates 876 and 877 so as to irradiate the first light emitting display portions 866 and 867 with light from behind. Has been.

  Further, a plurality of back surfaces of the LED substrates 876 and 877 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the edge so as to face the light receiving portions 878a and 879a at the front ends of the second light guide plates 878 and 879. The second LEDs 873 and 874 are mounted. A plurality of third LEDs 875 are mounted on the back surface of the LED substrate 876 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction along the edge so as to face the light receiving portion 880a at the front end of the third light guide plate 880. .

  Thus, by mounting the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 on the LED boards 876 and 877, the number of LED boards 876 and 877 can be reduced. Further, by arranging the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 at the ends of the LED substrates 876 and 877, the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are arranged close to the inner walls 856 and 857 and the outer walls 858 and 859. The second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 can be structurally simplified.

  A partition body 882 is interposed between the LED substrate 876 and the front wall portion 862 a of the front support body 862. The partition body 882 includes a partition wall 882a that partitions each main display portion 866A of the first light emitting display portion 866 from the peripheral sub display portion 866B and the like, and main display of light from the first LED 871 corresponding to the main display portion 866A. Diffusion outside of the portion 866A is prevented. Therefore, in the first light emitting display portion 866, the main display portion 866A can emit light brighter than the sub display portion 866B.

  The partition body 882 is detachably fixed to one of the LED board 876 and the front support body 862 with screws or the like, and both front and rear ends of the partition wall 882a are in contact with or close to the LED board 876 and the front wall section 862a. ing.

  In addition, since the front support body 862 and the partition body 882 are vertically long, the LED board 876 arranged vertically corresponding to the front support body 862 is divided into two in the vertical direction, and the opposite ends are connected to each other via a connector or the like. Has been. A partition body 882 is mounted on the rear side of the front support body 862, and an LED substrate 876 is mounted on the rear side of the front support body 862 with the partition body 882 interposed therebetween. Note that the LED substrate 876 may be integrated in the vertical direction, or may be divided into three or more in the vertical direction.

  The second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 are in contact with or close to the inner surface of the molding recess 856d of the inner and outer walls 856 to 859. And is fixed to the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 in a detachable manner by screws or the like. The second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 are provided with light receiving portions 878a to 880a facing the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 on the front end side, and the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 are second on one side. The second and third light transmitting portions 868b to 870b for the third light emitting display portions 868 to 870 are provided on the other side of the opposite side, and the second and third light guide portions 883 to 885 are provided corresponding to the front and back sides, respectively. It has been. The second and third light guide parts 883 to 885 have a shape including a bent portion according to the shape of the second and third light emitting display parts 868 to 870, and the depth and width of the V groove differ depending on the position. Yes.

  The second and third light transmitting portions 868b to 870b for the second and third light emitting display portions 868 to 870 protrude from the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 into the inner walls and the outer walls 856 to 859, respectively. It is formed by a strip. The second and third light guides 883 to 885 display the light that has entered the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 from the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 through the light receiving parts 878a to 880a. Reflective grooves such as V-grooves formed on the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 (reflecting portions) for guiding light to the second and third light transmitting portions 868b to 870b of the portions 868 to 870 ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the second light guide plate 878 has a corresponding region 878aa in the vertical direction corresponding to the light receiving portion 878a on the front end side, and a food that protrudes to both the upper and lower sides or the upper and lower sides of the corresponding region 878aa. And a second light emitting display portion 868 is provided on the rear side of the second light guide plate 878 so that the second light emitting display portion 868 protrudes to both the upper and lower sides or one of the upper and lower sides over the both regions 878aa and 878ab. It has been.

  Therefore, the second light guide plate 878 guides the light from the second LED 873 to the second light emitting display portion 868 of the corresponding region 878aa corresponding to the light receiving portion 878a, as well as both sides in the vertical direction from the corresponding region 878aa. Alternatively, the light is guided also to the second light-emitting display portion 868 arranged in the protruding region 878ab separated to one of them.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 176, the second light guide unit 883 includes a right angle part 883b that is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis direction of the second LED 873 when viewed from the thickness direction of the second light guide plate 878. It is provided in a bent shape including an inclined or bent portion 883a that is inclined or bent in the three-dimensional direction of the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when parallel light rays enter the second light guide portion 883 from the second LED 873, the light in the direction indicated by the arrow 883b1 that enters the right angle portion 883b of the second light guide portion 883 is As shown in FIG. 177 (a), the light is reflected at a right angle portion 883b in the direction indicated by the arrow 883b2 at a substantially right angle in the thickness direction. Therefore, the portion corresponding to the right angle portion 883b of the second light emitting display portion 868 can be made to emit light brightly.

  At the same time, the light in the 883a1 direction incident on the inclined or bent portion 883a of the second light guide portion 883 is inclined or bent on the inclined or bent portion 883a as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177 (b). Depending on the surface, the light is reflected in the 883a2 direction of the three-dimensional direction of the X, Y, and Z axes. For this reason, the second light-emitting display portion 868 corresponding to the second light guide portion 883 and the second light-emitting display portion 868 reflect light by irregular reflection or the like and emits light, while the second light guide plate 878 has a thickness of 1 in the plate surface direction. A specific part of the second light emitting display unit 868 at the light arrival position can be partially emitted in a linear or other light emitting manner while being guided in the plate surface direction by being reflected one or more times.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177 (b), when the light incident in the direction indicated by the arrow 883a1 in the second light guide plate 878 is reflected by the V-groove-shaped inclined or bent portion 883a, the inclined or bent portion. Since 883a is inclined or bent in a three-dimensional direction with respect to the optical axis, the light is reflected in the second light guide plate 878 in the direction of 883a2 by the inclined or bent portion 883a.

  Then, this light is sequentially guided to the second light guide part 883 corresponding to the specific part of the second light emitting display part 868 while being reflected once or plural times in the second light guide plate 878, and the specific part. The second light guide part 883 corresponding to the light is reflected to a specific part of the second light emitting display part 868 to emit light from the specific part. Accordingly, a portion of the second light emitting display portion 868 that is irradiated with light reflected in the three-dimensional direction by the inclined or bent portion 883a can be slightly emitted with low brightness.

  If it does in this way, the 2nd, 3rd light emission display parts 868-870 can change a light emission state with a light emission position. Therefore, as compared with the case where the second and third light emitting display portions 868 to 870 emit light with substantially uniform brightness, the light emitting effect suitable for the molded object on the inner and outer walls 856 to 859 is possible depending on the strength of the light emitting state. is there. Also, even when there is an obstacle such as the vibration-type production means 881, the light from the second LED 873 can be guided around the obstacle, so that there is an advantage that the structure can be simplified.

  The plurality of second light guide portions 883 around the vibration effect means 881 guides light to the second light emitting display portion 868 on the back side of the vibration effect means 881. Are arranged in the circumferential direction along the plate surface direction. In addition to configuring the second light guide 883 in a bent shape, the second light guide plate 878 is configured in a curved shape between the light receiving unit 878a and the second light emitting display unit 868 that is a light guide target, and the second light guide plate 878 is configured in a second shape. The light may be guided while being reflected a plurality of times in the thickness direction within the light guide plate 878. The second and third light emitting display portions 869 and 870 can be similarly implemented.

  As shown in FIGS. 167 to 171, the vibration production means 881 is mounted on the mounting base 888 mounted from the inside of the opening 860 b below the inner wall 856, and is disposed on the gaming area 323 side of the mounting base 888 and in the vertical direction. The stage 890 pivotally supported so as to vibrate in the front-rear direction around the support shaft 889, the vibration means 891 for the stage 890 disposed inside the mounting base 888, and the light emitting display portion provided on the mounting base 888. 892, an LED substrate 894 having an LED 893 for the light emitting display portion 892 and disposed inside the mounting base 888, and a touch sensor 895 mounted inside the mounting base 888.

  The director 890 is a finger modeled, and is arranged with the finger in front. The bracket 890b is pivotally attached to the bearing portion 888a of the mounting base 888 on the back side of the mounting base 888, and is supported. The shaft 889 can vibrate in the left-right direction. The effector 890 is provided with a conductor layer 890a on its surface, such as metal plating. In place of the conductor layer 890a made of metal plating, a conductor such as metal may be provided on a part of the surface.

  The vibration means 891 includes a vibration table 896, a vibration motor 897 fixed to the vibration table 896 via a fixture 897a, and an eccentric weight 899 fixed to a rotation shaft 898 in the front-rear direction of the vibration motor 897. When the eccentric weight 899 rotates around the rotation shaft 898, the vibration table 896 vibrates back and forth.

  The vibration table 896 is configured in a U shape so as to straddle the LED substrate 894 arranged in the vertical direction, and the front and rear leg portions 896a are integrated with the effector 890 in the front-rear direction via a pair of upper and lower front-rear connecting shafts 900. It is connected. Note that the vibration in the vertical direction of the vibration table 896 is regulated by the support shaft 889. The connecting shaft 900 is inserted through the through hole 901 of the mounting base 888.

  Between the mounting base 888 and the vibration base 896, biasing means 902 for biasing the effector 890 toward the mounting base 888 is provided. The urging means 902 protrudes from the mounting base 888 toward the vibration base 896 and is fixed to the fixed shaft 893b inserted into the through hole 893a of the leg 896b. The mounting base 888 and the vibration base 896 are fitted to the fixed shaft 893b. And a spring 893c interposed therebetween.

  The light emitting display portion 892 is arranged so as to sandwich the finger portion of the effect body 890 from both the upper and lower sides, and is configured to be long in the front-rear direction. Each light emitting display portion 892 has a through hole 892a formed in a through shape in the mounting base 888 and a light transmitting portion 892b fitted in the through hole 892a, and emits light by the light of the LED 893 from the LED substrate 894. It is like that. The LED substrate 894 is arranged vertically in the vertical direction corresponding to each light-emitting display portion 892, and both upper and lower ends are attached to a hollow support 903 via buffer means 904.

  The support 903 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and the light guide wall 903a fixed to the inner side of the mounting base 888 and the peripheral wall portion 903b protruding from the light guide wall 903a toward the LED substrate 894 are integrated. In preparation. The light guide wall 903a is provided with a light transmitting portion 892b that protrudes integrally. A recessed portion is provided behind the light transmitting portion 892b.

  The buffering means 904 is for buffering so that the vibration is not transmitted to the LED substrate 894 side even when the effector 890 is vibrated by the vibrating means 891, and a pair of rubbers disposed on both sides of the LED substrate 894, etc. Buffer body 904a, mounting boss 904c projecting from bracket 904b on the outer periphery of peripheral wall 903b and inserted through buffer body 904a with LED substrate 894 interposed therebetween, and mounting tool for mounting buffer body 904a to mounting boss 904c 904d. Thus, by providing the LED board 894 on the mounting base 888 via the buffering means 904, damage on the LED board 894 side due to vibration of the vibrating means 891 can be prevented.

  The touch sensor 895 is for detecting when the player touches the conductor layer 890a of the effector 890 and operating the airflow effecting means 855 for a predetermined time. Has been. The touch sensor 895 is fitted in a housing portion 895a formed integrally on the inner side of the mounting base 888, and is electrically connected to the conductor layer 890a of the effector 890 via the harness 895b.

  As shown in FIG. 174, the air blowing effect means 855 is provided on the opposite side of the upper speaker 666 b inside the upper protrusion 852, and the wind from the air blowing effect means 855 is directed to the inner wall 857. A blower opening 905 for blowing air to the side is provided. The air blowing effect means 855 includes air blowing means 906 such as a sirocco fan, and is detachably fixed to an attachment portion 907 formed integrally with the second light guide plate 879. The second light guide plate 879 is provided with an air passage 908 that connects the air discharge side of the air blowing means 906 and the air outlet 905 side. The blower opening 905 is provided with a net 909 for preventing insertion of unauthorized members.

  When the touch sensor 895 detects that the player touches the vibrating effect body 890, the control unit of the air blowing effect means 855 operates the air blowing effect means 855 for a predetermined time by a signal from the touch sensor 895. It is configured. It should be noted that when the touch sensor 895 detects, the air blowing effect means 855 may stop the air blowing.

  FIG. 178 illustrates a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The right protrusion 851 and the like of the second side unit 850 can be configured as shown in FIG. The second side unit 850 is provided with a first light emitting display portion 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light emitting display portion 868 on the inner wall 856, respectively. The LED substrate 876 is disposed in the right side protruding portion 851 so as to face the front wall 853 on the rear side of the second light emitting display portion 868.

  A first LED 871 for the first light emitting display unit 866 and a second LED 873 for the second light emitting display unit 868 are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 894. Between the LED substrate 894 and the first light emitting display unit 866, a light guide tube 910 that partitions the light from the first LED 871 so as not to leak to other than the first light emitting display unit 866 is provided.

  The second LED 873 is disposed at the end of the LED substrate 876, and a light guide plate 922 is provided inside the inner wall 856 corresponding to the second LED 873. The inner wall 856 and the light guide plate 922 are inclined so that the front side is on the game area 323 side, and the light transmission portion 868b for the second light emitting display portion 868 is integrally provided on the light guide plate 922, and the light transmission portion 868b and A second light guide portion 883 such as a V-groove is provided on the opposite side.

  In this way, the LED substrate 894 can be disposed on the rear side inside the right protruding portion 851. In that case, since the first and second light emitting display portions 866 and 868 are both on the front side of the LED substrate 894, the first and second LEDs 871 and 873 may be mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 894.

  FIG. 179 illustrates a tenth embodiment of the present invention. The right protrusion 851 and the like of the second side unit 850 can also be configured as shown in FIG. The second side unit 850 is provided with a first light emitting display portion 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light emitting display portion 868 on the inner wall 856, respectively. The LED substrate 876 is disposed in the right side protruding portion 851 so as to face the second light emitting display portion 868 on the inner side of the inner wall 856 and to be substantially parallel to the inner wall 856. Two LEDs 873 are mounted.

  The first light emitting display portion 866 on the front wall 853 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 876. A first LED 871 is mounted on the front end portion of the LED substrate 876 on the side opposite to the game area 323, and a light guide plate 923 that guides light from the first LED 871 to the first light emitting display portion 866 side is behind the front wall 853. Are arranged close to and in parallel. The light guide plate 923 has a light guide portion 924 such as a V-groove.

  As described above, the LED substrate 894 can be disposed on the inner side corresponding to the inner wall 856 inside the right protruding portion 851. Note that the inner wall 856 and the LED substrate 876 may be provided in an inclined manner as in the ninth embodiment.

  180 to 183 illustrate an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (d), the second side unit 850 has four types of models A to D for the general purpose model to the dedicated model. The case where the side unit 850 is mounted on the front surface of the front door 306 to manufacture a specific type of pachinko machine 300 will be illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the second side unit 850 includes a unit substrate 911 such as an LED substrate 894, and the unit substrate 911 stores an identification information storage unit that stores identification information of the second side unit 850. 912 is provided. As shown in FIG. 183, the identification information storage unit 912 stores identification information capable of individually identifying the four types of models A to D. The identification information storage unit 912 is connected to the effect control board 914 via the relay board 913 on the main body side of the pachinko machine 300 and the like.

  The effect control board 914 executes control of the effect image etc. of the normal game, and in the pachinko machine 300 of the model concerned, the unique information for storing the unique information of the second side unit 850 to be attached to the front door 306 A collation unit (determination unit) that collates the storage unit 915 with the unique information stored in the unique information storage unit 915 and the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit 912 to determine whether the second side unit 850 is appropriate. 916, and the error display of the second side unit 850 is displayed on the display screen of the image display means 917 of the game board 313 when a collation result indicating that the second side unit 850 is different is obtained. It is like that.

  If such a configuration is adopted, for example, when the second side unit 850 after being removed for inspection or the like is mounted in a game hall, even if the second side unit 850 is erroneously mounted, the fact It is possible to prevent such things from being left without knowing.

  For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 300 is turned on after the second side unit 850 is mounted, the collation unit 916 reads out the identification information of the second side unit 850 actually mounted and stores it in the unique information storage unit 915. Verification with the specified unique information. If the second side unit 850 is different from the original one, the image display means 917 displays the error of the second side unit 850. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being performed without knowing the fact even though the second side unit 850 is wrong.

  When various images are displayed on the display screen of the image display means 917, as shown in FIG. 184, a normal game image layer 918, a normal error display layer 919, and an error display layer 920 of the second side unit 850 are provided. The priorities of the layers 918 to 920 are set so that the priorities become higher later in the order. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a display error in the second side unit 850 at the earliest stage after turning on the power.

  Although the eighth to eleventh embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the eighth to eleventh embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible. When a side unit 850 that protrudes from the side of the gaming area 323 to the front side is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body, it is sufficient that the side unit 850 has a front width larger than a rear width. . Therefore, in this case, the front width is generally larger than the rear width due to inclination or bulging toward the game area 323, but the inclination or bulge toward the opposite side of the game area 323 is performed. It is also possible to do so.

  In addition, as for the inner surface by the side of the game area | region 323 of the side part 850, it is desirable for the front side to protrude inside the game area | region 323 side rather than the back side. The side unit 850 may be provided with a vertically long right protrusion 851 and / or a horizontally long upper protrusion 852.

  The LED substrate 876 may be disposed on either the front side or the rear side of the light emitting display portion 892. The LED corresponding to the light guide plate is preferably provided in the vicinity of the edge of the LED substrate 876. However, when the light guide plate is bent, the LED corresponding to the light guide plate may be disposed in the middle portion of the LED substrate 876. Good. The light guide plate may be either colorless and transparent or colored and transparent.

  It is also possible to provide other movable effect means or the like instead of the vibration effect means 881. As the light guide means, a light guide plate is generally used, but a light guide plate having a shape other than the light guide plate may be used.

34 Production buttons (operation means)
35 Cross operation means (operation means)
45 Base plate (game material)
47 Center display frame unit (game member)
49 Grand Prize units (game materials)
53 1st special symbol display means (symbol display means)
54 Second special symbol display means (symbol display means)
56 First special symbol starting means (starting means)
57 Second special symbol starting means (starting means)
60 Image display means 60a Display screen 74 Window frame (game member)
75a First possible 34 Moving body (movable body)
76a Second movable body (movable body)
77a Third movable body (movable body)
78a Fourth movable body (movable body)
114 Production Design 114a Design Image 114b Decoration Image 116a Volume Adjustable Notification Image (Notification Image)
116b Light quantity adjustable notification image (notification image)
117a Volume setting image 117b Light amount setting image 118a Menu displayable notification image (notification image)
118b Menu image 120 Power saving mode notification image 138 Special start port check processing means (start detection processing means)
139 Special random number storage means (random number storage means)
142 Special profit status generating means (profit status generating means)
161 Reservation base image 163 Error notification image B1 First fixed concealment area (first display area)
B2 Second fixed concealment area (first display area)
B3 Third fixed concealment area (first display area)
B4 Fourth fixed concealment area (first display area)
B5 Fifth fixed concealment area (first display area)
C Movable concealment area (second display area)
D Non-hidden area (third display area)
X1-first hold display image Y1-second hold display image 301 outer frame (first support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
313 Game board 323 Game area 347 Ball tank (frame side component)
353 LED connection board 388 Center display frame (center case)
391 Mounting frame 393 Image display means 394 to 397 Movable rendering means 399 Harness cradle (back side pressing means)
426 Front side member 427 Rear side member 453 Display means mounting part 454 Swelling part 462 Insertion / removal part 467 Side board mounting base (second member, back side pressing means)
499 Fixed engagement portion (first member)
546, 562, 574 Movable rendering body 547, 564, 575 Driving means 611 Guide rail 615 Missing part 616 Restricting part 617 Supporting part 623 Pushing means 625 Pressing guide part 300 Pachinko machine 301 Outer frame (first support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
304 Locking means 306 Front door 310 Decoration member 311 Game board mounting part 313 Game board 322 Door base 323 Game area 328 Upper plate (launch ball storage part)
329 Lower plate (excess sphere storage part)
331 Lower decorative cover 340 Glass unit 341 Vertical frame material 342 Vertical frame material 343 Upper horizontal frame material 344 Lower horizontal frame material 387 Guide rail 388 Center case 393 Image display means F Floor surface U Standby position (upward position)
D push-in position 645 first support portion 646 second support portion 647 front protrusions 666a and 666b upper speaker 667a and 667b lower speaker 668a first side unit 668b second side unit 669 front overhang unit (front protrusion unit)
669a Protruding part 670a, 670b Protective cover 671a Glass plate (viewing plate)
671b Holding frame 688 Release operation means 689 Interlock mechanism 690 Support plate 699 Fraud prevention edges 702a, 702b Speaker mounting protrusion 713 Internal space 715 Light guide 720 LED
721 LED board 722 Light emitting decoration cover 730 Upper protrusion 731 Unit frame 732 Unit reinforcing plate 733 First positioning means 734 Second positioning means 735-737 First to third locking means 738 to 740 First to third fixing means 738c ˜740c Fixing screw 744, 744a Light emitting display unit 745 Air guide unit 746 Blow unit 752 Clamp unit 782 First operation panel unit 783 Second operation panel unit 785 Operation unit arrangement unit 788a Ball lending operation unit 788b Return operation unit 788c Means 789 Cross operation means 791 Light amount adjustment means 791a Upper operation key 793 Bottom wall 793a Horizontal part 793b Inclined part 794 Front side support part 795 Main body side support part 796a Island equipment 798 Peripheral cover 799c Perspective part 800c Rear cover part 804 Reflection prevention means 804a Reflection Lock-in prevention wall 805 Fixed support frame 806 First rotation support means 807 First rotation body (inner rotation body)
808 Second rotation support means 809 Second rotating body (outer rotating body)
810 Rotation drive means 810a Drive motor 813 Production button (pressing operation body)
813a Operation unit 815 Vibration generating means 815a Vibration body 815b Vibration motor 815d Eccentric weight 818 Insertion prevention means 819 Gear train 819a First driven gear 819b Second driven gear 819c Drive gear 819d Intermediate gear 824 Fixed support member 827 Reinforcement member 827c Presser members 828a and 828b First position detection means 829 Second position detection means 831 Vibration transmission means 833 Operation detection means 835 Production operation means 836 Light emission operation member 836d LED board 838 Front guide means 839 Rear guide means 840 Shielding plate 850 Second side Unit 851 Right side protruding part (left and right side protruding part)
851a, 851b Horizontal width 852 Upper protrusions 852a, 852b Vertical width 853, 854 Front wall 855 Wind effect means 856, 857 Inner walls 856a, 857a Inclined portions 856b, 857b Swelling portion 861 Reinforcing members 866, 867 First light emitting display portion 868, 869 2nd light emission display part 870 3rd light emission display part 871,872 1st LED
873,874 Second LED
875 3rd LED
876,877 LED substrates 878,879 Second light guide plate (second light guide means)
880 Third light guide plate (third light guide means)
881 Vibrating presentation means 894 LED substrate 902 Energizing means 912 Identification information storage unit 915 Unique information storage unit 916 Verification unit (determination unit)
917 Image display means

Claims (3)

A glass plate disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body so that the gaming area can be visually recognized;
In a gaming machine provided with light emitting means arranged on the front side of the glass plate,
Provided with a reflection preventing means for preventing light from the light emitting means from being reflected on the glass plate.

A gaming machine characterized by that. The reflection preventing means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an anti-reflection wall disposed between the glass plate and the light emitting means. A light guide part for guiding light from the light emitting means;
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a part of the reflection preventing wall is provided above the light guide unit.